JP2017202338A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game.SOLUTION: Even a game ball flowed down on a regulation position of changeable means that can be changed between an open position where a game ball can enter ball entrance means and the regulation position where a ball entrance is regulated, is made by ball entrance assistance means to enter the ball entrance means more easily at an open position thereafter so that the number of game balls that do not enter the ball entrance means can be suppressed. Accordingly, an effect of enhancing amusement of a player is achieved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by winning a game ball in the open prize opening.

JP-A-9-700

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is advantageous to the player on the basis of a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege, a variable means that can be varied between an opening position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a regulation position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means are identified Based on the establishment of the condition, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the opening operation to be varied from the restriction position to the release position until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set a plurality of times, and the specific game execution means In a case where a specific game is being executed, there is a ball entry assisting unit that makes it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable unit to enter the ball entry unit in the subsequent opening operation.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the entry assisting means guides the gaming ball on the restriction position of the variable means to a position where the entry can be made in the entry means. It has a taxiway.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the entry assisting means can enter the entry means until the variable means is changed to the open position. And a flow velocity reduction means for reducing the flow velocity so as to achieve a velocity to flow down a specific range.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein when the specific game is being executed, the variable means is in the restricted position and enters the ball. A first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be played, and when the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assistant means, the game ball can be detected The first effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means and the first detection means, and the game effect is detected when the game ball is detected by the second detection means. It has an effect execution means for executing a different second effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, even a game ball that has flowed down on the restriction position of the variable means can be easily entered into the entry means at the next open position by the entry assist means. There is an effect that the number of game balls that do not enter the ball means can be suppressed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the ball entry assisting means is arranged at a position where the game ball on the restricting position of the variable means can enter the ball entry means. Since the guide path for guiding is provided, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the entrance means can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the game can be made within a range in which the entering means can be entered until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the ball entry assisting means has the flow velocity reduction means for reducing the flow velocity so that the ball flows down, there is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means. .

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, when a specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting means, the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, when a game ball is detected by the second detection means, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect execution means.

  As a result, when a game ball enters the entrance means, the effect execution means executes whether or not a game ball that did not originally enter the entrance means is entered by the entrance assistant means. It can be determined by the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be recognized by the second effect that the player is advantageous.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a composite operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group, and a 2nd gear group. It is a back exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, the 1st gear group, and the 2nd gear group. It is a front perspective view of a meniscus member. It is a back perspective view of a meniscal member. It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is the fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XVIIa-XVIIa line of FIG. 16, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit after moving a drive device from (a). It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit after the drive motor is separated from the drive gear from (a). It is. (A) is a front view of a two-layer gear, (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a pair of slide member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a pair of slide member. (A) is a front view of the two-layer gear in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of a two-layer gear, (c) is a side view of a two-layer gear. (A) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (A) is a front view of a two-layer gear in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a diagram of two in the XXXIc-XXXIc line in FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of a layer gear. (A) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32 (a). . It is a front view of the two-layer gear in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a front exploded perspective view of the double layer gear in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a double layer gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear in 8th Embodiment. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. It is a graph which shows the rotational speed of a double layer gear. (A) is a front perspective view of the specific winning opening 650, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. (A) is the front view which removed the front cover of the special prize-winning apparatus 650, (b) is sectional drawing in the LIIb-LIIb line | wire of FIG. 52 (a), (c) is FIG. Is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIc-LIIc. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the entrance timing in the opening / closing operation | movement of an entrance restriction board. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed schematically the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern A of the entrance restriction plate, and (b) schematically shows the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern B of the entrance restriction plate. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the detection timing of various sensors, and the content of the effect display based on the detection result. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the appearance effect by the normal effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the appearance by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example It is the figure which showed typically the production and the escape production. (A) is the figure which showed typically the capture effect and escape effect by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the special effect in the jackpot game in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the appearance effect and recapture effect by a screen. (A) is the figure which showed typically the appearance effect and failure effect by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the normal effect in the jackpot game in the 1st control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the capture production by a screen. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical accessory and display content in an accessory interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical accessory and display content in an accessory interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in a background interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in a background interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot judgment value of a special symbol in a 1st control example, (b) is the 1st in a 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type, (c) is a correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the judgment value of the normal symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a response | compatibility with the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of big hit in the 1st control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first control example, (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability variation) in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory interlocking effect production table in a 1st control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the background lottery table in a 1st control example. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the work RAM in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the background change extraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot winning process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit effect production process which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance passage process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot display process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the appearance effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the escape effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the failure production | presentation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the capture production process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the recapture effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timing alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the comment type | system | group effect in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the continuous striking system effect in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the touch type | system | group effect in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the electric structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment background table at the time of a hit normal reach in the 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the comment background table at the time of a hit super reach in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment background table at the time of a detachment in a 2nd control example, (b) is the pattern content of the fixed comment background table at the time of a detachment in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the hit fixed comment background table in the second control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment table in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous striking system effect lottery table in a 2nd control example. It is. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production screen of the continuous striking system effect in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production screen of the continuous striking system effect in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the content of RAM223 in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st lottery table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd lottery table in a 3rd control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third lottery table in the third control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the fourth lottery table in the third control example. (E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is a diagram of the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st remaining time lottery table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the content of the 2nd remaining time lottery table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 3rd remaining time lottery table in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW press adaptation processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern at the time of jackpot C in the 4th control example, (b) is in the opening / closing pattern at the time of the small hit in the 4th control example, It is the schematic diagram which showed the entrance timing typically. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process between rounds performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 26, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the made through-hole, and is being fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R probability variation jackpot and 16R hourly jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “16R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 16 rounds, and “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot of 16 rounds. Later, a transition is made to the low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), this is a jackpot that results in a short-time state.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state display associated with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  As a result, during normal times, there are many cases where the electric prize accompanying the second prize opening 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize opening 640, so the first prize opening 64 without the electric prize is displayed. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  It should be noted that the selection ratio of the jackpot type that is selected when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the ball at the second winning port 640 may be different. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning port 64 when the ball wins the second winning port 640, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. Set higher than. Thereby, the change by the way of hitting the sphere described above can be made clearer.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close on the right side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. )). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so that these states are repeated alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The first winning sensor 650 a and the second incoming sensor 650 b disposed in the specific winning unit 650 are connected, and the MPU 201 is output from various switches 208 and from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, an entrance A sensor 651a, an exit sensor 652a, a detour sensor 653a, and the like are connected to each other. Other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the housing structure of the units 300 and 400 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the composite operation unit 400 is mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the front unit 300 and the composite operation unit 400 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while contacting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212. It is arrange | positioned in the bottom wall part 211 by the aspect (refer FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the combined operation unit 400 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is disposed on the front side of the combined operation unit 400 in a stacked state, and is accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 400) is arranged in a stacked state in which the other operation units (for example, the front unit 300) are superimposed on the front side. In a front view, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. In the description of FIG. 8, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 8 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slid and moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 moves to the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the third symbol display device 81). It is arranged on the front, see FIG.

  Each of these operation units 300 and 400 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and, as described above, is disposed in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, not only each of the operation units 300 and 400 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 400, the retracted position and the extended position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B are front perspective views of the composite operation unit 400. 9A, the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 9B illustrates the state where the slide member 420 and the meniscus member 460 are disposed at the extended position. . In addition, the protruding position of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 is formed as a terminal end located on the opposite side of the retracted position described above among the terminal ends of the movable range of the slide member 420.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 are slid in the vertical direction, and the half-moon member 460 is pivotally supported in the slide member 420 in the course of the slide movement (see FIG. 12). Is rotated around. Next, the overall configuration of the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

  10 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. 440 is a front exploded perspective view of the second gear group 450 and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the pair of slide members 420, the back cover 430, the first gear group 440, and the second gear group 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the composite operation unit 400 includes a pair of left and right base members 410 and a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the rear case 210. A pair of slide members 420 formed so as to be slidable to each other, a back cover 430 that forms a space between the main body portion 421 by being fastened to the back surface of the main body portion 421 of the slide members 420, and a slide member The first gear group 440 disposed between the 420 and the back cover 430, the second gear group 450 disposed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430, and the reverse of the second gear group 450. It mainly includes a meniscus member 460 that is locked to the gear 453, and a drive device 470 that generates a drive force that moves the slide member 420. .

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the vertical direction and is a skeleton of the composite operation unit 400, and is a long plate-shaped main body portion 411 that matches the thickness direction with the front-rear direction, A plurality of slide holes 412 drilled in the thickness direction and extending in the up-down direction, an alignment wall 413 formed on opposing surfaces of the pair of base members 410 as wall surfaces parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412, and assembly A fixed rack gear member 414 in which rack gears 414a and 414b are formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface in contact with the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9).

  The slide hole 412 is a long hole that regulates the slide direction of the slide member 420. The slide hole 412 is connected to the approximate center of each base member 410 and has a pair of intermediate slide holes 412a whose extending directions coincide with each other. An outer slide hole 412b formed on the outside of the slide hole 412a (opposite side to which the pair of base members 410 oppose) and an inner side of the intermediate slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410) An inner slide hole 412c. The outer slide hole 412b and the inner slide hole 412c are formed in a staggered manner. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412 b is formed in the upper part of the base member 410, the inner slide hole 412 c is formed in the lower part of the base member 410.

  The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 while being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting a driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a bar shape with a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a engraved over an outer surface that is a member to be formed, which is a side surface that is in contact with alignment wall 413, and a surface opposite to the outer surface that is formed in parallel with the outer surface. And a limited rack gear 414b which is engraved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and which is engraved only near the center of the base member 410.

  The permanent rack gear 414a meshes with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b meshes with the first gear group 440, details of which will be described later. Further, the limited rack gear 414b has a start gear tooth 414b1 (end gear tooth) arranged on the side where the first gear group 440 starts to mesh with the deformed gear 441, and is formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

  The slide member 420 is a member that is slid up and down while the meniscus member 460 is disposed at the center. The slide members 420 are formed in a pair of upper and lower parts, and since the configuration of each slide member 420 is common (point symmetry at the center point in front view), only one (upper side) slide member 420 will be described, and the other (lower side). Description of the slide member 420 is omitted.

  That is, one slide member 420 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction and has a main body portion 421 in which steps are formed on the front side at both ends, and vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421. A pair of transmitted leg portions 422 that extend, a pair of side wall portions 423 that extend in a plate shape from the upper and lower ends of the main body portion 421 to the back side (front side in FIG. 11), and a protrusion from the back surface of the main body portion 421 A plurality of first pivot pins 424 that are provided in the left-right direction and a plurality of second pivot pins 425 that project from the back of one end of the main body 421 (to the right in FIG. 11). And mainly.

  The main body portion 421 is disposed so as to face the large-diameter shaft support hole 421a formed in the central portion, the rotation restricting hole 421b formed in an arc shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and the upper side wall portion 423. And a slide regulating wall portion 421c whose central side is close to the side wall portion 423 and a slide regulating pin 421d that protrudes to the back side at both ends and is formed in a pair of upper and lower sides. The

  The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arcuate wall portion 461c of the meniscus member 460 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 421a has a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arcuate wall portion 461c. The meniscus member 460 and the reverse gear 453 are connected through the shaft support hole 421a so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  The rotation restricting hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the meniscal member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation restricting hole 421b is slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. When the locking pin 461e is brought into contact with the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b, further rotation of the meniscus member 460 is restricted.

  The slide regulating wall portion 421c is a portion that accommodates the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and a portion formed in a step has a biasing force on the slide rack 442. The urging spring 442c is applied in such a manner as to stop one end thereof.

  The slide restricting pin 421d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and inserted into the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The collar member C (see FIG. 17A) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion where the flange is formed is each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. It is formed slightly smaller than the width. Therefore, the flange is interposed between the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the main body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. Thereby, the slide restricting pin 421d is formed to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while the movement in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a is restricted.

  The retaining plate B (see FIG. 19A) is formed with a width larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restriction pin 421d, the slide member 420 is connected to the base member 410 so as not to be pulled out.

  In addition, the retaining plate B has a fastening hole formed on the surface that contacts the end of the slide restricting pin 421d, and the periphery of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. The built-up portion is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is disposed at the root portion of the slide restricting pin 421d and the built-up portion of the retaining plate B is disposed at the tip portion, so that the shaft of the slide restricting pin 421d can be used as the intermediate slide hole. The slide holes 412a to 412c including the 412a can be stably supported while being matched with the opening direction (see FIG. 19A).

  The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted, and is the same as the rack gear 422a meshed with the driving gear 473 of the driving device 470 and the slide restriction pin 421d of the main body portion 421. A protruding slide regulating pin 422b, a front side wall portion 422c that covers the side surface of the front side of the rack gear 422a (a direction perpendicular to the gear teeth continuous direction), and a front side wall portion 422c are formed. And a cutout portion 422d which is an arcuate cutout.

  Similar to the slide restriction pin 421d, the slide restriction pin 422b is provided with the collar member C and the retaining plate B, and is inserted into the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. In this embodiment, the slide restricting pin 422b of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the right side when viewed from the front is inserted into the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide restricting pin of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the left side when viewed from the front. 422b is inserted through the inner slide hole 412c of the base member 410. Thus, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 422b, the slide restricting pin 422b is stably supported while being aligned with the opening direction of the slide holes 412b and 412c, and the slide member 420 and the base The member 410 can be connected so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The front side wall portion 422c is formed in a manner capable of overlapping with the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

  The notch 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A). When the two are arranged together, the representative circle is formed in a portion projected onto the front side wall portion 422c in front view.

  The side wall part 423 includes a notch part 423a that is notched above and below a region where the shaft support hole 421a of the main body part 421 is formed. The notch 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the meniscus member 460 passes.

  The first shaft support pin 424 includes a raised shaft support pin 424a in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are continuously provided from the back surface of the slide member 420, and a double-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. The shaft support pin 424b is mainly provided.

  Since the raised shaft support pin 424a includes a ring-shaped portion having the same height around the periphery, the inserted second gear group 450 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (with a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). It is pivotally supported. Thereby, the 1st gear group 440 can be arrange | positioned in the space.

  The back cover 430 is a member that covers the body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the back surface of the slide member 420, and a pair of insertions through which the slide restriction pins 421d are inserted. A hole 430a is formed in each one end.

  The first gear group 440 is a gear group that is housed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and has a deformed gear 441 meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and a side surface. The rack gear 442b is engraved and the slide rack 442 is slid along the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, the pair of transmission gears 443 for transmitting the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and the deformed gear. An intermediate plate 444 that is a plate-like member that covers the transmission gear 443 disposed on the deformed gear 441 side from the axial direction, and is fastened and fixed to the main body 421 of the slide member 420. Is mainly provided.

  The deformed gear 441 includes a starting gear tooth 441a which is formed larger than other teeth among the gear teeth to be engraved.

  The deformed gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are each supported by a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 of the slide member 420.

  The slide rack 442 includes a main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular bar shape, a rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and protrudes from the side surface of the main body portion 442a. And an urging spring 442c locked to the protruding portion.

  The urging spring 442c is engaged with the step portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, thereby generating an urging force that pushes the slide rack 442 back to the transmission gear 443 side.

  The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and a shaft support pin 444a projects from the front side.

  Of the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450, a transmission gear 451 that is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a.

  The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the meniscus member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 using the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the left-right direction. ) And a plurality of transmission gears 451 whose outer end gear meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and an inner end portion of the plurality of transmission gears 451 opposite to the permanent rack gear 414a. A two-layer gear 452 in which gear teeth 452a on the upper layer (rear layer) are meshed with a transmission gear 451 pivotally supported on the shaft, and a split gear tooth 452b on a lower layer (front layer) of the two-layer gear 452 And a reversing gear 453 to be meshed.

  In the transmission gear 451, among the plurality of gears, the gear at the end of the base member 410 on the permanent rack gear 414 a side is pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444 a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are supported by the raising shaft of the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by the pin 424a.

  As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a includes a ring-shaped portion having the same height around the transmission pin 424a, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (with a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). It is pivotally supported. Thereby, the axial direction height of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gear 451 can be matched. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are axially supported with a predetermined distance from the main body 421 of the slide member 420.

  The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material, and gear teeth 452a engraved in the upper layer (back side layer), divided gear teeth 452b engraved in the lower layer (front side layer), upper layer and lower layer And a sliding wall portion 452d that is an arcuate wall surface that is slid by the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

  Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

  The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of a region in which the dividing gear teeth 452b are engraved and a region in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed, and another intermediate portion at the boundary between the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d. Starting gear teeth 452b1 larger than the gear teeth 452b2 are engraved. Note that the depressions 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 as receiving portions of the gear teeth are formed deeper than the depressions between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, the starting gear teeth 453b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453, which will be described later, can be received with good meshing (a state where the gear teeth are meshed deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth varies from one tooth to another, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be kept good.

  The depressions 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starter gear teeth 452b1 function as receiving parts for the starter gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B). Of the recesses 452b3 and 452b4, the side close to the sliding wall 452d is referred to as a first recess 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recess 452b3 is referred to as a second recess 452b4.

  The gear teeth 452b are formed smaller than the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the divided gear teeth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the misalignment at the start of meshing between the start gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the start gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 is suppressed, and the rotation accuracy when the meshing continues is improved. Can be made.

  Note that the start of meshing means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to contact, and is not limited to when the gear teeth start to contact each other. In the present embodiment, it means a time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 are brought into contact with each other.

  Further, when the meshing continues, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2 are meshed after the starter gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 mesh.

  As a method of increasing the size of the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of increasing the tooth width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) is also conceivable. However, in this embodiment, because the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure, the start gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to have the same tooth width and the tooth thickness (the dimension in the tooth continuous direction). ) And toothpaste are increased.

  The disc portion 452c is formed so as to overlap with the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 in the axial direction (FIG. 21B). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 move in the axial direction, the gear teeth are brought into contact with the disk portion 452c, thereby preventing the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 from wobbling. And further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 can be suppressed.

  The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the meniscus member 460 by being meshed with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and a main body portion 453 a formed into a tubular shape through which the cylindrical main body 462 a of the meniscal member 460 can be inserted. A reversing gear tooth 453b formed outwardly from one end of the main body 453a, and a main body 453a formed adjacent to the reversing gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer periphery of the cylindrical main body 462a. An arc-shaped concave portion 453c that is an arc-shaped wall surface that is disposed on the shaft object and is slid by the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide protrusion that forms the arc-shaped concave portion 453c. It mainly includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and a locking protrusion 453e that protrudes in the radial direction from a position obtained by dividing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 453a into three equal parts.

  The reversing gear teeth 453b are engraved at both ends thereof with starting gear teeth 453b1 larger in size (tooth thickness and tooth injury) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (the gear teeth other than both ends). The recess 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d as a gear tooth receiving portion is deeper than the recess formed between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear tooth 453b2. It is formed. Thereby, the starting gear teeth 452b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 can be received with good meshing (a state where the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth varies from one tooth to another, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be kept good.

  The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion that comes into contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a radius of curvature substantially the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

  The locking projection 453e is fitted in an arc-shaped wall portion 461c formed in the main body portion 461 of the meniscal member 460 in a manner in which relative locking is impossible. Thereby, the reversing gear 453 and the meniscal member 460 are rotated together.

  Next, the meniscal member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the meniscal member 460, and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the meniscal member 460. 14 and 15 show a state where the front cover 466 is removed from the main body 461 of the meniscal member 460.

  The half-moon member 460 is a member that is disposed in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and that is pivoted in such a manner that the top and bottom are reversed as the slide member 420 slides. A central gear 462 having a cylindrical main body 462a inserted through a connecting hole 461a formed in the vicinity of the center of the main body 461, a main body 461 which is a member and forming a skeleton of the meniscal member 460, and the central gear 462 A crank gear 464 having a plurality of claw members 463 that are slid along the main body 461 in accordance with the rotation of the main body 461 and a slide pin 464b that is inserted into a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw member 463, A transmission gear group 465 disposed between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshed with the center gear 462 and the crank gear 464; A cover 466 before the front side is fastened parts 461 mainly includes the drive lever 467 (see FIG. 12), a to be fastened to the ends of the tubular body 462a of the center gear 462.

  The main body 461 includes a connection hole 461a through which the center gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of shaft support pins 461b through which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are supported, and an inner periphery of the reversing gear 453 around the connection hole 461a. An arcuate wall portion 461c that is provided with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and that has a notch into which the locking protrusion 453e is fitted, a claw-like flange portion 461d on which a biasing spring is hooked, and a rear surface. And a locking pin 461e that protrudes.

  The locking pin 461e is inserted into the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21A). Thereby, the rotation angle of the meniscus member 460 is regulated.

  The center gear 462 includes a cylindrical main body 462a that is inserted into the connection hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange 462b that is formed in a radial flange shape from one end of the cylindrical main body 462a, and a flange thereof. A drive lever 467 is formed to be fastened and fixed to the gear tooth 462c engraved inward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of 462b and the other end that is opposite to one end of the cylindrical main body 462a. The fastening hole 462d is mainly provided with a claw-like flange portion 462e with one end hooked to the other end of the urging spring locked to the flange portion 461d of the main body portion 461.

  The claw member 463 mainly includes a long hole-like slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b which is a long plate-like body protruding from the front side. .

  The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into a long hole-like slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. Accordingly, the claw member 463 is formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466.

  The crank gear 464 is supported by a shaft support pin 461b of the main body portion 461, and a main body portion 464a whose gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a slide projecting eccentrically with the rotation shaft of the main body portion 464a. A pin 464b.

  The main body 464 a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462 by being engaged with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465.

  The slide pins 464b are moved about the respective pivot pins 461b as the main body 464a is rotated. As a result, the slide pin 464b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) arranged close to the center gear 462 and a second position arranged away from the center gear 462. By the movement of the slide pin 464b, the claw member 463 is moved along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26B).

  The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the meniscus member 460 between the main body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted therethrough. A long hole-like slide hole 466a is formed.

  The drive lever 467 has a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and an insertion hole 467b (see FIG. 13) drilled at a position matching the fastening hole 462d of the center gear 462. 13).

  The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion that is pushed by the slide rack 442. When the lever portion 467a is pushed by the slide rack 442, the center gear 462 is rotated.

  Returning to FIG. 10 from FIG. The driving device 470 is disposed so as to be raised to the front side at the center portion of the base member 410 and fastened and fixed to the base member 410, and a drive motor 472 fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. And a drive gear 473 inserted through the drive shaft of the drive motor 472.

  The fastening plate portion 471 includes a pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b that are formed in a circular arc shape along the outer shape of the motor case of the drive gear 472 and extend to the front side, and one restriction wall portion 471a ( The inner side in the assembled state is extended to a substantially intermediate position of the motor case, and the other regulating wall portion 471b (outer side in the assembled state) is extended longer than the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a. The pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b are used as a guide when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471.

  The drive gear 473 is arranged to face the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides, and meshes from both sides.

  Next, an overview of the movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 17A is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XVIIa-XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17A is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 after the drive device 470 is moved from FIG. 17A, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 taken along the line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. FIG. 19B is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19A. 16 and 17 illustrate a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the transmitted leg portions 422. At this time, the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 that is opposed to the drive gear 473 is engaged with the single drive gear 473. As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the transmitted leg portions 422 opposed to each other across the drive gear 473 are slid and moved in synchronization.

  That is, in the state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in front view, so that the upper slide member 420 is moved downward and the lower slide member 420 is moved downward. Are moved upward at a constant speed. At this time, the pair of drive motors 472 arranged on the left and right are controlled synchronously, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

  Further, the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied in directions opposite to the drive gear 473. For example, the right driving gear 473 is weighted in the direction of rotating the driving gear 473 clockwise from the upper slide member 420, and the driving gear 473 is counterclockwise rotated from the lower slide member 420. The weight is applied in the direction of rotation. Thus, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are equal to each other, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped by the balance of the weights of the pair of slide members 420 even when the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at arbitrary positions, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

  The pair of transmitted leg portions 422 of the slide member 420 are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 are left and right. Both are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front.

  As a result, even if one of the transmitted leg portions 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, when the distance from the meshed drive gear 473 increases) The other transmitted leg 422 connected to one transmitted leg 422 via the main body 421 is moved in the same direction as the one transmitted leg 422. That is, since it moves in the direction away from the drive gear 473 engaged, it can suppress applying a big load to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other to-be-transmitted leg part 422.

  Here, for example, one transmitted leg portion 422 of the slide member 420 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the other transmitted leg portion 422 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front. Then, one of the transmitted leg portions 422 is moved from the drive gear 473 in a direction in which the distance increases, so that the other transmitted leg portion 422 is pressed against the drive gear 473. As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other transmitted leg portion 422.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the drive gear 473. Therefore, the proper meshing relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg 422 is appropriate. Can be achieved. Moreover, the shape of a pair of slide member 420 can be made equivalent, and a member can be made shared.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c interfere in the front-rear direction (FIG. 19A, the vertical direction on the paper surface). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the notch 422d in front view. The positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473 will be described as a specific phase position. “The drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the notch 422d in front view”.

  Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position) that is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 422. . Thereby, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  Here, the pair of slide members 420 are disposed opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gear 422a of each transmitted leg portion 422. In this state, it is necessary to form a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are similarly disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are engaged with each other with arbitrary gear teeth. It ’s not good. That is, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 are fixed so that the gear teeth meshing with each other are fixed (representative gear teeth of the rack gear 422a that are brought into contact with the representative gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when engaged. Is formed).

  In order to form the proper meshing state, the notch 422d of the slide member 420 can be used. That is, the cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16) as described above. When the shaft and the center axis are arranged together, it is formed in a portion projected onto the front side wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16).

  Therefore, the notch portion 422d is disposed to face the pair of slide members 420 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed with each other in an appropriate meshing state.

  In a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 is blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 is the upper slide member and the lower slide member is the upper member). 420 is blocked from further movement downward). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved to the retracted position side, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (moving resistance increases).

  Therefore, in adjusting the position of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is randomly moved in the retract direction, the slide member 420 is the retracted position (specific phase) that is the end of the movable range. Position). Accordingly, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch 422d, and the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 in this state. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

  The arrangement of the driving device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, since the notch portions 422d are formed in the pair of slide members 420, the assembled driving device 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the drive device 470 can be improved.

  That is, when the notch portion 422d is not formed in the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front side wall portion 422c is formed in the entire region of the rack gear 422a), the driving device 470 is attached to the base member 410. Even if it tries to assemble | attach, the drive gear 473 will contact | abut to the front side wall part 422c, and the drive device 470 cannot be assembled | attached to the base member 410. FIG. Therefore, the driving device 470 has to be disposed on the opposite side of the front side wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom in arranging the driving device 470 is low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notch 422d is formed in the front side wall 422c, so that the drive gear 473 is moved in the front-rear direction through the notch 422d, so that the drive device 470 is moved to the slide member 420. It can be disposed on the front side (the side on which the front side wall portion 422c is disposed). Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

  Further, a front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in a layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c are moved back and forth by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position. They can be overlapped in a direction view (viewed in the vertical direction in FIG. 16). Accordingly, when the drive device 470 is replaced, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

  That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while keeping the drive gear 473 in contact with the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). . As a result, the drive motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshing state between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg 422. Therefore, before and after replacement of the drive motor 472, it is not necessary to adjust the meshing between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 again, and the maintainability can be improved.

  At this time, the drive gear 473 overlaps with the front side wall portion 422c of the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, a force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged opposite to each other with the rotation shaft interposed therebetween. Therefore, the drive motor 472 is restrained from tilting with respect to the drive gear 473.

  Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the restriction wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the restriction wall portions 471a and 471b. Inclination of the shaft center with respect to the drive gear 473 can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the drive gear 473 deform | transforms.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, one regulating wall portion 471 a is formed so as to retract from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 toward the fastening plate portion 471. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out with the extended end of one of the restriction walls 471a as the fulcrum S. That is, since the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are disposed adjacent to each other, the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a is used as a fulcrum S and the side surface of the driving motor 472 (FIG. 19). In (a), for the sake of easy understanding, the distance between the fulcrum S and the action point W when the force is applied to the drive motor 472 with the action point W being shown as an action point W in the drive motor 472 is minimized. It can be. As a result, the force required to pull out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed depending on the setting of the power point. FIG. 19A shows the relationship between the fulcrum S and the action point W and a virtual insulator.

  In addition, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other restriction wall 471b disposed to face the one restriction wall 471a. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 relative to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the other restriction wall 471b is formed to project forward (upward in FIG. 19A) from the extending end of the one restriction wall 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with the one restriction wall 471a as the fulcrum S, the drive motor 472 is moved from the other restriction wall 471b in the state W1 where the action point W is closest to the other restriction wall 471b. For this reason, it is possible to apply a force toward the direction of pushing back to the action point W. Therefore, the other restriction wall 471b can prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft. Accordingly, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out, the drive motor 472 can be reliably prevented from moving in a direction away from the one regulating wall portion 471a.

  Next, the two-layer gear 452 related to the rotation of the meniscal member 460 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20A is a front view of the two-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20B is a rear view of the two-layer gear 452.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disc portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20A, the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starter gear teeth 452b1 can be provided with durability that can withstand a collision (contact) with the reversing gear 453. In the present embodiment, only the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d are formed in a large size, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed in a small size, so that the durability is improved and the material cost is suppressed. Both can be achieved.

  The double-layer gear 452 includes a hollow bottom wall 452e as a wall surface that forms the bottom of the first hollow 452b3 and the second hollow 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f that connects the hollow bottom wall 452e and the ring-shaped rib. .

  Here, the second depression 452b4 needs to have a sufficient depth as a depression for receiving the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first depression 452b3 is engaged with the reversing gear 453. This is a recess into which the protruding receiving portion 453d enters. For this reason, the depth of the second depression 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the first depression 452b3 and the second depression 452b4 are formed with substantially the same depth. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material in the vicinity of the first dent 452b3 and the second dent 452b4 when the two-layer gear 452 is molded can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, a space is formed in a region surrounded by the wall portion formed by the bottom of the sliding wall 452d and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and the hollow bottom wall 452e. At this time, the sliding wall 452d and the hollow bottom wall 452e are formed with substantially the same thickness, so that the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding can be suppressed. Moreover, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

  Here, the hollow bottom wall 452e is not necessarily required to ensure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are formed in such a manner that they are connected by the hollow bottom wall portion 452e. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact when the starting gear teeth 452b1 abut on the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B).

  The push-back rib 452f is connected to the recess bottom wall 452e of the second recess 452b4. Here, the direction of the line of force F (see FIG. 23B) generated when the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starter gear teeth 452b1 is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. Accordingly, even when a space is formed in the region surrounded by the wall portion formed by the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 and the bottom portion of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, and the hollow bottom wall portion 452e, the push-back rib 452f is formed. As a result, the resistance to the force F can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the start gear teeth 452b1 from being deformed by an impact at the time of contact.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the gear teeth 452a are formed around the periphery of the double-layer gear 452. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21B), the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21A). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the combined operation unit 400, that is, the operations of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 that are moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 being transmitted will be described. To do. FIG. 21 to FIG. 26 illustrate the operation of the composite operation unit 400 in time series. 21 to 26, the back cover 430 is not shown for easy understanding.

  21A and 22A are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 21B and 22B are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. FIG. 21 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position. In FIG. 22, the pair of slide members are slid by a predetermined distance from the retracted position, and the engagement protrusion of the reversing gear 453 is illustrated. The state where the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first hollow portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is illustrated. 21B and 22B, in the double-layer gear 452, the divided gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. The

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position, the reverse gear 453 has the arcuate recess 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d sliding on the double-layer gear 452. The wall is circumscribed by the wall 452d. Thereby, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

  In this case, the mechanical fitting between the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism that maintains the posture of the reversing gear 453. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose other members such as an elastic spring in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453.

  Further, the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 are in contact with both sides of a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation shaft of the reverse gear 453. Is done. Therefore, the rotation of the reverse gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reverse gear 453, and the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the pair of slide members 420 are moved, the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414 a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the other transmission gear 451 and the two-layer gear 452 meshed with the transmission gear 451 by the gear teeth 452 are also rotated. On the other hand, since the reverse gear 453 is not meshed with the double-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

  While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. In the present embodiment, the arcuate concave portion 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is circumscribed on the surface of the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing the sliding friction from being concentrated in one place, Frictional force can be dispersed throughout the arcuate recess 453c. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a large force from being applied locally to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452. Moreover, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be improved by increasing the number of locations where the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 come into contact.

  FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in the rear view from FIG. 22 (b), and FIG. 23 (b) shows the state of FIG. The state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in the rear view is shown in the figure. In FIG. 23, the split gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 22 (b), before the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452, the end of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is the double-layer gear. The first recess 452b3 of 452 is disposed opposite to the first recess 452b3.

  At this time, since the end of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d disposed to face the first recess 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 is released, and at least 1 can be rotated in the direction of rotation (clockwise direction in FIG. 22B).

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 23A, so that the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452. Rotated before That is, the reverse gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453. At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d enters the first recess 452b3 of the double-layer gear 452.

  That is, the reversing gear 453 is slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23A). It contacts the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23B). Thereby, the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to contact is a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reversing gear 453. Rather, it is formed at a position (upward in FIG. 23B) returned to the opposite side of the rotational direction of the double-layer gear 452.

  As a result, the force applied to the reverse gear 453 when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start to contact each other is directed to the rotational direction of the reverse gear 453, and the rotational shaft of the reverse gear 453. It is divided into components that are suitable for Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact between the start gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453.

  That is, when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 start to come into contact with the reversing gear 453, they are not meshed with each other by a plurality of teeth from the beginning. Therefore, when the force applied in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 when contacting the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a higher speed than the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 452 ( Move). In that case, there is a possibility that the meshing of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 may fail.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). The rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotation resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotation shaft. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact of the two-layer gear 452 with the starter gear teeth 452b1.

  Further, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent tooth disengagement at the start of engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. .

  Here, since the play (backlash) formed becomes larger as the gear teeth become larger, the shift in the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears meshed from the middle can be tolerated more greatly as the teeth become larger. become. That is, when the gear teeth are downsized, there is a possibility that the teeth to be engaged will be shifted by one even if the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be engaged is slightly shifted.

  In this embodiment, the play of the double-layer gear 452 is greater than the play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 to which the drive force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 becomes larger. That is, the phase relationship shift of the two-layer gear 452 caused by the relationship with the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase relationship shift generated between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 and is acceptable. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference of the tooth | gear at the time of the meshing start of the double layer gear 452 and the inversion gear 453 can be prevented.

  When the two-layer gear 452 starts to come into contact with the reversing gear 453 in the rotation direction, the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 starts to come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. That is, the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that starts to mesh with the starter gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

  That is, the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d in which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed is not a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452, thereby reversing the gear. This is the part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, the size is not limited according to the size of the mating gear tooth to be engaged, like a gear tooth. In addition, it is desirable that the portion of the double-layer gear 452 that is in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d and the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is large and strong, and the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is used as that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

  When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and accordingly, the double-layer gear 452 is rotated. That is, the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed, and at least the transmitted leg 422 meshed with the driving gear 473 is interposed between the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. To do. Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 is transmitted to the driving device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving device 470 from being damaged by an impact at the time of contact.

  24A and 25A are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 24B and 25B are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 24 shows a state where the pair of meniscus members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 22A, and FIG. 25 shows the pair of meniscus members 460 from the state of FIG. A state immediately after the rotation by 180 degrees is illustrated. In FIG. 24B and FIG. 25B, the double-layer gear 452 is shown with the divided gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c shown by imaginary lines. The

  As shown in FIG. 24B, in a state where the meniscal member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are engaged.

  In the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 that abut on the reversing gear 453 at the start of abutting with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the two-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 are engaged with each other by the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash occurs at the time of continuing the engagement rather than at the start of the engagement. Can be reduced. Thereby, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 colliding at the start of the engagement and the improvement of the smoothness of the rotation of the reversing gear 453.

  Further, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are meshed in the circumferential direction. This error (play) is smaller than the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451. As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 has finished rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reverse gear are released. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is brought into contact with the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the locking projection 453e (see FIG. 12) of the reversing gear 453 and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) are fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. The attitude is also maintained.

  Next, the operation of the claw member 463 of the meniscal member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A and 26B are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 400. FIG.

  In FIG. 26, the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted, and the limited rack gear 414b is visible and the portion is enlarged. FIG. 26A shows a state immediately before the start gear tooth 441a of the deformed gear 441 contacts the start gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26B shows the state in which the slide rack 442 moves. The state of reaching the end is illustrated.

  The meshing between the deformed gear teeth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective when the deformed gear 441 is not in contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 is in contact with the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the start gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the start gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, a good mesh is achieved. On the other hand, for example, when the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the start gear teeth 441a and the start gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are brought into contact with each other, a mesh failure occurs in the middle of the engagement. The rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, the slide movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, so that the slide member 420 malfunctions.

  In the present embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained laterally outward by the biasing force of the biasing spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives a force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443. Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the appropriate posture described above.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the deformed gear 441 is engaged with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, whereby the transmission gear 443 is rotated and the slide rack 442 is moved. The slide rack 442 contacts the drive lever 467 during the movement, and the drive lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the meniscus member 460, the center gear 462 rotates when the drive lever 467 rotates. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in a protruding direction. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420.

  Next, the combined operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the notched portion 422d of the transmitted leg 422 is disposed to face the front side of the drive gear 473 in a state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position. In the combined operation unit 2400, the notch portion 2422 d of the transmitted leg portion 2422 is opposed to the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  27 and 28 are front views of the pair of slide members 2420. FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 28 illustrates the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start of the second gear group 450 when the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position. A state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) starts to come into contact is illustrated. Further, the illustration of the driving device 470 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side in FIG. 27) covers the front side in the tooth width direction of the rack gear 422a. The front side wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at positions where the start gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the start gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) of the reverse gear 453 start to abut. In the state, the notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side of the drive gear 473 (front side in FIG. 27). The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being separated from the outer shape of the notch portion 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 2422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 2422, so that the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410. Therefore, maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the specific phase position is set in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23A) of the second gear group 450 start to contact each other. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when the slide member 2420 is moved.

  That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24A) is always meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. Therefore, if the rotation resistance of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as the movement resistance of the slide member 2420. Here, since the transmission gear 451 is meshed with the two-layer gear 452, resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451. Then, since the resistance of rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. Thereby, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increasing.

  Here, at the specific phase position, the front side wall portion 2422c does not overlap with the drive gear 473, so that the effect of suppressing the wobbling at the time of rotation of the drive gear 473 by abutting the front side wall portion 2422c with the drive gear 473 is weakened.

  In the present embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed while the pair of slide members 2420 are moving, that is, while the drive gear 473 is rotating. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 reaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotation direction (axial vertical direction). Therefore, the wobble of the drive gear 473 that tends to occur at the specific phase position can be mitigated by the momentum of the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction.

  The base member 2410 includes a triangular protrusion 2415 that protrudes toward the center side (center side in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to the specific phase position by using the triangular protrusion 2415.

  Here, in the maintenance of the gaming machine 13, when the drive motor 472 is removed together with the drive gear 473, the slide member 2420 needs to be arranged at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side so as to hide the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually recognize the state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473 from the front side. is there. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange the slide member 2420 at the specific phase position.

  On the other hand, since the triangular protrusion 2415 is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized from the front side, it is possible to easily perform the alignment of the slide member 2410 by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 for maintenance. In the present embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at a specific phase position, the triangular protrusion 2415 and the triangular pattern formed on the end of the slide member 2420 form a series of patterns. Thereby, it can be made easy for the maintenance worker to remove the drive gear 473 and perform maintenance.

  Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large in the rotational axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. The two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment are formed in a large size in the axial direction while the starter gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed in the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction. That is, the tooth width is formed large. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 29A is a front view of the two-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29B is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29C is a side view of the two-layer gear 3452. .

  As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 is disposed adjacent to the sliding wall 452d and has a start gear tooth 3452b1 formed with a large tooth width, and a tooth base side of the start gear tooth 3452b1. A circumferential rib 3452e extending from a circumferential side surface along a concentric circle of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1, the starting gear; A radial rib 3452f that mainly extends from the radial side surface of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body portion of the double-layer gear 3452 is mainly provided.

  The starting gear teeth 3442b1 have substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, but have a larger tooth width than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved, and the starter gear teeth 3452b1 can be prevented from being damaged at the start of meshing with the reversing gear 3453.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is formed to be the widest in the axial direction of the double-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the start gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extended base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the start gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the double-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starter gear teeth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

  Further, the circumferential rib 3452e extends to the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 (up to two adjacent to the starter gear teeth 3452b1 in this embodiment). Accordingly, it is possible to generate a force that pulls the tooth base of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the start gear tooth 3452b1 by using the circumferential rib 3452e.

  That is, when the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and the reverse gear 3453 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 mesh with each other, deformation (deformation toward the direction away from the starter gear teeth 3352b1) that occurs in the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 is caused by the circumferential rib 3452e. Can be suppressed.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only to the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 because the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 located away from the starter gear teeth 3452b1 are reversed after the rotation is in a steady state. By meshing with the gear 3453.

  That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starter gear teeth 3352b1) distant from the starter gear tooth 3352b1 is meshed with the reverse gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. The reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. For this reason, the force received by the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 from the reversing gear 3453 is small, and the reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

  Since the radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the start gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the double-layer gear 3452, the start gear tooth The rigidity in the radial direction of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reversing gear 3453 meshed with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction, and the back end (the upper end in FIG. 29 (b)) of the starting gear tooth 3442b1 is forced toward the rotating shaft. Even if it is received, it is possible to prevent the starter gear tooth 3452b1 from falling down. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the starter gear teeth 3452b1.

  30A is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30B is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30C is a side view of the reversing gear 3453.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circle of the reversing gear 3453 from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the side surface on the base side of the starting gear tooth 3453b1. And a circumferential rib 3453f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453.

  The start gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth width and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, while the tooth width is larger than that of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the start gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

  The circumferential rib 3453f is formed to be the widest in the axial direction at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extended base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 30B, it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from being bent in the rotational direction.

  Further, the circumferential rib 3453f extends toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starter gear tooth 3453b1. As a result, the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3453b1 with respect to the direction in which force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starter gear teeth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging projection receiving portion 453d) is improved. Therefore, the durability of the starter gear teeth 3453b1 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 are formed large in the rotational axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased is described. The double-layer gear 4452 has the start gear teeth 4442b1 formed in the same shape as the other gear teeth in the direction of the rotation axis, while having a large tooth width, and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 sandwiched between the start gear teeth 4452b1. The tooth width is formed in such a manner that the tooth width is further shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4442b1 increases. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the two-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31B is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31C is XXXIc-XXXXIc of FIG. 31B. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a two-layer gear 4452 in line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the double-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starter gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d, intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 formed between the starter gear teeth 4452b1, and a starter gear. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 4452e that covers the front side surfaces of the teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the tooth width of the divided gear tooth 4452b composed of the start gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the maximum in the start gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is started. As the distance from the gear teeth 4452b1 increases, the gear teeth 4452b1 are shortened in a stepped manner with reference to the starter gear teeth 4452b1.

  The plate-like portion 4452e is formed so as to project from the tooth bottom side of the divided gear teeth 4452b to a position equivalent to the tooth tip circle in a front view, and is covered on the front side surface of the divided gear teeth 4452b. The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a mode in which a smooth curve is drawn in a bottom view in accordance with the formation position of the front side surface of the divided gear teeth 4452b (see FIG. 31B).

  Here, a case is considered where the front side surface of the split gear teeth 4452b is formed on the same plane, and the plate-like portion 4452e is also formed on the plane. In this case, the disk portion 452c and the plate-like portion 4552e are used to increase the permissible amount of displacement of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 4452 at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452. Is increased, the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453 cannot be determined. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 during rotation, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, so that the reversing gear 4453 becomes the outer periphery of the plate-shaped portion 4453e. Contact with the surface may result in poor meshing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the misalignment in the axial direction (upward in FIG. 31 (b)) that may occur before the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the double-layer gear 4452 is detected as the meshing start position. It is possible to tolerate as much as possible in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 4452b1.

  Further, the plate-like portion 4452e is formed in such a manner as to draw a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-like portion 4552e is separated from the starting gear teeth 4452b1 in a bottom view (see FIG. 31B). For this reason, the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-like portion 4552e, so that the position of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction can be largely corrected as the meshing proceeds (moving downward in FIG. 31 (b)). Is possible). Therefore, the positional deviation in the axial direction at the time of meshing between the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

  32A is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32B is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. 32C is a view in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32A. 14 is a partial side view of a reversing gear 4453. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 includes a pair of starter gear teeth 4453b1 disposed adjacent to the pair of arcuate recesses 453c, and an intermediate formed between the starter gear teeth 4453b1. Gear teeth 4453b2.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, the reversing gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the tooth width of the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is maximized, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4453b1 increases. . The degree of shortening (inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of the gear teeth in FIG. 32B) is the degree of shortening of the tooth width of the split gear teeth 4452b of the double-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31B). (Gradient of the line connecting the upper ends of the two).

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 are end faces in the width direction except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging projection receiving portions 453d. (FIG. 32 (b) upper end surface) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engagement protrusion receiving portion side. As a result, the displacement can be corrected more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of relative displacement in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452.

  That is, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 are meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are on the engagement protrusion receiving portion side (the tooth width is the shortest side, FIG. 32C). Start meshing from the right). Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the dimension in the tooth width direction of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 is constant on the tooth width longest side (left side in FIG. 32 (c)), A large space (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be secured. Therefore, a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the meshing between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 proceeds, the longest tooth width side (the left side in FIG. 32 (c)) of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 It enters into the back side of plate-like part 4452e (the lower part of Drawing 31 (b)). Thereby, for example, compared with the case where the dimension in the tooth width direction of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 is constant on the tooth width shortest side (the right side in FIG. 32 (c)), the meshing is released (the teeth of each other are The distance (play) between the immediately preceding plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be reduced.

  Therefore, when each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 meshes with the two-layer gear 4452, between the start of meshing for each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 until the meshing is released, between the plate-shaped portion 4453e and each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2. The interval (play) can be reduced. This makes it possible to correct the misalignment between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 more rapidly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the plate-like portion 4452e (see FIG. 31B) is formed in the opposite direction to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32C). Further, it is possible to improve the effect of making the correction of the misalignment more abrupt while maintaining a large allowable amount of misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 described above.

  Note that the end face in the width direction (upper end face in FIG. 32 (b)) of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging projection receiving parts 453d is formed by a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reversing gear 4453. The

  Next, the second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed of only a single resin material has been described. However, the two-layer gear 5452 in the fifth embodiment has a magnetic material embedded in the starter gear teeth 5452b1. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the two-layer gear 5452. As shown in FIG. 33, in the double-layer gear 5452, an embedding hole 5452g is formed in the starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

  The embedded hole 5452g is formed in a bottomed hole shape having a circular cross section, and the embedded member 5452h is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter that is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedded hole 5452g. As a result, the embedded member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedded hole 5452g.

  The embedded member 5452h is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two parts along a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black side of the embedded member 5452h is formed with the N pole, and the opposite side is formed with the S pole.

  FIG. 34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 34 shows a state immediately before the starting gear teeth 5542b1 of the double-layer gear 5252 abuts on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. In addition, the disk portion 452c and gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the reversing gear 5453, an embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. Thereby, the embedded member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedded hole 5453f.

  The embedded member 5453g is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two parts in a plane along the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that divides the magnetic pole into two is formed along the radial direction and passes through the axis, and the starter gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 are embedded with the opposite poles facing each other. That is, the starter gear tooth 5453b1 is formed with an N pole on the side (upper side in FIG. 34) facing the starter gear tooth 5453b1 when engaged, and the starter gear tooth 5453b1 is on the side (lower side in FIG. 34) facing the starter gear tooth 5252b1. S pole is formed on the side). Thereby, in the meshing of the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453, a magnetic force that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 is generated.

  That is, as the double-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. 34, the distance between the embedding members 5452h and 5453g is shortened, so that the magnetic force generated between them increases, and the start gear teeth 5453b1 Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 and the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the start gear teeth 5452b1 are in contact with the reversing gear 5453 in the stationary state, the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of contact can be reduced.

  FIG. 35 is a partial front view of second gear group 5450. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. In addition, the disk portion 452c and gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5453 in the rotation direction. As a result, the load applied to the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d not only when the contact between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 is started but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 are rotated by meshing. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d can be improved.

  Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described. However, the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment omits the starting gear teeth 452b1 and is different from the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. The body is provided with a deformed gear tooth member 6452g. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear 6452. FIG. 36 shows a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disc portion 452c. In the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material such as iron, so that it is a portion other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g of the two-layer gear 6452 and a portion integrally formed from a resin material. Thus, the rigidity of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is increased. Further, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is formed of a metal material, and the driving force necessary to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the double-layer gear 6452 includes a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452g, a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is inserted, and a hole 6452c1 formed in the disc portion 452c. A gear tooth side notch 6452b5 that is a notch formed between the first recess 452b3 and the second recess 452b4 and into which the gear tooth main body 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and a sliding wall 452d. The sliding part notch 6452d1 between which the sliding receiving part 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched and the flanges formed in the L-shaped saddle shape at both ends of the sliding wall part 452d The mold receiving part 6452d2 is mainly provided.

  The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 having a shape obtained by extending the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment toward the tooth bottom side, and a back surface from an end opposite to the tooth tip of the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1. A cylindrical insertion pin 6452g2 projecting on the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 6452g4 that connects the receiving portion 6452g3.

  The gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is formed such that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the dimension of the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Thus, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

  The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed in a state where the outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed opposite the recessed bottom wall portion 452e in an assembled state (see FIG. 37) with a slight gap.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted through the insertion hole 6452c1, and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4 with a slight gap, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is in contact with the saddle-shaped receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the rotation amount of rotation about the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed by the gear tooth main body 6452g1 coming into contact with the reversing gear 453.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the double-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453. In FIG. 37, a state in which the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 is illustrated, and the disk portion 452c is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the load applied by the deformed gear tooth member 6452g from the reversing gear 453 can be received by the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453.

  That is, even if the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed from a metal material, the portion that supports the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed from a resin material. In addition, the two-layer gear 6452 is not sufficiently rigid because the radial thickness is formed to be substantially constant in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1) due to a load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453 come into contact with each other, a pressing force is applied from the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (such as the hollow bottom wall 452e) receiving the damage may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g starts to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the coupling portion 6452g4 and the hollow bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as an axis). When the rotation starts, the slide receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reverse gear 453. The arc-shaped recess 453c is a portion having a sufficient radial thickness and a large rigidity.

  As a result, the load applied by the deformed gear tooth member 6452g from the reversing gear 453 can be received by the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, and is a portion of the double-layer gear 6452 and other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. The load applied to the portion (the bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Further, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can be supported using the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates is limited to one way. However, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to rotate the meniscus member 460. The slide member 420 can be formed in at least two positions. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38A to FIG. 38C are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452. FIG. 38A shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. 38B shows a first rotation in which the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is lower than the boundary speed Vb. A state in which the speed is V1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38C, a state in which the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb is illustrated.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. The same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the boundary speed Vb means the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 when the protruding gear member 7452e is switched from the immersive state to the overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d that is a groove having a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotation shaft, and a width that is slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. And a projecting gear member 7452e whose tip is formed in a gear tooth shape, and a biasing spring 7452f that couples the projecting gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

  The guide groove 7452d is formed at three locations by arranging the outer periphery of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and a protruding gear member 7452e and a biasing spring 7452f are provided in each guide groove 7452d. Further, intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the double-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

  In the protruding gear member 7452e, the protruding gear members 7452e1 to 7451e3 are formed with the same mass, and the urging springs 7452f are formed with the same spring constant.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when the two-layer gear 7452 is in a stopped state, the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed closer to the rotating shaft than the surface where the bottoms of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. At this time, the incorrect spring 7452f has a natural length.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Force to do. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is positioned closer to the rotating shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (immersion state).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotational speed V1, the double-layer gear 7453 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). In other words, the two-layer gear 7452 rotates idly with respect to the reverse gear 7453.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Force to do. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is overhanging radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected.

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 abuts on the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39), thereby The layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reverse gear 7453.

  That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) depending on whether the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. You can choose. Therefore, the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40) is obtained by changing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 during the rotation (by changing the moving speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) during the movement). A plurality of variations of the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the is rotated can be prepared.

  Next, variations in the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 begins to rotate will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. First, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, the case where the main drive gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 immediately after the movement member 420 starts to move from the retracted position (first speed pattern) will be described.

  39 (a) to 39 (e) are rear views of the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series, and FIG. 40 (a) and FIG. 40 (b), FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 41 (b) are front views of the composite operation unit 7400 that illustrates the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscal member 460 in time series. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown in FIG. 39, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown in FIGS. 40 and 41.

  39 (a) and FIG. 40 (a), FIG. 39 (b) and FIG. 40 (b), FIG. 39 (c) and FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 39 (d) and FIG. 41 (b). Are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which correspond to each other. Also, in FIG. 39, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is shown by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 39, the arc-shaped recess 453c is circumscribed by a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452. It is formed in the mode.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40A), and the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. The first protruding gear member 7452e1 is brought into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B). Thereby, the reverse gear 7453 starts to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture (see FIG. 40B).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7453 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, whereby the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 is performed. Is continued (see FIG. 39 (c) and FIG. 41 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the two-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again re-layered. (See FIG. 39D), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41B).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39E). Thereafter, the projecting gear member 7452e is moved inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

  Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 39D to the state shown in FIG. 39E, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d. There is a risk that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 will mesh again.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (the upper end in FIG. 39 (e)) of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d.

  When the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a force directed to the inner side in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1. Thereby, before the 3rd protrusion member 7452e3 and the 1st protrusion member 7452e1 mesh | engage with the inversion gear 745, the 3rd protrusion member 7452e3 and the 1st protrusion member 7452e1 can be made into an immersion state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 from meshing again.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated second during the rotation. A case (second speed pattern) in which rotation is performed at the speed V2 (the rotation speed V is changed) will be described.

  42 (a) to 42 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series, and FIG. 43 (a) and FIG. 43 (b), FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 44 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 that illustrates the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscal member 460 in time series. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown in FIG. 42, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

  42 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 42 (b) and 43 (a), 42 (c) and 43 (b), 42 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIG. 42 (e) and FIG. 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which correspond to each other. In FIG. 42, the rotation direction of the double-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the arc-shaped recess 453c is a circle formed by connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452. Formed in a circumscribed manner.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)). Form.

  Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, and therefore the meshing between the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 is It is not started (see FIG. 42B). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 until the second-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. Is done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42C), and the reversing gear 7453 is rotated by the second protruding gear member 7452e2 coming into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d. At the same time, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture (see FIG. 43B).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7453 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, whereby the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 is performed. (See FIG. 42D and FIG. 44A).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the two-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again re-layered. (See FIG. 42E), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44B).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

  Since the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are proportional, it is easy to change the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 by changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 472. Can be done.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed at least in two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. be able to. That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the first rotation speed V1 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 during the rotation. When changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscal member 460 rotates can be moved to the center side (vertical center side) (FIG. 40B and FIG. 43 (b)). Thereby, the variation of production can be increased.

  Next, representative examples of the first speed pattern and the second speed pattern described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a graph showing changes in the speed of the two-layer gear 7452. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the slide of the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451 that is rotated during movement is shown.

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 45, the first position P1 means a position (see FIG. 39B) where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453, and the second position P2 is , The second protruding gear member 7452e2 is the position where the first reverse gear 7453 is opposed to the first position (FIG. 42C). The solid line indicates the first speed pattern described above, and the broken line indicates the second speed pattern described above. Indicated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first speed pattern, the posture of the half moon member 460 starts to change immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, by changing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 during the sliding movement of the sliding member 420, the position of the sliding member 420 when the posture of the meniscus member 460 starts to change can be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460 can be increased.

  Next, the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 is changed when the half-moon member 460 is rotated by changing the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 in the middle of the rotation has been described. The combined operation unit 8400 is formed such that the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates can be changed while the rotation speed of the double-layer gear 8452 is maintained at a constant speed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452. FIG. 46A shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, and FIG. 46B shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4. Is done. The stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as that in FIG.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. The same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the separation rotation speed V3 means a rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms an immersive state while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state, and the joint rotation speed V4 means the first rotation speed V4. It means a rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7451e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 together form an overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the protruding gear members 7452e are moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8252 with different overhang amounts. (At least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a larger movement amount than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

  In the present embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotation shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are different from each other. That is, the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1 that connects the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the first that connects the second projecting gear member 7452e2 and the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. It is made larger than the spring constant of the 2 biasing springs 8452f2. Note that the spring constant of the third biasing spring 8452f3 is larger than the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Then, the second projecting gear member 7452e2 projects outward in the radial direction from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (extended state).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the double-layer gear 8252 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 in the first protruding gear member 7452e1, but the second protruding gear. The member 7452e2 meshes with the reverse gear 7453.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, a force is generated to move the protruding gear member 7452e outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 8452f are balanced. In the projecting state, at least the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 are projecting radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (projected state).

  Therefore, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the first projecting gear member 7252e1 of the projecting gear member 7451e of the two-layer gear 8452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453, whereby the two-layer gear 7452 is obtained. Begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453.

  The operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the common rotation speed V4 are the same as the operations illustrated in FIGS. Description is omitted.

  47 (a) to 47 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series. In the description of FIG. 47, FIGS. 40, 43, and 44 are referred to as appropriate, and in FIG. 47, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown for easy understanding.

  Note that FIG. 47 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 47 (b) and 43 (a), 47 (c) and 43 (b), FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. ), And FIGS. 47 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which are in correspondence with each other. In FIG. 47, the rotation directions of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 are illustrated by arrows, and the arc-shaped recess 453c is connected to the teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to be circumscribed by a circle.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), so that the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is in the immersed state. And the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state.

  Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 47 (b)). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The double-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separation rotational speed V3, the second projecting gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the meniscal member 460 is in the posture. It starts to change (see FIG. 43 (b)).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 continues and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 Is continued (see FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. 44 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, the two-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again formed by the two-layer gear 8452. (See FIG. 47E), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44B).

  Thereafter, the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed at least in two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, the speed change during the slide movement of the slide member 420 is not required.

  That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the joint rotation speed V4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the separation rotation speed V3 (FIG. 43). 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates can be moved to the center side (vertical center side) (see FIG. 40B and FIG. 43B). Thereby, the variation of production can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the separation rotational speed V3 and the joint rotational speed V4 described above will be described as a graph. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451. 48, the horizontal axis represents the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis represents the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451 rotated during the sliding movement is shown.

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means a position (see FIG. 39B) where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453, and the second position P2 is The second projecting gear member 7452e2 is a position where the second projecting gear member 7452e2 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (refer to FIG. 42C).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the posture of the half moon member 460 starts immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, if two types of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during the movement is set. The position of can be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460 can be increased.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the claw member 463 of the meniscal member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locking pin is disposed in a rotational locus in which the driving lever 467 is rotated by the rotation of the meniscal member 460, and the meniscal member 460, the driving lever, and the like are blocked by the locking pin. A mode in which a difference in rotation angle is generated during the movement of the claw member 463 may be employed. In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be interlocked.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the notch 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be cut out in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch 422d can be improved and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the shape of the drive gear 473 connected to the tooth tips is substantially circular has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive gear 473 may be divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the gear teeth may be different for each of the divided portions. In this case, by attaching the drive gear 473 with the gear teeth having a short tooth portion directed toward the transmitted leg 422, the size required for the notch 422d of the transmitted leg 422 in order to pass the drive gear 473. The thickness can be reduced. On the other hand, the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg 422 can be ensured at the portion where the gear teeth have long teeth. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is attached / detached through the notch portions 422d formed in the pair of the transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the notched portion 422d is not formed in the transmitted leg portion 422, and the transmitted leg portion 422 may be formed to be movable in a direction away from each other (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction). In this case, the drive gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 are arranged close to each other, while the drive gear 473 is removable when the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 are arranged at a distance. can do.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the embedded member 5452h formed of a magnetic material is embedded in the embedded hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which the periphery of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 is covered with a magnetic material may be used. Accordingly, since the magnetic material can be disposed outside the starter gear teeth 5542b1, the interval between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be reduced, and the engagement between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 is started. Magnetic force can be made stronger.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reversing gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the embedding member 5453g may be embedded. In this case, the embedding members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedding member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedding member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 are repelled, thereby reversing the two-layer gear 5452. The impact at the time of contact of the gear 5453 can be reduced. That is, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated away from the starting gear teeth 5452b1 by the repulsive magnetic force before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the starter gear teeth 5452b1.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal to each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding gear members 7452e may be formed with different masses, and the spring constant of the biasing spring 7452f that biases the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed larger. Thereby, the difference in how the protruding gear member 7452e protrudes due to the size of the mass can be mitigated by the magnitude of the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reversing gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the double-layer gears 7451 and 8452. In this case, the reversing gear 7453 can be separated from the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 to form a state in which the reversing gear 7453 is not in contact with each other. It can be. Therefore, even when the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not necessary, the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may be capable of forming a first state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are not engaged and a second state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are engaged. In this case, in the first state, the driving force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452, while in the second state, the driving force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452. Therefore, even when the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not necessary, the timing at which the reversing gear 7453 starts to operate can be changed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal and the spring constants of the biasing springs 8252f are different from each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f may be the same, and the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e may be different. As a result, it is possible to adjust the amount of protrusion of each projecting gear member 7452e more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is pivotally supported at one point on the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of pins protrude from the end of a shaft support member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions into which a plurality of pins are fitted to the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 are formed. In addition, the shaft support member and the drive gear 473 may be engaged at a plurality of points. In this case, since the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pin being hooked on the drive gear 473 in the rotation direction, the fit between the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins is formed loosely. can do.

  As a result, the force required to separate the drive motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front side wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed or excessive stress is applied to the drive motor 472. It can be prevented from being added.

<First control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 121. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above embodiments, and illustration and description thereof are omitted. This control example is different from the above-described embodiments in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of a big win, and is different in that the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of a big win. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present control example, the configuration is such that the ball restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of the big win. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the big hit type, Whether or not the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one big hit. Thereby, the variation of a game will increase and the interest of a player can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described. FIG. 49A is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49B is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650. Further, FIG. 52 is a front view and a side sectional view of the specific winning device 650. 52 shows a state where the front cover body 651 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. The front cover body 651 and the back cover body 655 are fastened by screws from the back side of the base member 652, respectively. The front cover body 651 is on the front side of the base member 652, and the back cover body 655 is on the back side of the base member 652. It is fit to become. Thereby, an area where the game ball can flow down is formed inside the specific winning device 650. The base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by the router. Thereby, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13.

  Although details will be described later, the specific winning device 650 includes a plurality of sensors that detect that the game ball has flowed down, and based on the detection results of these sensors, Is configured to change.

  Details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view in which the specific winning device 650 is disassembled into a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view in which the specific winning device 650 is disassembled in the same manner as FIG. FIG. 52A is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, and FIG. 52B is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52A, and FIG. These are sectional drawings in the LIIc-LIIc line | wire of Fig.52 (a).

  The front cover body 651 includes a front cover and an outer wall portion erected from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light transmissive material in a box shape in which one side (the back side in FIG. 50) is opened. In addition, an opening having a width that allows a game ball to flow down is provided in the upper right portion and the left central portion of the outer wall portion. Thereby, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted together, the opening on the right upper side becomes the entrance 651a through which the game ball can flow into the specific winning device 650, and the opening on the left center is The game ball inside the specific winning device 650 becomes an outlet 652c that can flow down to the outside. In addition, a guide wall is formed from the opening on the right side to the center, and a game ball that has entered the entrance 651a is guided to a first specific winning opening 650a described later. An inlet sensor 900a is disposed at the inlet portion 651a, and an outlet sensor 900c is disposed at the outlet portion 652c, so that a game ball that has passed through each can be detected.

  The base member 652 has an upper portion provided with a second winning opening, a lower right portion having a first specific winning opening 650a, and a lower left portion having a second specific winning opening 650b protruding from the front and rear sides. ing. A first entry sensor 652a and a second entry sensor 652b are respectively disposed above the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, and the entry to each specific winning opening is detected. Is done. An entrance restriction plate 654 slidable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided above the first entrance sensor 652a and the second entrance sensor 652b. By sliding the ball entry restricting plate, the game ball can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter the ball in the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b.

  A bypass flow path 653 is provided in the vicinity of the upper portion of the ball restricting plate 654 and between the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b. The game ball that has entered the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down to the upper side of the first specific winning port 650a and before the detour channel 653. Here, when the entrance restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a, while the entry restriction plate 654 is closed. When it is slid forward, the game ball flows down to the detour channel 653. A bypass sensor 900b is provided at the upstream inlet 653a of the bypass channel 653 so that a passing game ball can be detected.

  The game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 flows down to the upper side of the second specific winning port 650b and before the outlet 652c. Here, when the entrance restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b, while the entry restriction plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down from the exit portion 652c to the outside of the specific winning device 650.

  Here, both the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b are paid out based on winning. In other words, even a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 650 at the timing when the ball restricting plate 654 is closed and has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a has entered after the bypass passage 653 has passed. If it is time to open the ball restricting plate 654, the player enters the second specific winning port 650b and pays out the winning ball based on the winning. Therefore, the payout of the winning ball can be easily performed based on the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650.

  The bypass flow path 653 is formed on the front side and the back side of the base member 652 so that the game balls meander and flow down. Thereby, compared with the case where the game ball is formed to flow down without meandering, the length of the path through which the detour channel flows down can be increased, so that the time for the game ball to flow down the detour channel can be lengthened. Therefore, even when the timing at which the entrance restriction plate 654 opens is late, it is possible for the game ball that has passed through the detour channel 653 to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  Although details will be described later, by determining the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 654 according to the time that the game ball passes through the detour path 653, the game ball that has passed through the detour flow path 653 is allowed to enter the second specific prize opening 650b. An opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball and an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to enter the ball can be determined. In addition, if the path length of the detour path 653 can be adjusted, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball that has passed through the detour path 653 can easily enter the second specific winning port 650b. Note that the passing time of the detour path 653 is not limited to the path length, and may be adjusted by changing the friction coefficient of the road surface on which the game ball flows down (for example, using a material that does not slip easily).

  A protrusion 652d is formed on the upper part of the second winning opening 640, and an electric accessory 640a is disposed on the left and right. As a result, a game ball can enter the second winning port 640 only when the electric accessory 640a is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make it possible to enter the second prize opening 640 even when the electric accessory 640a is not opened without forming the protrusion 652d.

  The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge passage through which the game balls that have entered the second winning port 640, the first specific winning port 650a, and the second specific winning port 650b described above flow down, and the electric accessory 640a. And a variable solenoid 670 for changing the ball entry restricting plate 654 are provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 53B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol may be displayed with a symbol and the like attached together with a number.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “Large A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, which is an odd number, are added are aligned. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in this control example, there is an SW effect or background change effect that suggests (notices) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place. In this case, the display area where the variable display is performed may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee stick in this control example) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the opening / closing pattern of the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the entrance timing of the game ball will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic view schematically showing the entrance timing in the opening / closing operation of the entrance restriction plate 654. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open / closed state of the ball entry restriction plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing at which the launched game ball enters the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650, The lower row shows the timing at which a game ball that has flowed down to the detour channel without entering the first specific winning port 650a finishes flowing down the detour channel.

  The timing at which the entry restriction plate 654 is open is the timing at which the launched game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a (first entry timing). On the other hand, the timing at which the entry restriction version 654 is closed is the timing at which the launched game ball does not enter the first specific prize opening 650a, and the game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 has the second specific prize opening 650b. There is a timing of entering the ball (second entry timing) and a timing (outlet passage timing) of flowing out from the exit 652c without entering the second specific winning port 650b.

  The second entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the entry restriction plate 654 is open at the timing when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour path 653. In FIG. 54, the second entry timing is reached after the first entry timing elapses, and the game ball launched at this timing does not enter the first specific winning opening 650a, and passes through the bypass flow path 653. It will flow down. Thereafter, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, the ball entry restriction plate 654 is opened, so that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second entrance timing has elapsed, when the game ball finishes flowing down the bypass flow path 653, the entrance restriction plate 654 is not at the opening timing (that is, closed). Does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c.

  In this way, whether or not a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a wins the second specific winning opening 650b can be determined by the opening / closing timing of the winning restriction plate 654.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an opening / closing pattern of the winning restriction plate 654 in this control example will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening / closing pattern A in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a can easily win the second specific winning opening 650b. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening / closing pattern B in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning port 650a is unlikely to win the second specific winning port 650b.

  As will be described in detail later, this opening / closing pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In this control example, the open / close pattern is selected based on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the open / close pattern may be selected regardless of the jackpot type. Thereby, even in the same jackpot type, the game value that can be acquired by the player is changed by the opening / closing pattern, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The upper, middle, and lower stages of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) show the same timing as that of FIG. 54, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the opening / closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55 (a), one out of two game balls fired at regular intervals enters when the winning restriction plate 654 is open, and the other one wins. When the restriction plate 654 is closed, it is opened and closed so as to enter the ball. Here, as shown in the figure, the detoured game ball enters the second specific winning port 650b because the winning restriction plate 654 is in the open state when it has flowed down the detour channel 653.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55 (b), one out of two game balls fired at regular intervals enters the specific winning device 650 at the timing when the winning restriction plate 654 is opened. The same is true. However, compared to the opening / closing pattern A, the timing at which the ball entry restriction plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first ball of the detoured game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653 is as shown in the figure. Since the ball restricting plate 654 is in the closed state, the ball does not enter the second specific winning port 650b. Therefore, compared to the opening / closing pattern A, the opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the specific winning opening.

  It should be noted that the opening / closing timing of the ball entry restriction plate 654 may be appropriately set without being limited to the above-described opening / closing pattern. For example, all the game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 650a may be set to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, or all enter the second specific winning opening 650b. You may set so that it may not do (namely, all pass the exit part 652c). In addition, the opening / closing timing of the ball restricting plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape and total length of the detour channel (required time required for the game ball to pass).

  Furthermore, a plurality of detour paths having different times for the game balls to pass may be provided, and game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 650a may be distributed to those detour paths. For example, a detour route that allows a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning port 650a to enter the second specific winning port 650b and a detour route that is difficult to enter may be provided. Thereby, even if the opening / closing pattern is the same, since the ease of entering the ball can be changed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in order to restrict the entry to the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, the single entry restricting plate 654 is used. An entrance restriction plate for restricting entry of the ball may be provided individually. Thereby, the variation which regulates the entrance into each specific winning opening can be increased, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the ball entry to the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b, which are part of the specific winning port, is restricted by the ball restricting plate 654 in the specific winning device 650. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b, the second winning port 640 may be provided, or the general winning port 63 may be provided. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 and an effect display during the jackpot game based on the detection results will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing detection timings of various sensors and contents of effect display based on the detection results. 57 to 59 are schematic views illustrating the contents of each effect display.

  When the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650 after the big hit game is started, the ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first ball entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). Thereby, the effect based on the first game ball (first effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57A). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown in the lowermost row.

  Next, when the entrance of the second ball and the third ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a while the appearance effect is displayed (when the second ball entrance sensor is detected in FIG. 56, the third ball entrance sensor is detected). An effect based on the second and third game balls (second ball effect and third ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance number effect is displayed based on the respective detection results. With the appearance number effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), a cat pattern indicating the number of cat appearances is displayed in the lower right part. The number of appearances in the cat indicates the number of suspensions of the effect. When the effect based on the first game ball is completed, the number of appearances in the cat is reduced by 1 and the effect based on the second game ball is executed. Will be.

  When the detour sensor 900b detects that the first game ball has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a and has passed through the detour entrance 653a of the detour channel 653 (at the time of detour sensor detection in FIG. 56) ) The effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57B). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens as shown in the lowermost row. With this special effect screen, an effect based on the first game ball (runaway effect) can be displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect based on the second game ball (appearance effect) can be displayed on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57 (b)).

  After that, when the second game ball has entered the first specific prize opening 650a, the appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen is detected as a capture effect when detected by the first ball sensor 652a. (See FIG. 58 (a)). When this capture effect ends, an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

  Next, when the first game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653 and enters the second specific winning port 650b, the first game on the left side of the screen is detected by the second ball entry sensor 652b. The escape effect based on the sphere is changed to a recapture effect (see FIG. 58B). When this recapture effect ends, there is no effect to be displayed on the left side of the screen, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom, and an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed. Will be.

  On the other hand, when the first game ball finishes flowing down the bypass flow path 653 and does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c, the exit sensor 900c detects 1 on the left side of the screen. The runaway effect based on the game ball is changed to a capture failure effect (see FIG. 59A). When this capture failure effect ends, the effect to be displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in FIG. 58 (b) described above, so the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59B, a case where a capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described. FIG. 59B is an effect display that is displayed when the first game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a in the case where the above-described FIG. 57A is displayed. As described above, when there is a game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 and a game ball between the inlet 651a and the detour channel 653, an effect based on each game ball is displayed on the special effect screen. Visible at the same time. On the other hand, when there is a game ball in only one of them, an effect based on the corresponding game ball is displayed on the normal effect screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the display content of the accessory-linked effect will be described. 60 and 61 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical accessory 340. FIG.

  The accessory-linked effect is an effect that is executed during variable display. When this accessory-linked effect is executed, the fluctuation display being executed is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. In addition, the first spherical combination 330 and the second spherical combination 340 are turned on, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) in which PUSH characters are circled is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60A). . The PUSH picture displayed on the upper left moves to the lower right, and the PUSH picture displayed on the upper right moves to the lower left (FIG. 60 (b)).

  Then, the two PUSH symbols are moved so as to overlap each other at the center of the screen (see FIG. 61A), and at the timing when the two PUSH symbols are completely overlapped, the first spherical feature 330 and the second spherical symbol are displayed. The object 340 is turned off, and a gauge indicating the button press remaining time is displayed at the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61 (b)). Here, the first spherical combination 330 and the second spherical combination include a first spherical cover body (330a, 330b) and a second spherical cover body (340a, 340b), respectively. At the timing when the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are turned off, the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are moved to a position that covers the front portion of the spherical accessory. These spherical cover bodies are movable by a first accessory motor 330c and a second accessory motor 340c (not shown).

  Next, background interlocking effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the background interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  In this control example, a display that suggests the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen as part of the background display. Specifically, background levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, and “level 4” are displayed in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81. The background level of “level 1” is a display that suggests that the expectation level for jackpot is the lowest, and the background level of “level 4” is a display that indicates the expectation level for jackpot is the highest. This background level is changed during variation display or at the start of variation, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Detailed description will be given later.

  Here, a case where the background level is changed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. When the background level is “level 1”, the symbols in the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the characters “continuation level 2” are displayed in the center (see FIG. 62A). Thereafter, the variable display is started again, and the background level is changed to “level 2” (see FIG. 62B). Here, the case where the background level is changed from “level 1” to “level 2” has been described, but there are also cases where “level 1” is changed to “level 3” or “level 4” during the display of 1 variation. is there.

  Next, a case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 62B described above, after the background level is changed to “level 2”, the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 63A). Thereafter, the next variable display is started, and the characters “Level up!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and the background level is changed to “Level 3”.

  As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the 1 fluctuation display as described in FIG. 62. As described in FIG. 63, the changed background level is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation display. Can be used continuously. As a result, even in the display of fluctuation after one fluctuation display in which a display with a high expectation level for a big hit was performed, the expectation level for a big hit can be kept high, so that the player's interest Can be improved.

  Although explanation is omitted in this control example, usually, in the gaming machine, when changing the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations, voice and the like are executed. In such a configuration, notice display modes showing various different expectation levels are displayed, so the player does not know which expectation level should be determined to determine the expectation level for the jackpot, and about the notice display indicating the expectation level There is a problem that you will not be interested, or you will not be able to understand the content of the notice and get bored early in the game. However, in this control example, the background level is displayed as the overall expectation level on the background screen during the special symbol variation display, so that the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, each time a pseudo-stop where the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, the background level is changed, so it can be seen that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the notice of suspected stop. Can play games easily.

  In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is not limited to this, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. You may comprise as follows. Furthermore, not only the overall expectation level is displayed at the background level, but, for example, the expectation level is displayed by changing the color of the third pattern, or a character indicating the overall expectation level is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the clothes pattern, color, etc. may be changed) so as to display the overall expectation.

  Further, in this control example, the background level is not only displayed for the variation, but also displayed when the variation is stopped and the next variation is started. With this configuration, the degree of expectation of the number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be varied. Specifically, when the change display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is executed once, and the change mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make a player play a game while always being aware of the background level.

  In this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when a pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display by a level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed without changing the variation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The display area is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two parts, and the third graphic is independently displayed on each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and the third display is variably displayed in each case). With this configuration, the background level display indicates the degree of expectation according to the contents of the special symbol variation mode (whether or not the temporary stop is varied) and the variation pattern selection mode. Can be switched.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be increased or decreased, or the frequency of decreasing or the amount of decrease may be varied depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. Conversely, the pseudo stop may be more easily executed as the background level becomes lower. Furthermore, a background level may be set in advance in the variation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, which is the same as each control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device (not shown), and third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting at is performed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on a second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform display setting and the like.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 86). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203j set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball corresponding to winning in the first left winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). An area 203a is provided, and in each of these areas, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are matched with the timing of entering the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 86).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at a high probability (a special symbol) that has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9” in the special symbol lottery. , “0-9” is determined to be a big hit. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball has won the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability. Stored. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  In this control example, the jackpot random number stored in the first per random number table for low probability and the jackpot random number stored in the first per random number table for high probability In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the random value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Also, different jackpot types are selected even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same for the jackpot based on the first winning hole 64 and the jackpot based on the second winning hole 640. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case of winning a jackpot based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640, it is easy to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, so that the second winning opening 640 can be selected. It is possible to make the player expect more jackpots based on entering the ball. Here, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening that makes it easy to enter a ball in a short game state to be described later. Therefore, when it shifts to a short-time gaming state, it can be in a more advantageous state for the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. The range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 86) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67 (a)) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for removal, As a variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). The variation pattern table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation pattern contents corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 are included in the variation pattern table 222a. More selected.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interruption process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” much shorter than that when the normal symbol has a low probability, and is further attached to the second prize opening 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released only “one second × two times” when it hits the normal symbol. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 65A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 66 (a)) is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined as described above. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66B) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value for the jackpot A, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value for the jackpot B.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67 (a)) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67 (d)) is defined at least. Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern table or the like in the short-time gaming state is also set.

  With reference to FIG. 67 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 67B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 86), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 84) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , A time reduction / intermediate counter 203f and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the first winning slot 64 or Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the second winning port 640 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is configured to increase the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter for counting. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol M) is less than 4. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S703 in FIG. 83: No).

  The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203e is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The short / medium counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f is set to 100 when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R) at the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in this control example, when the probability variation gaming state is not set after the big hit game, the state is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device will be described. As described above, the input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 constituted by the address bus and the data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, other devices 228, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, an inlet A center 900a, a bypass sensor 900b, an exit sensor 900c, and the like are connected to each other (see FIG. 4).

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the rear image of this control example includes an image that displays a display (level display) that indicates the degree of expectation that is a big hit.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an accessory-linked effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, an SW scenario storage area 222e, In addition, various data and programs necessary for game control are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The accessory-linked effect table 222b is a table that defines the operation pattern of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above-described accessory-linked effect. It is. By setting the operation of the spherical combination and the display effect based on this table, it is possible to execute the combination-linked effect that links the operation of the spherical combination and the display effect. The detailed contents of the accessory-linked effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The open / close pattern storage area 222c defines the relationship between the open / close pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the case of jackpot A, the opening / closing pattern A is selected, and in the case of jackpot B, the opening / closing pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that the jackpot A is in a probable variation state. In addition, as described above, the opening / closing pattern A is more advantageous to the player than the opening / closing pattern B in that a game ball can easily enter the second specific prize opening 650b. Therefore, since the opening / closing pattern A is selected with the jackpot A, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player executes the game with the expectation that the jackpot A will be larger, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The opening / closing pattern B may be selected when the jackpot is A, and the opening / closing pattern A may be selected when the jackpot is B. Further, the selection of the opening / closing pattern may not be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on, for example, a value of an effect counter 223j described later. As a result, even if it is the same jackpot type, the player will be interested in both the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern because it changes whether or not it is advantageous to the player depending on the selected opening / closing pattern. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, the opening / closing pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type and the effect counter described above, or the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern may be further increased. For example, the jackpot type C and the opening / closing pattern C may be increased. .

  The background lottery table 222d defines the background level to be shifted based on the determination result, the current background level, and the value of an effect counter 223j described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The SW scenario storage area 222e is an area that stores an SW scenario that defines a period during which SW depression is valid in the above-mentioned accessory-linked effect. Based on this SW scenario, by controlling the lighting operation of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the frame button 22, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113, and the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked and produced.

  Here, the frame button 22 is lit during the SW valid period based on the SW scenario. When the frame button 22 is turned on, the player can recognize that the SW can be pressed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a big hit valid flag 223e. , First entry flag 223f, second entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, effect counter 223j, opening / closing pattern storage area 223k, round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls on the variable display is added by entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or the main controller 110 changes the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 90). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (Refer to S2102 in FIG. 97). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect is valid (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off 5 seconds after the jackpot game ends. Yes (see S1819 in FIG. 94). When the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on, the jackpot effect based on the detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 in the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 98) (see FIGS. 57 to 59). Will be executed.

  The first incoming flag 223f is turned on when the first incoming command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and processing based on reception of the first incoming command is performed in the jackpot effect processing. It is turned off when it is executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a by the first entry sensor 650a. When the first ball entry flag 223f is turned on, a display capture command is displayed from the sound lamp controller 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the first ball sensor 650a of the main controller 110. Can be sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the capture command for display, the display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the capture effect (see FIG. 58A) on the third symbol display device.

  The second pitch flag 223g is turned on when a second pitch command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and a process based on the reception of the second pitch command is executed in the jackpot effect processing. In the case (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b by the second entry sensor 650b. When the second incoming flag 223g is turned on, a display recapture command is displayed from the sound lamp controller 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the second incoming sensor 650b of the main controller 110. 114 can be transmitted. When the display control device 114 receives the display recapture command, the display control device 114 executes a process of displaying a recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) on the third symbol display device.

  The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the ending effect is executed in the jackpot effect, and is incremented by 1 every time the jackpot command process is executed after the ending effect is executed. Yes (see S1816 in FIG. 94). Further, in the jackpot command processing, when the remaining counter becomes a value of 5 seconds or more, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

  The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening and closing timing of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 that is opened and closed by the main control device 110, and when the jackpot valid flag 223e is on, that is, the jackpot When a game is being executed, 1 is added each time the big hit effect process is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). Further, when the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referred to together with information on the opening / closing pattern storage area in the entrance passage process (FIG. 99), and is used to determine which timing the game ball has entered the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for various types of lotteries such as an accessory-linked effect and a background lottery, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 399. The effect counter 223j is updated by one by the process of S1315 every time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The open / close pattern storage area 223k stores information of the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the opening / closing pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passage process, and is used to determine which timing is when the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, the opening / closing pattern storage area is updated while clearing when the opening command is received, which is the timing at which the jackpot is started, but the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off. Alternatively, it may be cleared.

  The in-round flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit game is being rounded (the ball entering restriction board 654 of the specific winning device 650 is being opened). The in-round flag 223m is set to ON when a round start command is received from the main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when a round end command is received from the main controller 110 ( S1810 in FIG. 94).

  The exit timing counter 223n counts the number of game balls in which the timing of entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game round is the exit passage timing. This exit timing counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the passage timing is the exit timing in the entrance passage processing that is executed when the entry to the specific winning device 650 is detected (FIG. 5). 99 S2305). Further, in the entrance passage process, when the jackpot game is finished and the above jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

  This exit timing counter is referred to in the entrance passage process, and when the exit timing counter becomes a predetermined number or more during the big hit game round of the opening / closing pattern A that is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650b (that is, the first timing) (2) When there are more than a predetermined number of game balls passing through the exit 652c without entering the specific winning opening 650b, a display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2307 in FIG. 99). . Upon receiving the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes an effect display for changing the player's firing timing. Thereby, in spite of the opening / closing pattern A that makes it easy to enter the second specific prize opening 650b, a player who is launching a game ball at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific prize opening 650b, Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to suppress disadvantages for the player.

  When the continuous background flag 223p receives a winning command based on the big winning start winning from the main controller 110, the continuous background flag 223p has a background level that suggests the above-mentioned jackpot expectation degree until the variable display based on the starting winning is started. This is a flag for continuously changing (increasing) the level. The continuous background flag 223p is set to ON when the effect counter is “0 to 49” when it is determined that the jackpot command is received in the winning command receiving process (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to ON, background change data is set for each holding ball (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and if it is on, the background change process is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). The continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, if the result is a big hit, it is configured to perform an effect that continuously increases the expectation of the background. It may be configured to execute. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of outreach or outreach, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation for jackpot even when the change starts.

  The background flag 223q stores a set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) or the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). The background flag 223q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and a process according to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

  The power-off processing flag 223x indicates that when the main controller 110 detects power-off, a power-off command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y The power is turned off and the power-off process is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). When the power-off process ends, the power-off process flag 223x is set to off (S1320 in FIG. 89). The power-off process in progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up process (see S1202 in FIG. 88), and when it is on, the power is cut off during execution of the power-off process (that is, the RAM is destroyed). Therefore, the processing when the RAM is destroyed is executed without checking the RAM destruction.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set and executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). In the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 88), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set off (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69A, details of the accessory-linked effect table 222b will be described. FIG. 69A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory-linked effect table 222b.

  This accessory-linked effect table 222b defines an effect selected by the variation pattern type and the value of the effect counter. Specifically, when the variation pattern type is “normal reach”, the SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, and the SW effect A2 if the effect counter is “200 to 349”. Is selected, and SW effect A3 is selected if the effect counter is “350 to 399”. When the variation pattern type is “super reach”, if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, the SW effect B1 is selected, and if the effect counter is “200 to 349”, the SW effect B2 is selected. If the effect counter is “350 to 399”, the SW effect B3 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern type is “special reach”, the SW effect C1 is selected if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, and the SW effect C2 is selected if the effect counter is “200 to 349”. If the effect counter is “350 to 399”, the SW effect C3 is selected.

  Here, each variation pattern type has a different variation time set as described above. In this control example, the selected SW effect is changed according to the variation pattern type. As a result, an SW effect having an appropriate effect time can be selected according to the variation pattern.

  Next, the details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

  The background lottery table 222d defines the background level of the transfer destination on the basis of the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is specified so that the determination result is different depending on whether the result is a win or fail.

  Specifically, first, a case where the determination result is a win will be described. If the determination result is a win and the current background level is “level 1”, if the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”. If “200”, the background level of the migration destination is “level 4”, and if “201 to 399”, the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 2”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-19”, the background level of the destination is “level 1”, and if it is “20-159”. If the background level of the transfer destination is “level 3”, the background level of the transfer destination is “level 4” if it is “200”, and the background level is not changed if it is “201 to 399”. Further, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 29”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2” and “30 to 139”. For example, the background level of the transfer destination is “level 4”, and if it is “140 to 399”, the background level is not changed. In addition, when the current background level is “level 4”, if the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 39”, the background level of the destination is “level 3”, and if it is “40 to 399”. It is specified that the background level is not changed.

  Next, a case where the result of the determination is wrong will be described. In a case where the result of the determination is wrong and the current background level is “level 1”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”. 150 to 399 ”is specified so that the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 2”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 49”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 1”, and if it is “50 to 99”. If the background level of the transfer destination is “level 3” and “100 to 399”, it is defined that the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 79”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2” and “80 to 99”. For example, the background level of the migration destination is “level 4”, and if it is “100 to 399”, the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 4”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299”, the background level of the destination is “level 3”, and if it is “300-399”. It is specified that the background level is not changed.

  As described above, when the determination result is correct, the background level is specified to be easily raised and difficult to fall. When the result is incorrect, the background level is specified to be difficult to rise and easily fall. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the background level indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit from being frequently increased in spite of the fact that the determination result is wrong.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source last address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the third pattern when the power is turned on. In addition to an area 235d, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b is provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 72 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the display variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 72 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on 72. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 73 (a) is a “street stage”. FIG. 73 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to “Empty stage”, respectively.

  Of the backs A and B, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are both images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 73A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 53) having the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearance effect flag 223m, an appearance counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapture counter 223s, and other storage areas 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the ball restricting plate 654 of the special winning device 650 that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big bonus for the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol is released as a normal symbol and the ball becomes the first winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “city stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 75 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 75).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4905 in FIG. 120B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 102) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2709 of (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102B), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 120B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 76) described below describing the image drawing instruction content for the is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 76) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 102 (b) ) (See S2703)), pointer update processing (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 76), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 76, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 102 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. The appearance effect flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described appearance effect (see FIGS. 57A and 57B) is displayed during the jackpot game. The appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON in the appearance effect process when a display appearance command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S3607 in FIG. 109), and the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process. In FIG. 112, it is set to OFF.

  The appearance counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described appearance effects and the number of appearance effects held (see FIGS. 57A and 57B). This appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 when a display appearance command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and is subtracted by 1 in the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process (FIG. 112). Is done.

  The in-flight counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described escape effect and the number of suspensions of the escape effect (see FIGS. 57 (b), 58 (a), and (b)). This escape counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display escape command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and a failure effect process (FIG. 111) or a recapture effect process (FIG. 113). 1 is subtracted.

  The capture counter 233r counts the number of times the above-described capture effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) has been executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 650a. It is a counter. This capture counter 223r is incremented by 1 when a capture command for display is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  The recapture counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times that the above-described recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) is executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650b. The recapture counter 233s is incremented by 1 when a display recapture command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 87. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the process of S101, when a first entry sensor 652a detects a ball entering the first specific winning port 650a in the specific winning device 650, a first winning command is set, When a second ball entry sensor 652b detects a ball entering the second specific winning opening 650b, a second ball entry command is set. The first incoming command and the second incoming command set here are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 86). In S1001), it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process (S104) performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

  Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S216. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S217, it is determined that the jackpot is started in the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 86) (S1101: Yes). Thereby, an opening command is set by the process of S1103, and the opening effect which alert | reports the start of jackpot is performed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot game is in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game ends (S1104: Yes). Thereafter, when it is time to end the jackpot game, it is determined in the processing of S1111 that it is the start timing of the ending effect, an ending command is set, and the probability variation flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114) Then, the hour / medium counter is set (S1115).

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203f (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

  When the process of S213, S214, or S215 is completed, a stop command is set (S216), and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the later-described main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice command It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the change display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  When the value of the probability changing flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big jackpots (jackpots A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit It is determined that it is B (16R hour junior college hit) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are defined. Various types of “shared super reach” and “shared special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 86). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, the start winning information process (S105) will be described first, and then the prefetch process (S407) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 77), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is determined. Obtain (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, even if there is no winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the number of special symbol reserved balls If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), The value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, a prefetch process in S407, which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, details of the prefetching process (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S407). This pre-reading process (S407) is executed in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 80), and the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is executed from the values indicated by various random number counters acquired based on the starting win. Process.

  In the prefetch process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501). If it is determined in the process of S501 that there is no new winning (S501: No), it is not necessary to execute the prefetch process, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is the probability changing gaming state. (S502).

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of starting the change is a certain change (S502: Yes), The lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table (see FIG. 66A) for high probability.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of change is not a certain change (S502: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the start winning process (see FIG. 80) described above. And the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table (see FIG. 66A) for low probability.

  Since the lottery result acquisition method in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S505), and this processing is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result for the holding ball before the start of variation by receiving this winning information command. Thereby, the background interlocking effect etc. which are mentioned later can be performed suitably. The winning information command set here may include information such as a variation pattern in addition to the lottery result. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the variation time and the variation effect based on the reserved ball can be determined before the variation starts.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 77), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because the player hits a ball to make the special winning device 650 win a prize during a special symbol jackpot (that is, during a special gaming state). However, when the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released, the ball that is to be awarded to the specific winning device 650 enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the opening of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and to make it easy for the specific winning device 650 to win. In addition, since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning port 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning port 640 during the special symbol jackpot, There are many balls in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning port 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second and the number of releases is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 77) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) or the start winning process (see FIG. 80) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the winning restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened every round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the winning restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 has elapsed, or the first specific winning opening 650a. Alternatively, it is determined whether a specified number of balls have won the second specific winning opening 650b. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 79), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 79). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 82) or the processing of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 84 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the entrance restriction plate 654 of the device 650.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) S208 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. If the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned off (S1102), an opening command is set (S1103), and this processing is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the ball restriction board 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the ball restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened, or the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b are balled. When a predetermined number (for example, a total of 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1108, when the closing condition of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the ball restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends. A command is set (S1110), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the processing of S1111, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a big hit A (S1113). In the process of S1113, when it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is determined (S1113: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that the big hit B (16R hour / short big hit) is made (S1113: No), the hour / middle counter 203f is set to 100 (S1115), and this process is terminated.

  The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the process of S1111 (S1111: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1319 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 89). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 89, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), it executes a power-off process in S1319. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1319 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1319 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1319, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1319, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1319 is executed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1319 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1319 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1204 to S1206. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 and S1210, which are work area clear processes of the RAM 223, are skipped, the process proceeds to S1211, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1211), and the interrupt is permitted. Is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing S1302 to S1311. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the variable display setting process of S1313, the big hit effect process of S1314, and the process of updating the counter value of S1315 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), then the accessory operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 is completed, an accessory operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the accessory action process, the action of the spherical accessory (330, 340) or the like is performed based on the accessory movable data set in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 96), the variable display setting process (FIG. 97), or the like. It is a process for controlling. Here, since the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW effect, the SW effect and the spherical accessory (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. ) Operation can be linked.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed in the process of S1313 (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a jackpot effect process is performed (S1314). Details of the jackpot effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is completed, the effect counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-described accessory-linked effect and background level lottery, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

  When the processing of S1315 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1318), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1319). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1320), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1317), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern setting processing is performed (S1402), then background change lottery processing is performed (S1403), and the processing returns to the main processing. Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 and details of the background change lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The fluctuation display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or when a special symbol lottery has been performed. Therefore, every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). If a winning command is received (S1409: Yes), a winning command process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command process, various types of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching in the main controller 110 are extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the winning information in the RAM 223. Store in area 223a. Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b, and the value of the effect counter 223j, Decide whether to perform a series of performances. Details of the winning command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1409, if a winning command has not been received (S1409: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). If a jackpot related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot-related command is not received in the processing of S1411 (S1411), it is then determined whether the first incoming command or the second incoming command is received (S1413). If the first winning command or the second winning command is received (S1413: Yes), the big win winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the first incoming command or the second incoming command is not received in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1415), and the main process is performed. Return. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see S1402). This variation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. A variation pattern is selected based on the received command, and a necessary effect command (SW effect command) is selected. , A notice effect command) is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the received variation pattern command ( S1502). Next, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern of SW effect (S1503). In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed to execute the SW effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: No), it is not necessary to execute the SW effect, so the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the process of S1504, based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j, the SW effect is selected from the accessory-linked effect table (S1504). Next, a display SW effect command indicating the SW effect selected by the process of S1504 is set (S1505), and the SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504. The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

  Here, the SW scenario is a period in which the frame button 22 is set to be effective in accordance with the change period of the special symbol, a preview display content, a display content displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like. It is what has been. This SW scenario is sequentially updated by the process of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the updated and set scenario is a scenario in which the validity period of the frame button 22 is set, it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. In the SW scenario, the movable data of the spherical actors 330 and 340 are also set, and the timing for moving the accessory etc. is set to coincide with the start timing of the SW effective time.

  In the process of S1507, a notice effect is selected (S1507), a display notice effect command for indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1508), and this process ends. When the SW effect is selected, the notice effect may not be selected and the notice effect may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the notice effect are not executed at the same time, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player. In addition, when the SW effect and the notice effect are executed at the same time, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by each may be the same or approximate. As a result, for example, while an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed in the SW effect, an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed in the notice effect, thereby suppressing a game machine that is difficult to understand for the player. can do.

  Next, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

  In this background change lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601: Yes), the background change data has already been set for the holding ball, so the background change lottery is not performed and the process proceeds to S1602. . In the process of S1602, it is determined whether or not the current background level is “level 4” (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is “level 4” (S1602: Yes), it is not necessary to change the background level, and thus this process ends. When it is determined that the current background level is not the background of “level 4” (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), the background change data is not set for the reserved ball and the background change lottery is performed. The process proceeds to S1603. In the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the hit pseudo variation is a single variation pattern (1603). If it is determined that the hit pseudo variation is not a single variation pattern (S1603: No), S1606 Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit pseudo variation is a variation pattern of one time (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

  In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1605. If it is determined in step S1604 that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: No), the process proceeds to step S1606.

  When the process of S1602 or S1604 is completed, a background obtained by adding one level is set, and the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and the background lottery table 222d is used for the background lottery based on the determination result and the value of the effect counter 223j. Is executed (S1607). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the background (S1608). If there is no change in the background (S1608: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if there is a change in the background (S1608: Yes), Transition to processing.

  In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is set to ON (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and this process ends. By setting this display background change command, the background set in the display control device 114 is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a winning command process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S1410). The winning command process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90), and continuously when the winning command is received. It is determined whether or not an effect for changing the background is started.

  In this winning command process, first, winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223p is on (S1702). When it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is on (1702: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether there is any other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that the other winning information has been won (S1703: Yes), the winning process is executed before the start winning based on the winning is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background cannot be executed. Exit. If it is determined that the other winning information is not found (S1703: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning determination is a winning (S1704). If it is determined that the determination is not successful (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the determination is correct (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

  In the process of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49” (S1706). If it is not within the range (1706: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In the process of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49” (S1706: Yes), background change data is set for each of the reserved balls (S1707), and then the continuous background flag 223p. Is set to ON (S1708), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot command processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1412). This jackpot command process (S1412) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90), and when a jackpot related command is received, It is a process for determining the display mode of an ending effect.

  In this control example, when the main controller 110 determines that “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” ends. In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, the opening effect is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and every time a new round is started, the number of rounds this time is notified to the player. When the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) is finished, finally, an ending effect is performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special gaming state. In this control example, when this ending effect is performed, a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, or that is being executed A short time display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is performed.

  In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). If it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), information about the open / close pattern in the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the open / close pattern storage area 223k (S1802). ), An opening command for display is set (S1803), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether a round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that a round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), a display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command for the first round (S1807). If it is determined that the current round is the first round (S1807: Yes), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the current time is not the first round (S1807: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1804 that a round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether a round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that a round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the in-round flag 223m is set to off (S1810), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1809 that a round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223h (S1813), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in S1811 that an ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is equal to or greater than a value indicating 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by 1 every time the jackpot command process executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. .

  In the process of S1815, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is smaller than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it is a case where 5 seconds have not elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter 1 is added to the value of 223h (S1816), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1815, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), since 5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, the measurement counter 223i Then, the value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to OFF (S1819), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90). Or it is a process performed when a 2nd incoming ball command is received.

  In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901). If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S1901: No), the winning in the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b is performed even though the jackpot game is not being played. Since there is a ball, error notification is performed (S1906), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a first incoming command has been received (S1902). If it is determined in the process of S1902 that the first pitching command has been received (S1902: Yes), the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 650a, so an effect based on the pitching is provided. In order to execute, the first entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first incoming command has not been received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

  When the processing of S1902 or S1903 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a second incoming command has been received (S1904). If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the second pitching command has been received (S1904: Yes), the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650b. In order to execute, the 2nd entrance flag 223f is set to ON (S1905), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that the second incoming ball command has not been received (S1904: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process, first, it is determined whether or not a SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223o (S2001). If it is determined that there is no SW scenario setting (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW scenario is set (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and the accessory movable data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current period is the SW effective period (S2004). If it is determined that the current period is not the SW effective period (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S2004: No), it is determined whether or not the SW is pressed (S2005). If it is determined that the SW has been pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating SW pressing is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to S2007.

  In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the updated SW scenario is SW scenario end data (S2007). If it is determined that it is not SW scenario end data (S2007: No), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that it is SW scenario end data (S2007: Yes), an effect based on the SW scenario is displayed. Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S2107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then selected in the process of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91). The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the selected variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. The accessory movable data set by the processing of S2106 is referred to by the accessory action processing (S1311 in FIG. 89), and based on the set accessory movable data, the action and the frame of the spherical accessory (330, 340). The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

  In the processing of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2107). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2107: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 90), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and the display is made based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification to the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2111). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112). If it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112: No), this processing is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2112 that the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112), the background flag 223q obtained by adding the background level corresponding to the number of times of pseudo variation is set to ON (S2113). This process ends.

  Here, when the pseudo fluctuation is performed, the display data set in the display control device 114 is set in advance so that one background level is raised. As a result, it is not necessary to perform processing for monitoring the temporary stop timing in the pseudo fluctuation and increasing (variing) the background level, thereby reducing the processing load.

  Although explanation is omitted in this control example, usually, in the gaming machine, when changing the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations, voice and the like are executed. In such a configuration, notice display modes showing various different expectation levels are displayed, so the player does not know which expectation level should be determined to determine the expectation level for the jackpot, and about the notice display indicating the expectation level There is a problem that you will not be interested, or you will not be able to understand the content of the notice and get bored early in the game. However, in this control example, the background level is displayed as the overall expectation level on the background screen during the special symbol variation display, so that the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, each time a pseudo-stop where the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, the background level is changed, so it can be seen that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the notice of suspected stop. Can play games easily.

  In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is not limited to this, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. You may comprise as follows. Furthermore, not only the overall expectation level is displayed at the background level, but, for example, the expectation level is displayed by changing the color of the third pattern, or a character indicating the overall expectation level is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the clothes pattern, color, etc. may be changed) so as to display the overall expectation.

  Further, in this control example, the background level is not only displayed for the variation, but also displayed when the variation is stopped and the next variation is started. With this configuration, the degree of expectation of the number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be varied. Specifically, when the change display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is executed once, and the change mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make a player play a game while always being aware of the background level.

  In this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when a pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display by a level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed without changing the variation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The display area is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two parts, and the third graphic is independently displayed on each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and the third display is variably displayed in each case). With this configuration, the background level display indicates the degree of expectation according to the contents of the special symbol variation mode (whether or not the temporary stop is varied) and the variation pattern selection mode. Can be switched.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be increased or decreased, or the frequency of decreasing or the amount of decrease may be varied depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. Conversely, the pseudo stop may be more easily executed as the background level becomes lower. Furthermore, a background level may be set in advance in the variation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot / medium effect process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing (S1314). This jackpot effect processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the big hit effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit valid flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2201). If it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S2201: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit valid flag 223e is on (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202), and it is determined whether the inlet sensor 900a is on. (S2203). If it is determined that the inlet sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the processing of S2204 and S2205 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2206. On the other hand, in the process of S2203, when it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is on (S2203: Yes), the entrance passage process is executed (S2204), the display appearance command is set (S2205), and the process of S2206 is performed. Migrate to Details of the entrance passage processing (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2206, it is determined whether or not the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the bypass sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), a display escape command is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, when it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2210.

  In the process of S2210, it is determined whether or not the first entry flag 223f is on (S2210). When it is determined that the first entry flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processing of S2211 and S2212 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2210 that the first incoming flag 223f is on (S2210: Yes), the first incoming flag 223f is set to off (S2211), and a display capture command is set. (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the second incoming flag 223g is on (S2213). When it is determined that the second entrance flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 and S2215 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2213 that the second incoming flag 223g is on (S2213: Yes), the second incoming flag 223g is set to off (S2214), and a display recapture command is issued. The setting is made (S2215), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the entrance passage process (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this entrance passage processing (S2204). This entrance passage process (S2204) is executed in a jackpot / medium effect process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the entrance passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is off (S2301: No), This process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the in-round flag 223m is on (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is A (S2302).

  In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passage timing is determined based on the information in the open / close pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passage timing is not the exit passage timing (S2304: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10. It is determined whether or not (S2306).

  In the processing of S2306, when it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10 (S2306: Yes), a display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308). This process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 122. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2502, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 100). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the boot program is finished and this boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2401), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2502 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. The processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2502.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2403, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2405). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 120A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4802 in FIG. 120A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the display is simplified. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 76) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 102B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2703), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and also when receiving a continuous notice command or a back change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is notified of the continuous notice. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705). 76 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed, and then in S2704 Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, details of the above-described command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2803).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2902. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the processing returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3001), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3002).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3003), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the task process described above (see S2704 in FIG. 102 (b)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3003. At the same time, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3002.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2806 that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a display jackpot related command (S2808: Yes), the jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 105, the details of the jackpot display process (S2809) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process. This jackpot display process is to execute a process corresponding to a display jackpot related command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not a display opening command has been received (S3101). If it is determined in the process of S3101 that a display opening command has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3103.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3102) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106A is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S3102). This opening command process (S3102) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3101 or S3102 is finished, it is determined whether or not a display round number command has been received (S3103). In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the display round number command is received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the display round number command is not received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3105.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 106B, the round number command processing will be described (S3104). FIG. 106B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3302).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3103 or S3104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among unprocessed commands (S3105). If there is a display ending command in the process of S3105 (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, in the process of S3105, when it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S3401 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3403. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3105 or S3106 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is a ball-entry-related command among unprocessed commands (S3107). If it is determined in the process of S3107 that there is a command related to the ball entry (S3107: Yes), the ball effect production process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no entry-related command (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the entrance effect processing (S3108) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the entering ball effect process (S3108). This entrance effect processing is to execute processing corresponding to the entrance related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this entry effect process (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is determined that the display appearance command has been received (S3501: Yes), the appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. Details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, when it is determined that the display appearance command has not been received, the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

  When the processing of S3501 or S3502 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display escape command has been received (S3503). In the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display escape command is received (S3503: Yes), the escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505. Details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display escape command has not been received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3505.

  When the processing of S3504 or S3505 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display failure command has been received (S3505). If it is determined in step S3505 that a display failure command has been received (S3505: Yes), a failure effect process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. For details of the failure effect process (S3506). This will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3507.

  When the processing of S3505 or S3506 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display capture command has been received (S3507). In the process of S3507, when it is determined that the display capture command is received (S3507: Yes), the capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. Details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, when it is determined that the display capture command has not been received (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. The process proceeds to S3509.

  When the processing of S3507 or S3508 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display recapture command has been received (S3509). If it is determined in step S3509 that a display recapture command has been received (S3509: Yes), a recapture effect process is executed (S3510), and the process ends. Details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3509, when it is determined that the display recapture command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the appearance effect process (3102). This appearance effect process (S3502) executes a process corresponding to the display appearance command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a game ball enters the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game. It is a process for performing the effect in the case of having performed.

  In the appearance effect process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3601). If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag is on (S3601), since the appearance effect has already been executed (see FIG. 57A), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 ( In step S3602, a display data table corresponding to the value of the on-going counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). When the process of S3603 is completed, the process proceeds to S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) within the cat appearance number displayed during the jackpot game is displayed by one.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), it is then determined whether the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), since neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, it corresponds to the normal appearance effect. A display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

  The normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605 is an effect in which the effect during the big hit game is displayed on one screen as described above, and when either the appearance effect or the runaway effect is displayed. It is what is displayed. In the present control example, two types of effects, an appearance effect and a runaway effect, are configured to be displayed simultaneously by dividing the screen of the third symbol display device 81 into two effects as effects during the jackpot game. However, when only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect needs to be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605. Therefore, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3604 that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is displayed. Is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). Thereby, it is possible to switch from the state where only the escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen to the state where the appearance effect and the escape effect are displayed simultaneously.

  When the process of S4705 or S4706 is finished, the appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  When the processing of S4703 or S4708 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3609). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611). . Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the escape effect process (S3504). This escape effect process executes a process corresponding to the display escape command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game flows down to the bypass channel 653. It is a process for performing the effect in the case of having performed.

  In the escape effect process (S3504), first, the appearance counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the appearance counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 (S3702). If it is determined in the process of S3702 that the appearance counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), the appearance effect to be displayed disappears, and therefore the appearance effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S3703), and the process of S3704 Migrate to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the on-going counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3704.

  When the process of S3702 or S3703 is finished, it is determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704). In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the running counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704: Yes), the running counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3705), and the value of the running counter 233p after the addition is handled. The displayed display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3711. Through the processing of S3705 and S3706, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is displayed by one increase within the number of running during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the escape counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3707), and the appearance effect flag 233m is on. It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the process of S3708, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3708: No), since there is no appearance effect to be displayed, a display data table corresponding to the normal escape effect is determined and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3708, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3708: Yes), since there is an appearance effect to be displayed, a display data table corresponding to the special escape effect is determined, The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  The above-mentioned normal escape effect is an effect of displaying the escape effect on one screen on the third symbol display device 81, and the special escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on two screens. (See FIG. 57B).

  When the processing of S3706, S3709, or S3710 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the failure effect process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the failure effect process (S3506). This failure effect process executes a process corresponding to the display failure command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning port 650a. This is a process for performing an effect when the player does not enter any of the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c.

  In the failure effect process (S3506), first, the escape counter 223p is decremented by 1 (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802). In the process of S3802, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3802 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, and it is a case where the effect display is performed on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, the display data table buffer 233dn is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

  When the processing of S3803 or S3804 is finished, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3805). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the capture effect process (S3508). This capture effect process executes a process corresponding to the capture command for display received from the audio lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning port 650a. This is a process for performing an effect when entering the ball.

  In the capture effect process (S3506), first, the capture counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S3901), and the on-going counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance counter 233n subtracted by the process of S3902 is 0 (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that the appearance counter 233n is 0, the appearance effect to be displayed disappears, so the appearance effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905. On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the on-going counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), since there is an appearance effect to be displayed, the process of S3904 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3905.

  When the processing of S3903 or S3904 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), there is no escape effect being displayed, and a normal capture counter is displayed to execute the capture effect on one screen. A display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905 that the in-flight counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is a displayed escape effect and the capture counter is set to execute the capture effect on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the special capture effect shown is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  When the processing of S3906 or S3907 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3908). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the recapture effect process (S3510). The recapture effect process 113 executes a process corresponding to the display recapture command received from the sound lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the second specific. This is a process for executing the process in the case where the player enters the winning hole 650b.

  In the recapture effect process (S3510), first, the escape counter 233p is decremented by 1 (S4001), and the recapture counter 233s is incremented by 1 (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: No), the recapture counter is used to execute the recapture effect on one screen without the appearance effect being displayed. A display data table corresponding to the normal recapture effect indicating is displayed and set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect that is displayed, and in order to execute the recapture effect on two screens, A display data table corresponding to the special recapture effect indicating the capture counter is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  When the processing of S4004 or S4005 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4006). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2808 that there is no display jackpot related command (S2808: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display timing notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), the timing notification process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the timing notification process (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the timing notification process (S2811). This timing notification process (S2811) executes a process corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113. This timing notification command is transmitted when the gaming balls that have entered the specific winning device 650 do not enter the second specific winning port 650b as described above and there are many gaming balls that pass through the exit 652c. is there.

  In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). Thereafter, based on the timing notification display data table, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the timing of game ball firing by the player is set. A specific example is an effect that prompts the user to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time. In order to press the screen and the frame button 22 simultaneously by this effect, the player needs to release his hand from the launch handle. Therefore, it is possible to change the launch timing of the game ball. With this effect, it is possible to relieve the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 from being launched at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous state for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2810 that there is no display timing notification command (S2810: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). If there is a display background change command (S2812: Yes), the background change command process is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 115A, details of the back surface change command process (S2815) will be described. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the back surface change command processing. This back surface change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back surface change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4803) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back face change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back change command is turned on, and other back image type Is set to OFF (S4202), the back surface change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4201 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task image is determined based on the back image discrimination flag set in S4202. The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more back change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. If there are two or more back change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to the effects of noise, etc., and another command will be mistakenly interpreted as a back change command. There is also a risk that In the process of S4202, if it is determined that two or more back change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back change command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear surface change command received later may be turned on. Also, any one back change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2812 that there is no back surface change command (S2812: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a notice effect command among unprocessed commands (S2814). If there is (S2814: Yes), the notice effect command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the details of the notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command process (S2815) executes a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command process (S2815), first, it is determined whether or not a display SW effect command has been received (S4401). If it is determined in the process of _S4401 that the display SW effect command has been received (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received display SW effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402). ), The process proceeds to S4403. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the display SW effect command has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4403. By executing the processing of S4402, the SW effect (FIG. 60, FIG. 61) in the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the process of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. Thereby, the lighting and opening / closing operation of the spherical accessory (330, 340) whose operation is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked.

  When the processing of S4401 or S4402 is completed, it is then determined whether a display notice effect command for display has been received (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display notice effect command for display has been received (S4403: Yes), the notice effect display data table indicated by the received notice effect for display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404). ), The process proceeds to S4405. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display notice effect command for display is not received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. The notice effect displayed by the process of S4404 is a notice effect that does not require operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which a character appears.

  When the processing of S4403 or S4404 is finished, it is then determined whether or not a display pressing command has been received (S4405). If it is determined in step S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), a notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2814 that there is no notice effect command (S2814: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2816). (S2816: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2817), and the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the error command process (S2817) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4301). Of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4302). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4302, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2816 (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2818), and the process returns to S2801.

  In the process of S2801, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes) ), The processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2818 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S2801 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2901. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117 to FIG. 119, details of the above-described display setting process (S2703) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S4502 to S4504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4502), S4503 to S4504. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4503). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4504).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4601).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4504) or in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

  In S4505, pointer update processing is executed (S4505). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4701). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4701, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4702). As a result, if it is End information (S4702: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4703), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4703: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4705), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4706), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4702: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S4506 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4508: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4509).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4511). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4514), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S4515), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2704), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S4515 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S4509 (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516). If the demo display flag is off (S4516: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S4517), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4518). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4520), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4521), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4516, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4516: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 72B and 72C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 and FIG. 120, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4802), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4801, that is, if it is off (S4801: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4802), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4901), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4901: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4902). In the process of S4902, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4902 that the transfer process has not ended (S4902: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to S4903. Also, as a result of the process of S4901, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903.

  In the process of S4903, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4903). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S4903: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S4903 (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4803), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the display setting process (S2703) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S5001). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5002). If it is transfer data information (S5002: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S5003), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S5004), and the process proceeds to step S5005.

  In the process of S5002, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5002: No), the processes of S5003 and S5004 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5005. In the processing of S5005, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5006).

  In the process of S5006, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5006 that the transfer process has not ended (S5006: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to S5007. Also, as a result of the process of S5005, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S5005: No), the process proceeds to S5007.

  In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007). If the transfer start flag is on (S5007: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5008), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5003 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S5013). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S5010), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5011). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

  In the processing of S5013, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The determination in the process of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S5013 (S5013: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5013 (S5013: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S5014). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5014, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. If it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used for the jackpot effect or the like can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear surface change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the above-described drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the process of S5101, the type of storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5102, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5103). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the spherical effect (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are linked. In the above, the case of performing the accessory-linked effect to be performed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, a case where an effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern will be described. Specifically, as a SW effect, a comment-based effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and a frame Based on whether or not the button 22 is pressed, there is provided a repetitive striking system effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-based effect and the continuous hit-based effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially different in the sound lamp control device 113. Further, in place of the frame button input monitoring / production process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 is executed, and the announcement effect executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The difference is that a part of the command process (S2815) is changed, and other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the display contents of the SW effect displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 123A and 123B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the SW effect of the comment-type effect.

  In the second control example, when the comment effect SW effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (4 times in this control example) in the SW effect is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. Thereafter, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the design of the PUSH button is changed to comment display (see FIG. 123 (a)). The comment display displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit between the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

  Here, when a comment display suggesting that the expectation level that is a big hit is high, the comment display that is displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to a high expectation level that is a big hit. The For example, after the comment display with the background of the fish school is displayed based on the first press of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the second and third press of the frame button 22 is also the school of fish. (See FIG. 123 (b)). Thereby, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit does not fall, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the repetitive strike effect in the second control example will be described. 124 (a) and 124 (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display content of the SW effect of the continuous hitting effect.

  In the second control example, when the SW effect of the repetitive striking effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the SW effect of the comment effect described above. The PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the design of the PUSH button is erased, and instead, a part or all of a specific design (a whale design in this control example) is displayed (FIG. 124 ( a)).

  The whale pattern described above moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, 1/4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen based on the first press, and 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed based on the second press. 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and all the whale patterns are displayed based on the fourth press (see FIG. 124B). In this way, in the SW effect of the repetitive hitting effect, it is suggested that if all the whale patterns are displayed, it will be a big hit, otherwise it will not be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a touch effect that is executed when a SW sensor detects a SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when an effect with a high expectation that is a big hit by pressing the frame button 22 is executed in the above-described comment-type effect and consecutive hit-type effect.

  First, in the above-described comment-type effect or continuous hit-type effect, the PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125 (a)). After that, when there is detection by the touch sensor, on the basis of pressing of the frame button 22, the design of the PUSH button on which an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  For example, in a comment-type effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed four times, if a school of fish is displayed as a background for comment notice when the second frame button 22 is pressed, the second push button from the top Are enlarged and displayed (FIG. 125 (b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect at each number of presses is determined by prefetching and acquiring at the start of the SW effect. Thus, before the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to notify that an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit (that is, an effect with a low probability of being displayed) is displayed. The user can be prompted to press the button 22.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the second control example.

  First, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an accessory-linked effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, an SW scenario storage area 222e, An SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and various data and programs necessary for game control are stored. Since the variation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect of the comment-type effect and the continuous hit-type effect described above. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 and the hit super-reach comment background table 222f2 are not included. The hour comment background table 222f3, the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4, the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5, the comment table 222f6, and the continuous hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 are provided. A detailed description of each table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), a fixed flag 223r and a SW press counter 223s are provided in addition to the areas of the first control example described above.

  The fixed flag 223r is set to ON in the case where a comment-related effect fixing condition is satisfied in the SW effect selecting process described later (see FIG. 131). When the fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. Thereby, it can prevent switching from a comment type | system | group production to a continuous hit type | system | group production.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fixed flag 223r may be turned on when it is desired to prevent the effects from being switched in the repetitive striking effect.

  The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The SW press counter 223s is incremented by 1 every time the SW effect selection process is executed, which is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effect, and the SW press count becomes the upper limit value. In this case, the SW scenario is reset.

  Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. First, with reference to FIG. 127A, the contents of the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 will be described. FIG. 127A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit background reach comment background table 222f1. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 defines the comment background of the comment-type effect to be selected when the result of the determination is successful and the normal reach is executed. This comment background is defined to be selected by the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect counter.

  Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is “blue background” displayed in blue, “yellow background” displayed in yellow, “red background” displayed in red, and fish school pattern There is a “fish school background” displayed. As for the big hit expectation, the “yellow background” has higher expectations than the “blue background”, and the “red background” has higher expectations than the “yellow background”. Compared to the “red background”, the “fish school background” has higher expectations.

  In the hit background reach comment background table 222f1, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “0-299”, “blue background” is selected, and “300-396” "Yellow background" is selected, "397-398" is selected "Red background", and "399" is "Fish school background". When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second time, when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “blue background” is selected, and when it is “250 to 349”, “yellow background”. Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “350-397”, and “fish school background” is selected in the case of “398-399”. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is third, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, “blue background” is selected, and “150 to 299” is “yellow background”. In the case of “300 to 396”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “397 to 399”, “fish background” is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j is selected as “yellow background” when “0-249” is selected, and “red background” is selected when “250-349”. In the case of “350 to 399”, “fish background” is selected, and “blue background” is not selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127 (b), the comment background table 222f2 for the hit super-reach will be described. FIG. 127B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit super-reach comment background table 222f2. The hit-reach comment background table 222f2 is defined such that a comment background with a high expectation level, which is a big hit, is selected as compared to the above-described hit normal reach comment background table 222f1.

  The comment table background 222f2 at the time of super-reach selects “blue background” when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1”, and “150 to In the case of “349”, “yellow background” is selected, in the case of “350 to 397”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “398 to 399”, “fish school background” is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, “blue background” is selected, and “150 to 299” is “yellow background”. In the case of “300 to 396”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “397 to 399”, “fish background” is selected. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “yellow background” is selected, and when “250 to 349”, the “red background” is selected. Is selected, “Fish background” is selected, and “Blue background” is not selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects “red background” when “0 to 249”, and “fish background” when “250 to 399”. The “blue background” and “yellow background” are not selected.

  As described above, the comment background table 222f2 for hit super-reach is defined so that a comment background with a high expectation level that is a big hit can be selected more easily than the comment background table 222f1 for hit normal reach. Thereby, in the comment system production of Super Reach, it is possible to make it easier to display the one with a high expectation level that is a big hit compared to the normal reach. In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (4 times) in the super reach and the normal reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the normal reach may be reduced. . As a result, even if the background display is selected using the same table for Super Reach and Normal Reach, Super Reach has a configuration that tends to be a highly anticipated production that is a big hit compared to Normal Reach, while reducing the area of ROM 222 Can be saved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 (a), the contents of the off-comment comment background table 222f3 will be described. FIG. 128A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of detachment. This out-of-comment comment background table 222f3 is defined such that a comment background with a low expectation level, which is a big hit, is selected as compared to the above-described hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 and the hit super reach comment background table 222f2. .

  This off-comment comment table background 222f3 selects “blue background” when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 349” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1” and “350 to 396”. "Yellow background" is selected, "397 to 398" is selected "Red background", and "399" is "Fish background". When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299”, “blue background” is selected, and “300-396” is “yellow background”. In the case of “397 to 398”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “399”, “fish background” is selected. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is third, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “blue background” is selected, and “250 to 349” is “yellow background” Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “350 to 398”, and “fish school background” is selected in the case of “399”. When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j selects “blue background” when “0-149”, and “yellow background” when “150-349”. In the case of “350 to 397”, the “red background” is selected, and in the case of “398 to 399”, the “fish school background” is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 (b), the contents of the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4 will be described. FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4. This off-time fixed comment background table 222f4 is used to select a comment-type effect when the fixed condition of the comment-type effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). Further, the off-fixed comment background table 222f4 defines a comment background to be selected based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, when the previous comment background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 7”, “red background” is selected. In the case of “8-9”, “fish school background” is selected. When the type of the comment background is “fish background”, the “fish background” is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is “0-9” (that is, in all cases). . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment system effect is established, the expectation level that is a big hit suggested by the comment background does not fall, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5. The hit fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the fixed condition for comment-related effects is satisfied, as in the above-described fixed comment background table 222f4 for off-time. The hit-fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the success / failure determination result is winning, unlike the lost-fixed comment background table 222f4 that is used when the determination result is incorrect.

  Specifically, when the previous comment background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-3”, “red background” is selected, and “ In the case of “4-9”, “fish school background” is selected. When the type of the comment background is “fish background”, the “fish background” is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is “0-9” (that is, in all cases). . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment system effect is established, the expectation level that is a big hit suggested by the comment background does not fall, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table 222f6. The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice displayed in the above comment-related effects.

  The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is “blue background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “good luck” is selected as the content of the comment notice, If it is “4-6”, “Still” is selected as the content of the comment trailer, “Ike” is selected as the content of the comment trailer if “7-8”, and if it is “9”, the comment is displayed “A little more” is selected as the content of the notice. When the background type is “yellow background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-3”, “chance?” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “4- "6" is selected as the content of the comment notice, "7?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, "What is this" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "9" “Maybe?” Is selected as the comment notice content. Further, when the background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “chance!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “4 to “6” is selected as the content of the comment notice, “7-8” is selected as the content of the comment notice, “Yes!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “9” is the comment. “Sore!” Is selected as the notice content. When the background type is “fish school background” and the first digit of the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “Large chance !!” is selected as the comment notice content, and “ If it is 4-6, “Yoshi!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is “7-8”, “Wow !!!!” is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “9” In some cases, “Super Hot!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice.

  In this way, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the background type, the expectation that is a big hit suggested by the content of the comment notice and the comment background can be matched, and the game is easy to understand for the player. Can be a machine. Also, the comment background and the content of the comment preview are selected based on the effect counter 223j. However, when selecting the content of the comment preview, the comment background is selected based on the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j. ing. Accordingly, the contents of the comment background and the comment notice can be selected at random, and variations displayed in the comment-type effect can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. In this control example, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the comment notice is selected regardless of the type of the comment background. May be. Alternatively, the comment background type may be selected based on the comment notice content after the comment notice content is selected first.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 (b), the contents of the consecutive hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 will be described. FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous hitting effect lottery table 222f7. This continuous hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific picture is displayed based on the determination result, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, when the determination result is successful and the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the whale pattern that is a specific pattern is 1 / 4 is displayed (see FIG. 124A), and if it is “200 to 399”, it is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-149”, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “150-399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed three times, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 119”, 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “120 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 99”, it is notified that all the whale patterns are displayed and the jackpot is achieved (FIG. 124 (b)). If it is “100 to 399”, the previous display is maintained. Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223j is “100 to 399”, and when all the whale patterns are not displayed, it is a big hit after that. Informed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong and the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the whale pattern that is a specific pattern is displayed in 1/4. (Refer to FIG. 124 (a)), “200 to 399” is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 99”, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “100 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, in the case where the frame button 22 is pressed three times, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 49”, 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “50 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is fourth, the previous display is maintained regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, and the jackpot notification is not displayed.

  As described above, in the comment-type production, the player recognizes the content and the jackpot expectation by reading the content of the comment. On the other hand, in the continuous-type production, the player uses a specific pattern (book). In the control example, it is only necessary to pay attention to whether or not all the whale pictures) are displayed. Therefore, the comment-based effect must have a longer effect period than the repeated-striking effect. In the present control example, when the SW effective time is shortened by the process of S6104 described later, a repetitive hitting effect that can be recognized by the player even in a short time effect is displayed. Thereby, it can be set as the game machine easy for a player to understand.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1350). ) Is executed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350). This frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and the SW production is selected.

  In this frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is an SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). If it is determined that there is an SW scenario in the process of S6001 (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether or not it is the SW valid period based on the updated SW scenario (S6002). S6003). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), this is the case because the SW effect is not being executed, and thus this process ends.

  In the process of S6003, when it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S6004), and the process proceeds to S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the current period is not the SW valid period (S6003: No), the present process is finished as it is because it is not the timing to execute the effect based on the SW depression.

  In the processing of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. Therefore, the SW effect selection process (S6006) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6005 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor is on (S6007).

  In the process of S6007, when it is determined that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), a display touch sensor command is set to display the touch effect in the SW effect described above (see FIG. 125) ( S6008), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6007, when it is determined that the touch sensor is off (S6007: No), this process is ended as it is. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. ) Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display touch sensor command, the display control device 114 displays the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process (S6006). This SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the display of the SW effect.

  In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, 1 is added to the SW press counter 223s (S6101), and it is determined whether or not the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102). If it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102: Yes), the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so the effect is determined from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). Is selected, and the process proceeds to S6110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is off (S6102: No), the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less based on the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o. It is determined whether or not there is (S6104).

  In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), the remaining effect period is short, and therefore, the repeated-hit effect that can display the effect period shorter than the comment effect. In order to execute, the SW effect is selected based on the effect counter 223j and the SW depressing counter 223s from the continuous hitting effect selection table 222f7. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), the remaining effect period is sufficient, so that the effect counter 223j is obtained from the comment-based effect selection table (222f1, 222f2, 222f3, 222f6). The SW effect is selected based on the SW pressing counter 223s. Here, the comment-based effect selection method is as follows. First, a comment background is selected from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) corresponding to the determination result and the variation pattern type, and then the selected comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j are selected. Accordingly, the content of the comment notice is selected from the comment table.

  When the processing of S6106 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a fixed condition is satisfied (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is “red background” or “fish school background”, it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. Due to this, despite the fact that a high performance is displayed as the expectation level that is a big hit, after that, an effect that the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed is extremely low, thereby impairing the player's willingness to play Can be suppressed. In this control example, the fixed condition is set so that the expectation level of the comment background is not impaired. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the comment notice is a story (from the first to the fourth time). The fixed condition may be satisfied when the content of the advance notice is displayed and the content is understood). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by switching to the direct-playing effect in the middle despite the content of the comment notice with a story characteristic being displayed.

  In the process of S6108, when it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6110.

  In the process of S6110, a display press effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and the SW press count is set to the upper limit value (in this control example) based on the SW press counter 223s. 4 times) is determined (S6111).

  If it is determined in the process of S6111 that the number of times the SW has been pressed is the upper limit value (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6111 that the number of times the SW is pressed is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), step S6112 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that a part of the process of the notice effect command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and is the same in other points. It is. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Details of the notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command process (S2815) is for executing a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command process (S2815), the processes from S4401 to S4405 are executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in step S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), a notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( In step S4406, the display data table in which the number of presses has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and this process ends.

  By the processing of S4450, a pressing effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124) corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be executed. Further, by the processing of S4406, it is possible to switch between the continuous hit effect and the comment effect based on the press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern has been described. Specifically, as a SW effect, a comment-based effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and a frame Based on whether or not the button 22 is pressed, there is provided a repetitive striking system effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-based effect and the continuous hit-based effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of striking the frame button 22 repeatedly, control is performed such that the selection probability of the effect is switched depending on the number of times of pressing and the remaining time of the SW effective time. Is different. Only differences from the second control example will be described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 134, an example of a display mode in a continuous striking effect using the frame button 22 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation pattern for executing the SW notice effect, the SW notice effect set in the change pattern is set, and the third symbol fluctuation is set. During the display, an effect of informing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 133A is executed. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed to win a lottery (lottery of whether or not to display the effect), a display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a display mode displayed at the start of the SW notice effect. When the variation pattern in which the SW announcement effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the predetermined timing is set in advance during the variation display of the third symbol, the SW announcement effect for depressing the frame button 22 is displayed. A display mode (FIG. 133 (a)) for notifying the player of the start is displayed. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), the third symbol that has been variably displayed at high speed is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display form of the SW notice effect is displayed in the other display areas. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), an indicator is displayed, and when the indicator (meter) presses the frame button 22, the indicator is changed (the indicator memory color is changed by pressing). The memory of this indicator is changed in order from the right memory in accordance with the pressing of the frame button 22, and when the color is changed up to the MAX memory, the player is notified that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. (See FIG. 134 (a)).

  In addition, in the display mode of the SW notice effect, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed, and a character “continuous hit!” Is displayed thereon, so that the game method of hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly is notified. Has been. A remaining amount meter M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed (the remaining period of the SW effective period) is displayed below the symbol imitating the frame button 22. The remaining amount meter M is configured such that the internal color can be changed from right to left as the SW effective time decreases. At the start of the SW notice effect, the entire interior of the remaining amount meter M is displayed in red, but it is changed to white (red display is reduced) in order from the right side (see FIG. 133 (b)). When all the inside is changed to white, the player is informed that the SW valid time has ended. In addition, at the start of the SW notice effect, a game description of the SW notice effect (character display of “Make the meter MAX!” And “When it becomes MAX !!” applies). Thereafter, the SW effective time starts, but until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not changed, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

  FIG. 134 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the effect lottery is won by pressing the frame button 22. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the lottery for the effect is won, the color of the indicator up to the memory of MAX is changed (changed from white to red), and the “hatsu! Characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the SW valid time has passed and the remaining time has passed, if the production lottery cannot be won, the word “Sorry!” Is displayed and the jackpot expectation is expected. The effect to notify the degree is not displayed. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, whether or not it is a win is drawn every time. The lottery probability is set higher when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern that is variably displayed is a win than when it is out of place. It can be expected that a variation pattern that is a big hit is being executed.

  In this control example, the variation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is limited to a variation pattern that is a winning pattern or a variation pattern of a super-reach out of reach. Therefore, if the player can recognize that he / she always reaches when the SW announcement effect is executed, and if the player can press the frame button 22 to display the characters “Super Hot !!” Can be expected to be a variation pattern.

  In this control example, the jackpot expectation is displayed during the variation of the third symbol. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the lottery result may be directly notified. It is not limited to jackpots, and points are given on production, and on that point, items on production are given, or two-dimensional barcodes are displayed and captured on a mobile phone, etc. You may comprise so that privilege, such as, can be acquired.

  Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the second control example. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222g is added to the ROM 222 in the second control example. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the second control example, the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 136A to 136F, the lottery table 222g in the third control example will be described. The lottery table 222g includes a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to g3 are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j determined to be the winning of the effect varies depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. In each lottery table, the number of effect counters 223j that are determined to be winning when the lottery result of the changing special symbol (the third symbol) is winning is set.

  In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, when the remaining time of the SW valid time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is longer than 5 seconds, and the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more in 5 seconds or less It is a lottery table selected in the case of doing. The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 20 to 39 times. The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table that is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 40 times or more.

  The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables that are selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 10 when the remaining SW effective time is 5 seconds or less. The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is set to half. Therefore, it is configured so that a player who has a small number of times of pressing the frame button 22 can easily set the effect.

  In this control example, the lottery table having different selection probabilities is switched depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to (c), the SW valid time Depending on the remaining time, lottery tables having different lottery probabilities may be switched. Further, the above-described configuration for switching the lottery table depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time may be configured together. In this case, the greater the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set. When the remaining time is further reduced, the lottery probability is set higher. Thereby, if it is a player who presses down the frame button 22, the possibility that it can win a production | present can be made higher by continuing pressing down the frame button 22 during SW effective period.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). The RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the first control example described above in that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adaptation flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The interval counter 223t is a frame executed periodically (every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133). In the button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 138), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. This interval counter 223t is referred to in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3, and if it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit value (750 in this control example, corresponding to 3 seconds), the indicator level 1 is subtracted from 223u. Thus, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133), the indicator level display is reduced by one. The effect of displaying the indicator level suggests that the expectation level that is a big hit is high as the indicator level increases to the maximum value. Therefore, the player can be prompted to continuously press the frame button 22 so that the indicator level does not decrease, and the player's willingness to press the frame button 22 can be improved.

  The indicator level 223u is for storing the amount of indicator to be displayed in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight areas in the left-right direction, and is lit in order from the left area. In the present control example, it is determined how much the above-described eight regions are lit based on the value of the indicator level 223u. For example. If the value of the indicator level 223u is “1”, only the leftmost area is lit, if it is “4”, the fourth area from the left is lit, and if it is “8”, all the areas are lit. The area is lit.

  The indicator level 223u is set in a frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (FIG. 138), a SW effect selection process 2 (FIG. 140) or a SW effect selection process 3 (FIG. 141) which will be described later.

  The adapted flag 223v is a flag used to determine whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This adaptation flag 223v is used when the SW button adaptation processing (FIG. 139) is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. If it is less than 10) in the example, it is set to ON. In this case, a switching flag 223w, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the table for selecting the SW effect has been switched.

  The switching flag 223w is a flag used to determine whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This switch flag 223w indicates that the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times (this control example) in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139) that is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. If it is less than 10 times, it is set to ON. When the switching flag 223w is turned on, the process of selecting the SW effect changes from the SW effect selection process 2 using the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selection process 3 using the fourth to sixth lottery tables. Will be switched. Thereby, it is possible to display an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit even for a player who has a small number of presses in the SW effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. Note that the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the second control example, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 138, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360), the same processes as those in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) in the second control example are executed from S6001 to S6004. After the process of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). This SW valid period is set in the SW scenario, and is subtracted when the SW scenario is updated. When it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), SW pressing adaptation processing is executed (S6051). Details of the SW pressing adaptation processing (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6050 that the remaining SW valid period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). If it is determined in step S6052 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing is performed. finish. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S6052 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6052: No), the interval counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S6055), and it is determined whether the interval counter 223t is the upper limit ( S6056). If it is determined in the processing of S6056 that the interval counter is the upper limit value, the indicator level 223u is decremented by 1 (S6057), a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058), and the interval counter is set. 223t is reset (S6059), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6056 that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processing from step S6057 to step S6059 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139, the details of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1360).

  In the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether the adaptation completed flag 223v is on. This adaptation flag 223v is executed by a process (S7002 to S7004) for determining the player's pressing state based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW valid period (the remaining period is 10 seconds to 5 seconds). This is a flag indicating whether or not If it is determined that the adapted flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adapted flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). When it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the processing of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). Thereafter, the process of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of times of pressing is small because the number of times of pressing the first half of the player's frame button 22 is small.

  In S7005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switch flag 223w is on (S7006). When it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing ends. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7006 that the switching flag 223w is on (S7006: Yes), SW effect selection process 3 is executed (S7007), and this process ends. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). This SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is a process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and the SW press adaptation process (S6051) as described above.

  In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, the value of the SW press counter 223s is incremented by 1 and updated (S7101). It is determined whether the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). If it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). If it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7103 that the value of the SW press counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the setting is switched to the second lottery table 222g2 (S7104). Thereafter, the process of S7108 is executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S7102 that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). If it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, in the process of S7105, when it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to S7108.

  In the process of S7106, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the setting is switched to the third lottery table 223g3 (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the process of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

  In the processing of S7108, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination regarding the display of fluctuation during execution is a win (S7108). If it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is correct (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110). Then, the notification sound and the lamp data are set (S7111), the SW valid time is reset (S7112), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is not successful (S7108: No), it is determined whether the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). If it is determined in the processing of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113: Yes), the indicator level 223u is incremented by 1 (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), the process ends.

  Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1302), it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display command, the display control device 114 executes the SW effect according to the indicator level 223u of the command received by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is greater than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007). This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select the SW effect when the switch flag 223w is on in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139) described above.

  In the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007), the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) and the first lottery table are replaced with the fourth lottery table, the fifth lottery table is replaced with the second lottery table, Since the sixth lottery table is used in place of the three lottery table, and the other points are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this control example, in the repeated hitting effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is displayed based on the number of consecutive hits is performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by simple processing, the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is displayed by repeatedly hitting the notice effect performed during the special symbol fluctuation time has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol is a big hit. In addition, whether or not the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot is not notified, and whether or not the probability change is given by hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly during the jackpot game or the normal game, etc. (whether it is a probability change game state) May be configured to be used in an effect to notify the player by lottery. In such a case as well, a period during which the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit is set, and a lottery table for switching whether or not the effect is to be notified based on the number of consecutive hits, the remaining time of the effective time, and the like is set. By configuring, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing at which the effect is notified can be made random. In addition, for a player with a small number of consecutive hits of the frame button 22 or a slow hitting speed, an effect tailored to the player can be performed by switching and setting a table with a high selection probability.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration in which the game ball is periodically guided to the second specific winning port 650b when the game ball is guided to the inlet portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in a configuration in which game balls are randomly guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, it is easy to enter the second specific winning port 650b and the second specific winning port 650b. The configuration set for the case where the control is made difficult to enter the ball will be described. Only differences from the first control example will be described, and description of points that are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 when the game ball is guided to the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example, and the entering of the guided game ball FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing each non-intrusive pattern. FIG. 142 (a) is a timing chart showing how to enter a ball from 1 round to 2 rounds when jackpot C (16 round jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the big hit C, the opening restriction plate 654 is opened for 1 second in the first round, and the opening operation is carried out for 1.6 seconds in the second round. Thereafter, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing operation of the entrance restriction plate 654), the third round is executed. From the third round onwards, until 30 seconds of release or 10 game balls are detected by the first entry sensor 652a or the second entry sensor 652b (into the first specified winning opening 650a or the second specified winning opening 650b). It is executed until 10 balls have entered.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and ten balls may be entered into the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. In that case, after 10 balls have entered the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, a means for restricting the entrance to the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650 may be provided.

  The interval time between the first round and the second round (the closing time of the entrance restriction plate 654) is 1 second. A game ball that has flowed down to the first specific winning port 650a during that time cannot flow into the first specific winning port 650a, and flows down to the detour channel 653. Since the detour time required to flow down the detour channel 653 and reach the second specific winning port 650b is 1.6 seconds, even if the game ball arrives immediately after closing one round, When the second specific winning opening 650b is reached during the closing time, the ball entering restriction plate 654 is open. Therefore, the game ball headed to the second specific winning port 650b can enter the second specific winning port 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is a game ball that has reached the first specific winning opening 650a just before the start of the second round and has flowed down to the detour channel 653. However, it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, all the game balls guided to the first specific winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) are configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round.

  Referring to FIG. 142 (b), it is a timing chart showing a state of entering the second specific winning opening 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. Small hits consist of two rounds of games. The opening period of the first and second rounds is set to 1 second, and the interval period between the first and second rounds is set to 0.6 seconds. Thus, the first and second rounds of the jackpot C and the first and second rounds of the small hit are only slightly different in the opening period and the interval period, and this difference is very short. Because of the difference, it is difficult for the player to determine the difference. Therefore, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, since it is difficult to distinguish the difference between the small hit and the big hit C, the player can hit the big hit C which is the small hit when the hit game is started. It is difficult to determine whether it is.

  The small hit interval period is 0.6 seconds, and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, so the added time is 1.6 seconds, and the detour period is also 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the detoured game ball cannot enter the second specific prize opening 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the two rounds of the small hit game, although it is possible to enter the first specific winning opening 650a, it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  In the fourth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is used to produce whether or not the winning game is jackpot C in the interval period (10 seconds) after the end of two rounds of jackpot C and jackpot. Is called. In this effect, an effect that is more advantageous to the player is displayed as the number of game balls that have entered the second specific prize opening 650b between the first and second rounds increases. Specifically, if an enemy is displayed and the hero wins against the enemy, it is notified that the jackpot is C. In this case, the main character's life gauge is set according to the number of balls entered into the second specific prize opening 650b. Therefore, it is difficult to lose even if it is attacked by an enemy. In this way, in this control example, since it is configured so that the player is given the right to know early whether the jackpot C is during a round of 1-2 rounds, a large amount of game balls Even during a period of an open pattern that cannot be obtained, the player can launch a game ball to play a game.

  Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 143, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process in the fourth control example determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit with respect to the first control example described above (S250), and if the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), only the point of setting the small hit start (S251) is different and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the jackpot control process 2 (S1050), in the first control example, only the jackpot control is controlled, but the jackpot control is also added. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1150 and S1151, and also in the processing of S1151 to determine whether it is a big hit or small hit. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the jackpot command processing (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing 2 (S1420). In the jackpot command process 2 (S1420), the process of S1810 is changed to an inter-round process (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command process (S1420) in the first control example. This inter-round processing (S1850) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing between rounds (S1850). In the inter-round processing (S1859), first, the round flag 223m is set to OFF (S8001). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot or jackpot C (S8002). If it is determined that the jackpot or jackpot C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round, the type of jackpot being executed (whether it is a jackpot C or a jackpot) and the number of balls entered into the second specific winning port 650b are indicated. A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives this display command, based on the jackpot type, a life gauge corresponding to whether the main character wins, the enemy wins, or the number of balls entered into the second specific winning hole 650b The display setting is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8002 that it is not a small hit or a big win C (S8002: No), and if it is determined in the process of S8003 that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this process is performed. finish.

  In the fourth control example, it is configured so that the game balls between rounds do not enter the second specific winning opening 650b in small hits, but the present invention is not limited to this. The eye opening period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. By comprising in this way, even if it is a small hit, the expectation that it is a big hit C can be maintained more.

  Further, in the above-described detour channel 654, for example, a material having a high friction coefficient is used on the road surface portion, or unevenness is provided on the road surface portion so that the flow coefficient of the game ball is lowered. May be. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass channel 654 increases, so that the game ball stays in the bypass channel 654 during the interval time even when the interval time becomes long. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  Further, the bypass flow path described above may be configured such that the passage time is variable. For example, a plurality of bypass passages having different transit times may be provided so that game balls can be distributed to those bypass passages. A movable wall portion is provided in the bypass passage, and the movable wall portion is movable. By doing so, you may make it change the time which passes a detour flow path. In addition, a mechanism that makes the passing time of the game ball random in the bypass channel, for example, a croon may be provided. Thereby, since a variation can be given to the passage time of the detour channel, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the number of the specific winning openings provided in the above-described specific winning device 650 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, and may be a starting winning opening for starting a special symbol, or a predetermined winning ball based on the winning It may be a general winning opening for which is paid, or a combination of them.

  In the first to fourth control examples described above, the lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the winning at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Based on the entrance to the entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, for example, the first special symbol is drawn based on the entrance to the 1st entrance 64, and based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640. The lottery of the second special symbol may be performed. Thereby, since the variation of a game can be increased, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the sound lamp control device 113 that has received a command from the main control device 110 is configured to execute various effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects can be performed. It may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110. Thereby, since there is no need to send and receive commands, an inexpensive gaming machine that can reduce the design cost can be provided.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of a technical idea in which the drive gear 473 and the notch 422d overlap>
A gear tooth is engraved on a side surface supported by a base member and includes a first gear member and a second gear member engaged with each other. At least the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, and the second gear member Is provided with a plate-like portion covering the side surface of the gear tooth, and the plate-like portion is the gear tooth of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member, and the second gear tooth. A gaming machine formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth engaged with a gear member, wherein the plate-like portion is passed from a tooth tip side to a tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. The cutout portion is formed, and the cutout portion and the first gear member are disposed at predetermined positions, so that at least the first gear member and the plate-like portion rotate the first gear member. It is possible to form specific phase positions that are visible at intervals when viewed in the axial direction. Gaming machine A1, characterized in that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-like portion is formed on the side surface of the gear tooth of one of the pair of gear members engaged with each other. There is a gaming machine that prevents the other gear member, which is the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member, from moving in the axial direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217702). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the other gear member is extracted, it is necessary to extract one gear member in advance. For this reason, there is a problem that the maintainability is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the notch portion is formed in the plate-like portion, so that the plate-like portion and the first gear member are at least at the specific phase position as viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Visible at intervals. Therefore, since the first gear member can be pulled out through the notch portion of the plate-like portion at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be exchanged without removing the second gear member in advance. Therefore, the maintainability of the pair of gear members to be engaged can be improved.

  Since the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, the second gear member on which the plate-like portion is formed may be a rotating gear or a rack gear.

  In the gaming machine A1, the notch portion has a width formed along the direction in which the gear teeth of the second gear member are arranged on the tooth tip side of the second gear member. The distance between the points where the outer shape of the second gear member intersects the tooth tip circle of the first gear member is set equal to or slightly larger than the distance along the gear tooth continuous direction of the second gear member. A gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member can be shortened to the minimum. Thereby, the effect | action which controls that a 1st gear member moves to a rotating shaft direction can be ensured by a plate-shaped part.

  The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be an arc shape or a rectangular shape.

  Also, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear Compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of a large gear tooth by forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the member's tooth tips intersects. It can suppress that a part enlarges. Therefore, the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction can be ensured by the plate-like portion. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and formed with a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member. A gaming machine A3, which is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotational axis direction of one gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member, and a circle coaxial with the first gear member is formed. It is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotational axis direction of one gear member. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the size of the notch portion, to ensure the maximum formation area of the plate-like portion, and to improve the rigidity of the plate-like portion.

  Note that the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear Compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of a large gear tooth by forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the member's tooth tips intersects. It can suppress that a part enlarges. Therefore, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be ensured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in a proper meshing state in which the relationship between meshing gear teeth is fixed In the proper meshing state, the first gear member is moved along the notch formed in the second gear member and meshed with the second gear member. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first gear member and the second gear member are moved along the outer shape of the notch of the plate-like portion of the second gear member. When meshing with the gear member, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshing state.

  Therefore, in the case where the first gear member and the second gear member are engaged with each other in the proper meshing state, the first gear member and the second gear member are aligned at the notch portion of the plate-like portion. It can be carried out. Thereby, since the meshing adjustment of the first gear member and the second gear member can be facilitated, the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

  Note that the case where the relationship between the teeth in which the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other is fixed is an incomplete gear in which the rotating gear member to be engaged is engraved with teeth on a part of the side surface. There are cases where there is a case where a movable rack member that reciprocates with respect to the rotating gear member is engaged.

  When changing gears, for example, there is a problem of which tooth of the second gear member is engaged with each tooth of the first gear member. In this case, the proper engagement state is established in relation to the teeth meshing with each other. In order to mesh the teeth, it is only necessary to prevent the gear teeth meshing with each other from shifting by at least one tooth.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that a movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member is increased at least in the specific phase position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. For this reason, the maintenance worker can make the operation of engaging the pair of gear members (inserting the gear members at the proper meshing positions) easy, for example, by relying on the increase in movement resistance.

  That is, in a state where the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement, if the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is removed. Even if it is going to be brazed, the plate-like part is in the way and cannot be removed. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the notch portion of the plate-like portion can be formed at a position that matches the first gear member, and the first gear member is removed. Becomes easy.

  The movement resistance increases when, for example, a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member at the specific phase position is disposed, or at the specific phase position, Examples include a case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed so as to move to the moving end, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the moving end. In such a case, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap each other when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the movement end, the first gear member is viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap each other. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the moving end of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axial vertical direction). . Therefore, the wobble of the first gear member that tends to occur at the specific phase position can be mitigated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the first gear member.

  The gaming machines A1 to A6 each include a drive motor that generates a driving force, and the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a detachable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the plate-like part is formed on the machine.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in such a manner that it can be pulled out.

  Here, even if the first gear member is engaged with the second gear member from the side where the plate-like portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-like portion to prevent movement, so that the first gear member is prevented from moving. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, there is a possibility that the arrangement position of the drive motor is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the notch portion of the plate-like portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited by the relationship with the plate-like portion. The degree of freedom in arranging the motor can be improved.

  In addition, since the plate-like portion of the second gear member is formed in a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, when replacing the drive motor, the drive motor and the first gear member should be removed together. It is possible to select whether to remove only the drive motor.

  That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while keeping the first gear member in contact with the plate-like portion. By exchanging the drive motor in this way, the drive motor can be replaced while maintaining the meshed state of the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be replaced again. It is possible to eliminate the need for adjusting the meshing. Thereby, maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, as a case where the first gear member is pivotally supported in such a manner that it can be pulled out from the drive motor, the first gear member is externally fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, or the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor. A case where a plurality of pins project from the disposed adapter and the plurality of pins are inserted into the first gear member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first gear member includes a shaft portion whose one end portion is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and the other end portion opposite to the one end portion of the shaft portion. A rotating body portion coupled to the end portion, wherein the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed so as to be separable, and the shaft portion protrudes in an axial direction from an end surface of the other end portion. Provided with a plurality of projecting pins, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of projecting pins are respectively fitted, and the connection between the shaft portion and the rotating body portion is the plurality of the projecting pins. A gaming machine A8, wherein projecting pins are formed by being fitted into the plurality of fitting portions.

  Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-like portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. Thus, a force greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-like portion in contact with the first gear member. The static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, so that the plate-like portion may be deformed or excessive stress may be applied to the drive motor. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, a plurality of projecting pins are projected at the end of the shaft portion fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the rotating body portion is projected. A plurality of fitting portions into which the installation pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing static friction.

  Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it can prevent that the plate-shaped part of a 2nd gear member deform | transforms, or an excessive stress is added to a drive motor.

  In addition, as a fitting part, the hollow formed in a through-hole or a bottomed cylindrical shape is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the game machine is disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor, and extends in a direction opposite to the extending direction of the drive shaft of the drive motor along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor. A gaming machine A9, comprising a restriction unit.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7 or A8, when pulling out the driving motor from the first gear member, while pressing the driving motor against the restricting portion extending along the side surface of the driving motor Can be pulled out. Thereby, it can suppress that the axial center of a drive motor inclines with respect to a 1st gear member, and can suppress that a 1st gear member deform | transforms.

  In the gaming machine A9, the restriction portion is formed in a pair with the motor case of the drive motor interposed therebetween, and the extending end of one restriction portion of the pair of restriction portions is the motor case of the drive motor. The game machine A10 is characterized in that it is formed on the drive shaft side from an end surface opposite to the end surface on which the drive shaft is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the extended end of one of the regulating portions formed in a pair is formed closer to the drive shaft than the end surface of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one of the restricting portions can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extending end of the restricting portion and the side surface of the drive motor are disposed adjacent to each other, the extending end of the restricting portion is used as a fulcrum and the force is applied to the drive motor using the side surface of the drive motor as an operating point The distance to the action point can be made the shortest. Thereby, the force required for extraction can be suppressed.

  Further, when pulling out the drive motor using the extended end of one restricting portion as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the restricting portion on the opposite side of the one restricting portion. Thereby, when pulling out the drive motor, the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of restricting portions, the other restricting portion, which is the restricting portion on the opposite side of the one restricting portion, protrudes in the same manner as the extended end portion of the one restricting portion, or The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is formed so as to protrude from the extending end of the one restricting portion to the opposite side of the drive shaft of the drive motor.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the other restricting portion to which the drive motor is pressed when the drive motor is pulled out is at least more than the extending end of the one restricting portion. It is formed to project to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one restricting portion as a fulcrum, the action point is closest to the other restricting portion (that is, the action point is a plane perpendicular to the drive shaft of the drive motor). In the state of being arranged on a plane including the extended end of one restricting portion), the other restricting portion can prevent the drive motor from moving.

  Thereby, when pulling out the drive motor, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from the one restricting portion.

  The gaming machines A7 to A11 include a moving contact member that is disposed opposite to the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween, and the moving contact member of the first gear member is at the specific phase position. The plate-like portion of the second gear member is disposed at a distance from the first gear member in the axial direction view, and overlaps the first gear member in the axial direction view of the first gear member. The gaming machine A12, wherein in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap each other when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines A7 to A11, the first gear member is simultaneously applied to the plate-like portion of the second gear member and the moving contact member disposed to face the second gear member. Abutted. Thereby, the inclination of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<An example of the technical idea that the start gear teeth 452b1 for meshing are formed in a large size>
A main driving gear member formed as a rotating gear, and a driven gear member that starts meshing during rotation of the main driving gear member, and at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is contacted at the start of the meshing. A game comprising: a meshing tooth to be contacted; and an intermediate tooth meshing when the meshing tooth is engaged after the meshing tooth is engaged, and the meshing tooth is formed larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member (the side to which the rotation of the main driving gear member is transmitted) is started while the main driving gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor) is rotating. (For example, see JP 2013-244210 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the teeth that mesh at the start of meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are subject to collision at the beginning of meshing and are easily damaged. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are made larger, the gear teeth can be prevented from being damaged, but the backlash is increased and it becomes difficult to smoothly rotate the driven gear member. For this reason, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smooth rotation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member has durability of the meshing teeth that meshes at the start of the meshing. The meshing teeth can be prevented from being damaged. Further, since the backlash between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced in the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member can be smoothly performed when the intermediate teeth are engaged after the meshing teeth are engaged. can do. Thereby, the durability improvement of a meshing tooth and the improvement of the smoothness of rotation of a driven gear member can be made to make compatible.

  Note that the start of meshing means a state in which the meshing teeth formed on at least one of the main gear member and the driven gear member start to come into contact with the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

  Further, forming the meshing teeth in a large size means that at least one of the tooth width, the tooth thickness, or the toothpick is formed larger than the intermediate teeth.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a holding mechanism that holds the posture of the driven gear member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member is provided, so that the attitude of the driven gear member in a state where it is not meshed with the main driving gear member can be stabilized. Can do.

  Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism that holds the driven gear member in the axial direction and a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by mechanical alignment.

  In the gaming machine B2, the driven gear member includes a cutout portion that is cut out in a direction of retreating from the main drive gear member, and the cutout portion is in contact with the outer periphery of the main drive gear member at at least two points. The holding mechanism is formed by the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, a holding mechanism that holds the driven gear member can be formed by abutment of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member at two points. As a result, a separate member for maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be dispensed with.

  The cutout portion may be any shape as long as it does not interfere with the tooth tip circle of the main gear member, and the shape is not limited. However, at least the radius of curvature of the cutout portion is equal to that of the tooth tip circle of the main gear member. It is formed below the radius.

  In the gaming machine B3, the notch is formed as an arcuate recess that circumscribes the main driving gear member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the main driving gear member to improve the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. Can be made.

  That is, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the main drive gear member so that the frictional force at the time of contact is prevented from being concentrated on one place, and the frictional force is applied to the entire notch portion. Can be dispersed. Thereby, the location which holds a driven gear member with a main gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the attitude | position of a driven gear member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect in which a notch part is circumscribed by the main drive gear member is not specifically limited. That is, for example, a form circumscribing the tooth tip circle of the main driving gear member may be employed, or a form in which the gear tooth is omitted from the main driving gear member and circumscribing the omitted surface may be employed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member have their contact points drawn from the central axis of the main driving gear member to the surface connecting the roots of the driven gear member. A gaming machine B5 formed on at least both sides of a perpendicular.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the contact point between the main driving gear member and the notched portion of the driven gear member is on the surface where the root of the driven gear member is connected from the central axis of the main driving gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent the driven gear member from rotating (moving) in both directions when the notch is in contact with the main driving gear member.

  Examples of the driven gear member include a rotating gear member formed as a rotating gear and a rack gear formed as a gear that moves in parallel.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member includes an engagement projection receiving portion that is formed larger than the meshing teeth, and the notch portion is formed in the engagement projection receiving portion. The game machine B6 is characterized in that the meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member and the engaging projection receiving portion contact each other. .

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the engagement protrusion receiving portion is used as a substitute for the teeth that come into contact with the main driving gear member, so that the durability of the driven gear member is increased. Can be improved.

  The engagement protrusion receiving portion in which the notch portion is formed is not originally a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the main driving gear member, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member so that the posture of the driven gear member is This is the part of the role of maintenance. Therefore, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be engaged like the gear teeth. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engagement protrusion receiving portion formed more robustly than the gear teeth at the portion where the main gear member and the driven gear member are brought into contact with each other at the start of engagement. Can be made.

  In the gaming machine B6, the main gear member includes a hollow portion that is a recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the main gear member is brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion. The gaming machine B7, wherein the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving part enters the recess part before.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the driven gear member abut on the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member. And the driven gear member can be suppressed from impact at the start of meshing.

  Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member at two points, even if the main driving gear member rotates, the driven gear member maintains its posture. On the other hand, when the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come close to the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recess formed adjacent to the meshing teeth faces the engaging projection receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is not in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member and the engaging protruding receiving portion, and the engaging protruding receiving portion enters the recess. As a result, the driven gear member starts to rotate before the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. The impact at the time of doing can be suppressed.

<An example of a technical idea in which the protruding gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452>
A driving source for generating a driving force, a main driving gear member rotated by the driving force of the driving source, a first moving member moved in conjunction with the rotation of the main driving gear member, and rotation of the main driving gear member A driven gear member that starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member, a second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. An adjusting device for starting, and the first moving member is moved within a moving range from a moving base end to a moving end, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member by the adjusting device. A plurality of positions of the first moving member at the time can be formed, the gaming machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, JP 2009-125092 A). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that there are few variations in production because the mode of the second moving member at a specific position during the movement of the first moving member is limited to one way.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the adjustment device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member when the moving member starts moving can be formed. Therefore, a plurality of variations of effects of the first moving member and the second moving member can be formed.

  When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member, the driven gear member and the driven gear member may be moved by meshing the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved by friction generated between the gear member and the main gear member and the driven gear member are formed of a magnetic material, and a magnetic force generated between the main gear member and the driven gear member. The mode etc. in which a driven gear member is moved are illustrated.

  The adjustment device may be formed in such a manner that at least one gear tooth of the main driving gear member or the driven gear member is formed so as to extend in a direction away from the rotation shaft, or between the shafts of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. The aspect etc. which are formed so that a distance can be changed are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is based on meshing, and the adjusting device is disposed on the main driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the main driving gear member. A projecting member that is allowed to protrude from the rotational direction of the main driving gear member to a position where it can abut on the driven gear member; An immersion state disposed at an impossible position can be formed, and the projecting member contacts the driven gear member when the projecting member rotates while the projecting member forms the projecting state. The game machine C2 is configured to start meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the manner in which the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are linked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjusting device is in an overhanging state or in an immersive state. Can be made.

  Here, the start and release of the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can also be performed by changing the inter-axis distance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. Required. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main driving gear member and the driven gear member may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main driving gear member includes a protruding member formed to be movable in the radial direction, and the main driving gear member and the driven gear when the protruding member protrudes (when the protruding state is formed). Engagement with the member is started. Therefore, it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, so that the parallelism of the rotation shaft is maintained. Therefore, accuracy is not required for the mechanism for moving the protruding member, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

  In addition, as a method of forming the protruding member in the extended state, a method in which the protruding member is extended by centrifugal force generated when the main driving gear member is rotated, or a solenoid is disposed inside the protruding member, and the solenoid is driven. Examples include a method of projecting the protruding member. One or more protruding members may be provided.

  In the gaming machine C2, the projecting member receives the urging force generated toward the rotation shaft side of the main driving gear member, thereby forming the immersion state at least in a stationary state of the main driving gear member, and rotating the main driving gear member. The gaming machine C3 is formed so as to be switchable between the immersive state and the overhanging state by switching the rotation speed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, by changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member, the protruding state where the protruding member contacts the driven gear member, and the protruding member with respect to the driven gear member Can be switched to the immersive state.

  As a result, the control of the operating speed of the driving source and the state of the protruding member can be linked, so that the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be made, for example, as compared with the case where the protruding member is extended by a solenoid. Control can be simplified.

  Examples of the member that generates the urging force include elastic springs such as a coil spring and a torsion spring, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient stretchability.

  A plurality of projecting members may be arranged on the main driving gear member with different phases. In this case, by adjusting the weight of each projecting member and the urging force acting on each projecting member, the amount by which each projecting member protrudes can be adjusted.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member includes a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed out of phase with the first projecting member, the first projecting member and the second projecting member, Are substantially equal in amount overhanging by the rotation of the main gear member, the main gear member includes a first rotation speed at which the first projecting member and the second projecting member form the immersion state, and the first projecting member. The first projecting member and the second projecting member can form a second rotational speed that forms the overhanging state, and the rotational speed of the main driving gear member can be set between the first rotational speed and the second rotational speed. The game machine C4 can be switched during the rotation of the main driving gear member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the phase at which the first protruding member starts to contact the driven gear member by changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, The main drive gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two types of phases, that is, the phase in which the two protruding members start to come into contact with the driven gear member.

  That is, the main gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the first projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Engagement with the driven gear member can be started with one projecting member. On the other hand, the main drive gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main drive gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the second projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Thus, the engagement with the driven gear member can be started by the second projecting member.

  In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing at which the rotational speed of the main gear member is increased, the timing for projecting and immersing the protruding member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even when the movement speed at the start of movement of the first moving member is the same, the timing for moving the second moving member can be changed by the timing for increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is difficult to predict the subsequent effects simply by confirming the speed at the start of the movement of the first moving member, and the attention of the operations of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved. . Therefore, the effect of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved.

  In the case where the first projecting member and the second projecting member project with substantially the same projecting amount, the masses of the first projecting member and the second projecting member are made equal and applied to each other. When the forces are equal, or because the mass of the first and second projecting members is different, the radially outward force generated by the rotation of the main driving gear member is different. The case where the urging | biasing force applied to a member is changed is illustrated. For example, when the urging force is generated by an elastic spring, the spring constants of the elastic spring that applies the urging force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that applies the urging force to the second protruding member are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member is formed with a first projecting member and a phase difference from the first projecting member, and the first projecting member becomes the driven gear member during the rotation of the main driving gear member. A second projecting member that is proximate to the driven gear member after approaching, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are formed with different projecting amounts projecting by the rotation of the main driving gear member. The main driving gear member includes a separation rotational speed in which the first projecting member of the projecting member forms an immersive state and the second projecting member forms the projecting state, and the first projecting member, A gaming machine C5, wherein both of the second projecting members can form a joint rotation speed at which the projecting state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the state in which the first projecting member abuts the driven gear member without changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, A state in which the protruding member abuts on the driven gear member can be formed.

  That is, the main driving gear member is rotated at a constant speed at the separation rotational speed, so that the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the second projecting member. On the other hand, when the main driving gear member is rotated at the common rotation speed, the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the first projecting member.

  That is, in order to change the position of the first moving member when the second moving member starts to move, it is not necessary to change the rotational speed of the driving source during the rotation of the main driving gear member. Can be

<Characteristic D group> (Notify by directing that you have won a prize by detouring)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, privilege grant means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the game sphere entering the entry means, and a game sphere to the entry means Variable means that can be changed to an open position where the ball can enter and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means from the restriction position to the release position based on the establishment of a specific condition A specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation to be varied until a predetermined condition is satisfied is set a plurality of times;
When the specific game is being executed by the specific game execution means, the entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A gaming machine D1 having the following characteristics.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by awarding game balls to the open prize opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, when the opening / closing operation is repeatedly performed on such a gaming machine, the gaming ball that has reached the variable winning device when the closing operation is performed cannot enter, and the launched gaming ball is wasted. There is a problem that the player's interest is reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player by suppressing the waste of a game ball launched by the player. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine D1, even a game ball that has flowed down to the restricting position of the variable means is easily entered into the entrance means at the next open position by the entrance assisting means. There is an effect that the number of non-ball game balls can be suppressed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the restricting position of the variable means to a position where the entry can be made in the entry means. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the restricting position of the variable means to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the entrance means can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the entry assisting means lowers the flow down speed so as to reach a speed at which the entry into the entry means is allowed until the variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a flow velocity reduction means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the flow-down speed is reduced so that the game ball flows down the range in which the ball can be entered until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the entry assisting means has the flow velocity reduction means for causing the entry, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the specific game is being executed, first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is at the restriction position; When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assist means, the second detection means capable of detecting the game ball, and the game ball by the first detection means And an effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when a game ball is detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting means, the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, when a game ball is detected by the second detection means, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect execution means. As a result, when a game ball enters the entrance means, the effect execution means executes whether or not a game ball that did not originally enter the entrance means is entered by the entrance assistant means. It can be determined by the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be recognized by the second effect that the player is advantageous.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the production execution unit includes a first production mode corresponding to the first production and a second production mode corresponding to the second production. A gaming machine D5 that is configured to be displayed at least on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, the display mode displays the presentation modes corresponding to the first presentation and the second presentation respectively, so that the meaning indicated by the presentation can be recognized more easily. effective.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the ball is a game ball that has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means even though the ball entry means is in the restricted position. The gaming machine D6 is characterized by being composed of productions.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, it is possible to recognize that the game ball that was on the restricted position by the second effect has entered the entrance means by the entrance assistant means. Effect of improving the interest of the elderly.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, when the specific game is being executed, the counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the second detecting means, and based on the count value by the counting means A gaming machine D7 having a notification means for notifying a notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means, so the number of game balls that are advantageous to the player There is an effect that can be discriminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, when a game ball is detected by the first detection unit, the game machine has a determination unit that determines whether the detected game ball has entered the ball entry unit, The effect executing means executes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect when the determining means determines that a game ball has not entered. A gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the third effect is that the gaming ball that could not enter the ball due to the restricted position could not finally enter the entering means. It is possible to recognize the game, and there is an effect that the game can be given sharpness.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D8, at least the specific game type determining means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means and the specific game type determined by the specific game type determining means are at least the A gaming machine D9, comprising: a specific game storage means storing a plurality of the specific games having different execution intervals of release operations.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D8, as the type of the specific game, a type with a different execution interval of the opening operation is set, so that it is easy to enter the ball by the pitching assistance means. There is an effect that it can be varied depending on the type of the specific game.

  In the gaming machine D10, the specific game stored in the specific game storage means is a first specific set with a large number of execution intervals at which the game assisting means can easily enter the game balls into the ball entry means. The game includes a game and a second specific game having a smaller execution interval that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means than the first specific game. A gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D10, there is an effect that the ease of entering by the entrance assisting means can be varied depending on the type of the specific game.

  In the gaming machine D11, the first specific game and the second specific game are set so that the number of opening operations is different.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D11, it is possible to make a difference in value between the first specific game and the second specific game, and to give the game more sharpness. .

<Feature E group> (Jump-up bonus winning control)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game sphere entering the entry means, and the entry means as game sphere Variable means that can be varied between an open position where the ball can enter and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and an opening that varies the variable means from the restriction position to the release position based on the establishment of a specific condition. Determined by a specific game executing means for executing a specific game having an action set multiple times, a specific game type determining means for determining the type of a specific game executed by the specific game executing means, and the specific game type determining means. The gaming machine E1 further includes a storage unit that stores at least a plurality of the specific games having different patterns of the opening operation as the specific game.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by winning a game ball in the open prize opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-700). On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry unit into which the game ball can enter. The entrance means is varied by an opening position where a game ball can enter, a restriction position for restricting entry of the game ball, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times is executed by the specific game executing means. The specific game type to be executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different patterns of opening actions are stored in the storage means. Thereby, it can suppress that a specific game becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A gaming machine E2 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when a specific game is being executed, the gaming ball on the restriction position of the variable means is entered by the following entry operation by the entry assisting means. Since it is easy to enter the ball, there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is changed to the open position, a game ball enters the entrance means by the entrance assistant means. A first specific game that includes many advantageous opening operation patterns that are one of the opening operation patterns that are likely to be played, and a second specific game that has fewer advantageous opening operation patterns than the first specific game. A gaming machine E3 that is at least set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous can be set. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the first specific game, after the advantageous opening operation pattern is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable means is changed to the opening position in a longer period than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening action is set at least once, and in the second specific game, a game ball is inserted into the entrance assisting means by the entrance assisting means of the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine E4 is configured by an opening operation of an unfavorable opening operation pattern that is difficult to perform.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E4, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, and an effect for executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means And a game machine E5 characterized by comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4, the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the entrance means is detected by the entrance assisting means, so that the player There is an effect that it can be easily notified that the state is advantageous.

  In the gaming machine E5, in the first specific game, after the predetermined number of times of the advantageous release operation pattern, until the next release operation is executed, the execution interval of other release operations is longer than that. A long long interval is set, and the second specific game is set with an end period of the specific game equal to or longer than the long interval after the predetermined number of disadvantage release action patterns. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game and the second specific game up to a predetermined number of opening operation patterns. There is an effect that it can be expected whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game.

  In the gaming machine E6, in the long interval and the end period, a ballistic effect executing means for executing an effect based on a detection result of the game ball by the detecting means during the first specific game or the second specific game; A gaming machine E7 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to identify whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game by the effect executed in the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Characteristic F group> (Switching SW pressing table)
Operation receiving means for receiving an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation can be received by the operation receiving means, and an operation when the operation is received by the operation receiving means An effect executing means, an effect selecting means for selecting the effect executed by the effect executing means, a storage means for storing a plurality of the effects selected by the effect selecting means, and the storage means, A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and has a probability variable means for varying the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means within the effective period. A featured gaming machine F1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, games that develop games while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) have become mainstream. What effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when a ball bulleted into the game area enters the start opening. In other words, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined which pattern and how the effect is performed for how many seconds and what the effect results. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. The effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, and as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because how many seconds it takes to display a series of effects is predetermined. In recent years, a number of player-participating pachinko machines have been developed. These request a button operation during a predetermined performance period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, the effect display is performed such that a part of the effect display is subjected to a change display of the symbol, the change display is stopped according to the button operation, and a so-called jackpot is generated according to the stop result ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2000-350846 A). However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by performing various other effects by operating the buttons. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of games.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation by the player is received by the operation receiving means. The period setting unit sets an effective period during which the operation can be received by the operation receiving unit. When the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. An effect executed by the effect executing means is selected by the effect selecting means. A plurality of effects selected by the effect selection means are stored in the storage means. The storage means stores a specific effect as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is varied by the probability variable means within the effective period. Thereby, when the player performs an operation, the probability that the specific effect is selected can be set to be different, so that the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the storage unit stores a plurality of production groups composed of the plurality of productions having different selection rates of the specific production, and the probability setting unit stores the probability setting unit stored in the storage unit. One of the plurality of effect groups is set, and the effect selecting means selects an effect from the effect group set by the probability setting means. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, by switching the effect group, the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by the probability setting means switching the effect group. Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily changed.

  The gaming machine F2 has counting means for counting the number of times operations are accepted by the operation accepting means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A gaming machine F3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F3, since the production group is switched depending on the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the game can give a fresh taste to the game.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means, so that the game preference is changed by the change of the effective period There is an effect that can be made different.

  In any of the gaming machines F2 to F4, when an operation is accepted by the operation accepting unit, the game machine has a history storage unit capable of storing an acceptance history, and the probability setting unit is stored in the history storage unit. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the production group is switched and set based on the received history.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines F2 to F4, the effect group can be switched according to the reception history, so that the probability can be varied according to the player's operation.

<Characteristic G group> (The SW effective period is notified by the accessory controlled by the voice lamp)
A game having first control means for executing game control, second control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation unit operable by the player In the machine, the first control means accepts the operation to the second control means based on the accepting means for accepting the operation of the operation unit by the player and the accepting operation by the accepting means. A reception transmitting means for transmitting a reception signal to indicate, a period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the player can be received by the reception means, and a valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means The operation of the operation unit is set to be valid based on the effective signal transmitting means that can transmit to the second control means and the validity period set by the period setting means. Based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the notification means for notifying the notification mode to be shown, the operation means operable at least in the first state and the second state different from the second state, An operation control unit that operates the operation unit from the first state to the second state, and the second control unit displays a display mode and a display unit that can display the display mode. Display control means, the display control means for displaying a predetermined effect on the display means based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means, the effective signal transmission means The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means based on the valid signal transmitted from the game machine G1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, games that develop games while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) have become mainstream. What effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when a ball bulleted into the game area enters the start opening. In other words, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined which pattern and how the effect is performed for how many seconds and what the effect results. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. The effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, and as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a button that can be operated by the player is provided in the gaming machine, and the player operates to display a notice effect such as a character on a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine in which an effective period in which a notice effect or the like is displayed when the operating means is operated is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like by the player (for example, Patent Literature 1: Special). No. 2000-350846). However, if the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not discriminate the input of the operation means or manage the effective period, the displayed effective period and the actual effective period are deviated. There was a problem of lowering interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of games.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the game control is controlled by the first control means. Based on the control signal from the first control means, the game control is executed by the second control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted by the accepting means. Based on the reception of the operation by the reception unit, the reception signal indicating that the operation has been received by the second control unit is transmitted by the reception transmission unit. The period setting unit sets an effective period during which the player's operation can be received by the receiving unit. An effective signal indicating the effective period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the effective signal transmitting means. Based on the fact that the effective period set by the period setting means has been reached, a notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit has been set to be effective is notified by the notification means. At least the first state and the second state different from the second state are actuated by the actuating means. Based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the operation means is operated from the first state to the second state by the operation control means. In the second control means, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. An effect mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The display control means displays the predetermined effect mode on the display means by the display control means based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmitting means, an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means. Thereby, even when there is a deviation between the notification mode for notifying the effective period operated by the second control unit and the effect mode indicating the effective period controlled by the second control unit, the operating unit operates in the second state. The effective period can be identified based on the timing of the determination. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize the effective period, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine G1 has main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling the game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the lottery means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means, Output means capable of outputting, to one control means, a start signal for starting dynamic display of the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means; The period setting means of the first control means sets the valid period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the effective period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means that controls the first control means, so that it is more accurate. There is an effect that an effective period can be set.

In gaming machine G2,
The gaming machine G3, wherein the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the valid signal is transmitted to the second control means by the valid transmission means. There is an effect that it is possible to determine the start of.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state different from the second state before the start of the effective period.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state before the start of the effective period, so that the player in advance that the effective period starts There is an effect that can be notified to.

  In the gaming machine G4, the actuating means is provided so that an actuating portion that is actuated on the front side that overlaps the display area of the display means is arranged, and the display control means of the second control means is the effective period The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that a specific effect mode is displayed on the display means within a period overlapping with a period in which the operating means is operated in the specific state before the start of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the operation means and the display means are arranged close to each other so that the notification of the effective period on the display means and the notification on the operation means can be easily recognized. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific symbol information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping with the operating part of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, the specific effect is composed of a specific symbol display that is variably displayed from the display area overlapping with the operating part. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that

<Characteristic H group> (Pseudo ream and background level are linked)
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, in a gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, the dynamic display execution means The dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the identification information displayed dynamically, and the lottery result by the lottery means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means A plurality of expectation notice display modes in which the production mode is variably set according to the expectation degree indicating that the result is a specific lottery result, and a general expectation forecast indicating the total expectation level in the plurality of expectation notice display modes Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those having a predictive display control means for displaying at least said display means and a display mode.

  Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a display screen is provided in a pachinko machine that is an example of a gaming machine, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of a start condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, when a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition and a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777 or the like). In many cases, a game is performed in which a special game state (for example, a game state called a win) is generated after the stop (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569). . In such a gaming machine, the expected degree of winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on the display screen. In the gaming machines exemplified above, when a plurality of notice displays indicating the degree of expectation are displayed, it is difficult to understand the overall degree of expectation. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by performing an easy-to-understand performance.

  According to the gaming machine H1, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a plurality of expectation notices that are set by varying the production mode according to the expectation indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result The display mode and the total expectation level notice display mode indicating the overall expectation level in the plurality of expected preview display modes are displayed on at least the display unit by the preview display control unit. As a result, since the overall expectation can be identified by the general expectation notice display mode, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the expected degree advance notice display mode displayed by the prior notice display control means displays a total that indicates an expected degree that is higher than the expected degree displayed in the overall expected degree advance notice display form. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that a variable notice display mode is set to be changed to an expectation notice display form.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to increase the expectation displayed in the general expectation notice display form by displaying the expectation notice display form. There is also an effect that the player can be interested in the expectation notice display mode.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. An expectation notice that determines the type of the expectation notice display form displayed by the notice display control means based on the dynamic display form decision means and the dynamic display form decided by the dynamic display form decision means A gaming machine H3 having display mode determining means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the type of the expected announcement display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode. It is possible to notify the player, and there is an effect that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by not being accompanied by the content and expectation of the dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, after temporarily stopping the identification information in a predetermined manner, pseudo stop means for executing an effect of starting dynamic display at least once, and the number of temporary stops executed by the pseudo stop means A number-of-times determining means that determines the dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and the lottery result by the lottery means, and the expectation notice display control means is the pseudo-stop The gaming machine H4, wherein the variable notice display mode is displayed on the display means based on the temporary stop being executed by the means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2 or the gaming machine H3, it is possible to give value to the temporary stop, and to allow the player to play a game with the expectation of the temporary stop. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the overall expectation advance notice display mode indicating a predetermined expectation is determined by the expectation level advance display mode determination unit. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the specific dynamic display mode set in such a manner is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or the gaming machine H4, the overall expectation notice display mode is set in association with the dynamic display mode, so that the total associated with the dynamic display mode The expectation can be notified to the player, and the discomfort given to the player can be reduced because the contents of the dynamic display mode and the overall expectation are not accompanied.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the notice display control means displays the comprehensive expectation notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time when the predetermined condition is established. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the overall expectation notice display mode showing the same expectation level is continuously displayed in the dynamic display of information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the overall expectation level is inherited across a plurality of dynamic displays, so that it is possible to have fun of stacking games. .

In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, a storage unit that stores a plurality of dynamic display mode groups configured in a plurality of different dynamic display modes as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit And setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining unit,
The overall expectation advance notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time is displayed as a display mode indicating the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H3 to H6, it is possible to notify the dynamic display mode group set by the general expectation level, so that various effects can be given to the player. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H7, when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display unit, the setting unit sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the general expectation announcement display mode displayed. A gaming machine H8 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H7, the production mode group that matches the overall expectation level is set, so that the overall expectation level and the production mode group can be related, and the player There is an effect that it is possible to make the notification easy to understand.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine Z1 to play. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
650 Ball entry means 652a First detection means 652b Second detection means 653 Part of entry assist means 654 Variable means 114 Part of effect execution means S1004 Specific game execution means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. started, if the combination of symbols stop symbol after the change completion predetermined become those Tari, advantageous special game state occurs for the player, a large amount of prize balls is dispensing ready .

  Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by winning a game ball in the open prize opening.

JP-A-9-700

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is advantageous to the player on the basis of a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege, a variable means that can be varied between an opening position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a regulation position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means are identified Based on the establishment of the condition, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the opening operation to be varied from the restriction position to the release position until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set a plurality of times, and the specific game execution means When a specific game is being executed, a ball entry assisting means that makes it easy for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent opening operation, and the specific game is executed. The variable means is A first detection means capable of detecting a game ball that could not be entered due to the restricted position, and a game ball detected by the first detection means to the entry means by the entry assisting means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection means capable of detecting the game ball when entering the ball and the first detection means, the first effect is executed, and the game ball is detected by the second detection means. And an effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , a privilege that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the entrance means in which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entrance means. An assigning means, a variable means that can be changed to an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means based on establishment of a specific condition The specific game is executed by the specific game executing means for executing the specific game in which the opening operation to be varied from the restricted position to the open position until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific game executing means executes the specific game. In the case where the specific game is being executed, and a ball entry assisting means for facilitating the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent opening operation. The variable means is the restriction position And a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball that could not be entered by the game, and a game ball detected by the first detection means entered the entry means by the entry assistance means. A second detection unit capable of detecting the game ball, and a case where the first effect is executed based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection unit and the game ball is detected by the second detection unit; And an effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a composite operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group, and a 2nd gear group. It is a back exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, the 1st gear group, and the 2nd gear group. It is a front perspective view of a meniscus member. It is a back perspective view of a meniscal member. It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is the fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XVIIa-XVIIa line of FIG. 16, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit after moving a drive device from (a). It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit after the drive motor is separated from the drive gear from (a). It is. (A) is a front view of a two-layer gear, (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a pair of slide member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a pair of slide member. (A) is a front view of the two-layer gear in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of a two-layer gear, (c) is a side view of a two-layer gear. (A) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (A) is a front view of a two-layer gear in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a diagram of two in the XXXIc-XXXIc line in FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of a layer gear. (A) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32 (a). . It is a front view of the two-layer gear in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a front exploded perspective view of the double layer gear in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a double layer gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear in 8th Embodiment. (A) to (e) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reverse gear. It is a graph which shows the rotational speed of a double layer gear. (A) is a front perspective view of the specific winning opening 650, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. (A) is the front view which removed the front cover of the special prize-winning apparatus 650, (b) is sectional drawing in the LIIb-LIIb line | wire of FIG. 52 (a), (c) is FIG. Is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIc-LIIc. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the entrance timing in the opening / closing operation | movement of an entrance restriction board. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed schematically the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern A of the entrance restriction plate, and (b) schematically shows the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern B of the entrance restriction plate. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the detection timing of various sensors, and the content of the effect display based on the detection result. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the appearance effect by the normal effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the appearance by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example It is the figure which showed typically the production and the escape production. (A) is the figure which showed typically the capture effect and escape effect by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the special effect in the jackpot game in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the appearance effect and recapture effect by a screen. (A) is the figure which showed typically the appearance effect and failure effect by the special effect screen in the jackpot game in the 1st control example, (b) is the normal effect in the jackpot game in the 1st control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the capture production by a screen. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical accessory and display content in an accessory interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical accessory and display content in an accessory interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in a background interlocking effect. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in a background interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot judgment value of a special symbol in a 1st control example, (b) is the 1st in a 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type, (c) is a correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the judgment value of the normal symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a response | compatibility with the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of big hit in the 1st control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first control example, (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability variation) in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory interlocking effect production table in a 1st control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the background lottery table in a 1st control example. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the work RAM in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the background change extraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot winning process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit effect production process which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance passage process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot display process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the appearance effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the escape effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the failure production | presentation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the capture production process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the recapture effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timing alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the comment type | system | group effect in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the continuous striking system effect in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW effect of the touch type | system | group effect in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the electric structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment background table at the time of a hit normal reach in the 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the comment background table at the time of a hit super reach in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment background table at the time of a detachment in a 2nd control example, (b) is the pattern content of the fixed comment background table at the time of a detachment in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the hit fixed comment background table in the second control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the comment table in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous striking system effect lottery table in a 2nd control example. It is. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production screen of the continuous striking system effect in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production screen of the continuous striking system effect in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the content of RAM223 in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st lottery table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd lottery table in a 3rd control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third lottery table in the third control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the fourth lottery table in the third control example. (E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is a diagram of the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st remaining time lottery table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the content of the 2nd remaining time lottery table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 3rd remaining time lottery table in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW press adaptation processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation selection process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the entrance timing in the opening / closing pattern at the time of jackpot C in the 4th control example, (b) is in the opening / closing pattern at the time of the small hit in the 4th control example, It is the schematic diagram which showed the entrance timing typically. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process between rounds performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 26, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the made through-hole, and is being fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R probability variation jackpot and 16R hourly jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “16R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 16 rounds, and “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot of 16 rounds. Later, a transition is made to the low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), this is a jackpot that results in a short-time state.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state display associated with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  As a result, during normal times, there are many cases where the electric prize accompanying the second prize opening 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize opening 640, so the first prize opening 64 without the electric prize is displayed. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  It should be noted that the selection ratio of the jackpot type that is selected when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the ball at the second winning port 640 may be different. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning port 64 when the ball wins the second winning port 640, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. Set higher than. Thereby, the change by the way of hitting the sphere described above can be made clearer.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close on the right side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. )). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so that these states are repeated alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The first winning sensor 650 a and the second incoming sensor 650 b disposed in the specific winning unit 650 are connected, and the MPU 201 is output from various switches 208 and from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, an entrance A sensor 651a, an exit sensor 652a, a detour sensor 653a, and the like are connected to each other. Other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the housing structure of the units 300 and 400 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the composite operation unit 400 is mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the front unit 300 and the composite operation unit 400 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while contacting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212. It is arrange | positioned in the bottom wall part 211 by the aspect (refer FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the combined operation unit 400 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is disposed on the front side of the combined operation unit 400 in a stacked state, and is accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 400) is arranged in a stacked state in which the other operation units (for example, the front unit 300) are superimposed on the front side. In a front view, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. In the description of FIG. 8, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 8 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slid and moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 moves to the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the third symbol display device 81). It is arranged on the front, see FIG.

  Each of these operation units 300 and 400 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and, as described above, is disposed in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, not only each of the operation units 300 and 400 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 400, the retracted position and the extended position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B are front perspective views of the composite operation unit 400. 9A, the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 9B illustrates the state where the slide member 420 and the meniscus member 460 are disposed at the extended position. . In addition, the protruding position of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 is formed as a terminal end located on the opposite side of the retracted position described above among the terminal ends of the movable range of the slide member 420.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 are slid in the vertical direction, and the half-moon member 460 is pivotally supported in the slide member 420 in the course of the slide movement (see FIG. 12). Is rotated around. Next, the overall configuration of the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

  10 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. 440 is a front exploded perspective view of the second gear group 450 and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the pair of slide members 420, the back cover 430, the first gear group 440, and the second gear group 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the composite operation unit 400 includes a pair of left and right base members 410 and a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the rear case 210. A pair of slide members 420 formed so as to be slidable to each other, a back cover 430 that forms a space between the main body portion 421 by being fastened to the back surface of the main body portion 421 of the slide members 420, and a slide member The first gear group 440 disposed between the 420 and the back cover 430, the second gear group 450 disposed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430, and the reverse of the second gear group 450. It mainly includes a meniscus member 460 that is locked to the gear 453, and a drive device 470 that generates a drive force that moves the slide member 420. .

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the vertical direction and is a skeleton of the composite operation unit 400, and is a long plate-shaped main body portion 411 that matches the thickness direction with the front-rear direction, A plurality of slide holes 412 drilled in the thickness direction and extending in the up-down direction, an alignment wall 413 formed on opposing surfaces of the pair of base members 410 as wall surfaces parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412, and assembly A fixed rack gear member 414 in which rack gears 414a and 414b are formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface in contact with the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9).

  The slide hole 412 is a long hole that regulates the slide direction of the slide member 420. The slide hole 412 is connected to the approximate center of each base member 410 and has a pair of intermediate slide holes 412a whose extending directions coincide with each other. An outer slide hole 412b formed on the outside of the slide hole 412a (opposite side to which the pair of base members 410 oppose) and an inner side of the intermediate slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410) An inner slide hole 412c. The outer slide hole 412b and the inner slide hole 412c are formed in a staggered manner. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412 b is formed in the upper part of the base member 410, the inner slide hole 412 c is formed in the lower part of the base member 410.

  The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 while being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting a driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a bar shape with a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a engraved over an outer surface that is a member to be formed, which is a side surface that is in contact with alignment wall 413, and a surface opposite to the outer surface that is formed in parallel with the outer surface. And a limited rack gear 414b which is engraved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and which is engraved only near the center of the base member 410.

  The permanent rack gear 414a meshes with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b meshes with the first gear group 440, details of which will be described later. Further, the limited rack gear 414b has a start gear tooth 414b1 (end gear tooth) arranged on the side where the first gear group 440 starts to mesh with the deformed gear 441, and is formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

  The slide member 420 is a member that is slid up and down while the meniscus member 460 is disposed at the center. The slide members 420 are formed in a pair of upper and lower parts, and since the configuration of each slide member 420 is common (point symmetry at the center point in front view), only one (upper side) slide member 420 will be described, and the other (lower side). Description of the slide member 420 is omitted.

  That is, one slide member 420 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction and has a main body portion 421 in which steps are formed on the front side at both ends, and vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421. A pair of transmitted leg portions 422 that extend, a pair of side wall portions 423 that extend in a plate shape from the upper and lower ends of the main body portion 421 to the back side (front side in FIG. 11), and a protrusion from the back surface of the main body portion 421 A plurality of first pivot pins 424 that are provided in the left-right direction and a plurality of second pivot pins 425 that project from the back of one end of the main body 421 (to the right in FIG. 11). And mainly.

  The main body portion 421 is disposed so as to face the large-diameter shaft support hole 421a formed in the central portion, the rotation restricting hole 421b formed in an arc shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and the upper side wall portion 423. And a slide regulating wall portion 421c whose central side is close to the side wall portion 423 and a slide regulating pin 421d that protrudes to the back side at both ends and is formed in a pair of upper and lower sides. The

  The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arcuate wall portion 461c of the meniscus member 460 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 421a has a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arcuate wall portion 461c. The meniscus member 460 and the reverse gear 453 are connected through the shaft support hole 421a so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  The rotation restricting hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the meniscal member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation restricting hole 421b is slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. When the locking pin 461e is brought into contact with the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b, further rotation of the meniscus member 460 is restricted.

  The slide regulating wall portion 421c is a portion that accommodates the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and a portion formed in a step has a biasing force on the slide rack 442. The urging spring 442c is applied in such a manner as to stop one end thereof.

  The slide restricting pin 421d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and inserted into the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The collar member C (see FIG. 17A) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion where the flange is formed is each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. It is formed slightly smaller than the width. Therefore, the flange is interposed between the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the main body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. Thereby, the slide restricting pin 421d is formed to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while the movement in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a is restricted.

  The retaining plate B (see FIG. 19A) is formed with a width larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restriction pin 421d, the slide member 420 is connected to the base member 410 so as not to be pulled out.

  In addition, the retaining plate B has a fastening hole formed on the surface that contacts the end of the slide restricting pin 421d, and the periphery of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. The built-up portion is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is disposed at the root portion of the slide restricting pin 421d and the built-up portion of the retaining plate B is disposed at the tip portion, so that the shaft of the slide restricting pin 421d can be used as the intermediate slide hole. The slide holes 412a to 412c including the 412a can be stably supported while being matched with the opening direction (see FIG. 19A).

  The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted, and is the same as the rack gear 422a meshed with the driving gear 473 of the driving device 470 and the slide restriction pin 421d of the main body portion 421. A protruding slide regulating pin 422b, a front side wall portion 422c that covers the side surface of the front side of the rack gear 422a (a direction perpendicular to the gear teeth continuous direction), and a front side wall portion 422c are formed. And a cutout portion 422d which is an arcuate cutout.

  Similar to the slide restriction pin 421d, the slide restriction pin 422b is provided with the collar member C and the retaining plate B, and is inserted into the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. In this embodiment, the slide restricting pin 422b of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the right side when viewed from the front is inserted into the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide restricting pin of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the left side when viewed from the front. 422b is inserted through the inner slide hole 412c of the base member 410. Thus, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 422b, the slide restricting pin 422b is stably supported while being aligned with the opening direction of the slide holes 412b and 412c, and the slide member 420 and the base The member 410 can be connected so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The front side wall portion 422c is formed in a manner capable of overlapping with the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

  The notch 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A). When the two are arranged together, the representative circle is formed in a portion projected onto the front side wall portion 422c in front view.

  The side wall part 423 includes a notch part 423a that is notched above and below a region where the shaft support hole 421a of the main body part 421 is formed. The notch 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the meniscus member 460 passes.

  The first shaft support pin 424 includes a raised shaft support pin 424a in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are continuously provided from the back surface of the slide member 420, and a double-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. The shaft support pin 424b is mainly provided.

  Since the raised shaft support pin 424a includes a ring-shaped portion having the same height around the periphery, the inserted second gear group 450 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (with a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). It is pivotally supported. Thereby, the 1st gear group 440 can be arrange | positioned in the space.

  The back cover 430 is a member that covers the body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the back surface of the slide member 420, and a pair of insertions through which the slide restriction pins 421d are inserted. A hole 430a is formed in each one end.

  The first gear group 440 is a gear group that is housed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and has a deformed gear 441 meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and a side surface. The rack gear 442b is engraved and the slide rack 442 is slid along the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, the pair of transmission gears 443 for transmitting the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and the deformed gear. An intermediate plate 444 that is a plate-like member that covers the transmission gear 443 disposed on the deformed gear 441 side from the axial direction, and is fastened and fixed to the main body 421 of the slide member 420. Is mainly provided.

  The deformed gear 441 includes a starting gear tooth 441a which is formed larger than other teeth among the gear teeth to be engraved.

  The deformed gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are each supported by a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 of the slide member 420.

  The slide rack 442 includes a main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular bar shape, a rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and protrudes from the side surface of the main body portion 442a. And an urging spring 442c locked to the protruding portion.

  The urging spring 442c is engaged with the step portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, thereby generating an urging force that pushes the slide rack 442 back to the transmission gear 443 side.

  The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and a shaft support pin 444a projects from the front side.

  Of the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450, a transmission gear 451 that is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a.

  The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the meniscus member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 using the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the left-right direction. ) And a plurality of transmission gears 451 whose outer end gear meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and an inner end portion of the plurality of transmission gears 451 opposite to the permanent rack gear 414a. A two-layer gear 452 in which gear teeth 452a on the upper layer (rear layer) are meshed with a transmission gear 451 pivotally supported on the shaft, and a split gear tooth 452b on a lower layer (front layer) of the two-layer gear 452 And a reversing gear 453 to be meshed.

  In the transmission gear 451, among the plurality of gears, the gear at the end of the base member 410 on the permanent rack gear 414 a side is pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444 a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are supported by the raising shaft of the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by the pin 424a.

  As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a includes a ring-shaped portion having the same height around the transmission pin 424a, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (with a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). It is pivotally supported. Thereby, the axial direction height of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gear 451 can be matched. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are axially supported with a predetermined distance from the main body 421 of the slide member 420.

  The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material, and gear teeth 452a engraved in the upper layer (back side layer), divided gear teeth 452b engraved in the lower layer (front side layer), upper layer and lower layer And a sliding wall portion 452d that is an arcuate wall surface that is slid by the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

  Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

  The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of a region in which the dividing gear teeth 452b are engraved and a region in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed, and another intermediate portion at the boundary between the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d. Starting gear teeth 452b1 larger than the gear teeth 452b2 are engraved. Note that the depressions 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 as receiving portions of the gear teeth are formed deeper than the depressions between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, the starting gear teeth 453b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453, which will be described later, can be received with good meshing (a state where the gear teeth are meshed deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth varies from one tooth to another, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be kept good.

  The depressions 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starter gear teeth 452b1 function as receiving parts for the starter gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B). Of the recesses 452b3 and 452b4, the side close to the sliding wall 452d is referred to as a first recess 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recess 452b3 is referred to as a second recess 452b4.

  The gear teeth 452b are formed smaller than the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the divided gear teeth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the misalignment at the start of meshing between the start gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the start gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 is suppressed, and the rotation accuracy when the meshing continues is improved. Can be made.

  Note that the start of meshing means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to contact, and is not limited to when the gear teeth start to contact each other. In the present embodiment, it means a time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 are brought into contact with each other.

  Further, when the meshing continues, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2 are meshed after the starter gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 mesh.

  As a method of increasing the size of the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of increasing the tooth width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) is also conceivable. However, in this embodiment, because the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure, the start gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to have the same tooth width and the tooth thickness (the dimension in the tooth continuous direction). ) And toothpaste are increased.

  The disc portion 452c is formed so as to overlap with the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 in the axial direction (FIG. 21B). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 move in the axial direction, the gear teeth are brought into contact with the disk portion 452c, thereby preventing the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 from wobbling. And further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 can be suppressed.

  The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the meniscus member 460 by being meshed with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and a main body portion 453 a formed into a tubular shape through which the cylindrical main body 462 a of the meniscal member 460 can be inserted. A reversing gear tooth 453b formed outwardly from one end of the main body 453a, and a main body 453a formed adjacent to the reversing gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer periphery of the cylindrical main body 462a. An arc-shaped concave portion 453c that is an arc-shaped wall surface that is disposed on the shaft object and is slid by the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide protrusion that forms the arc-shaped concave portion 453c. It mainly includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and a locking protrusion 453e that protrudes in the radial direction from a position obtained by dividing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 453a into three equal parts.

  The reversing gear teeth 453b are engraved at both ends thereof with starting gear teeth 453b1 larger in size (tooth thickness and tooth injury) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (the gear teeth other than both ends). The recess 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d as a gear tooth receiving portion is deeper than the recess formed between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear tooth 453b2. It is formed. Thereby, the starting gear teeth 452b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 can be received with good meshing (a state where the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth varies from one tooth to another, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be kept good.

  The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion that comes into contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a radius of curvature substantially the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

  The locking projection 453e is fitted in an arc-shaped wall portion 461c formed in the main body portion 461 of the meniscal member 460 in a manner in which relative locking is impossible. Thereby, the reversing gear 453 and the meniscal member 460 are rotated together.

  Next, the meniscal member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the meniscal member 460, and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the meniscal member 460. 14 and 15 show a state where the front cover 466 is removed from the main body 461 of the meniscal member 460.

  The half-moon member 460 is a member that is disposed in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and that is pivoted in such a manner that the top and bottom are reversed as the slide member 420 slides. A central gear 462 having a cylindrical main body 462a inserted through a connecting hole 461a formed in the vicinity of the center of the main body 461, a main body 461 which is a member and forming a skeleton of the meniscal member 460, and the central gear 462 A crank gear 464 having a plurality of claw members 463 that are slid along the main body 461 in accordance with the rotation of the main body 461 and a slide pin 464b that is inserted into a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw member 463, A transmission gear group 465 disposed between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshed with the center gear 462 and the crank gear 464; A cover 466 before the front side is fastened parts 461 mainly includes the drive lever 467 (see FIG. 12), a to be fastened to the ends of the tubular body 462a of the center gear 462.

  The main body 461 includes a connection hole 461a through which the center gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of shaft support pins 461b through which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are supported, and an inner periphery of the reversing gear 453 around the connection hole 461a. An arcuate wall portion 461c that is provided with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and that has a notch into which the locking protrusion 453e is fitted, a claw-like flange portion 461d on which a biasing spring is hooked, and a rear surface. And a locking pin 461e that protrudes.

  The locking pin 461e is inserted into the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21A). Thereby, the rotation angle of the meniscus member 460 is regulated.

  The center gear 462 includes a cylindrical main body 462a that is inserted into the connection hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange 462b that is formed in a radial flange shape from one end of the cylindrical main body 462a, and a flange thereof. A drive lever 467 is formed to be fastened and fixed to the gear tooth 462c engraved inward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of 462b and the other end that is opposite to one end of the cylindrical main body 462a. The fastening hole 462d is mainly provided with a claw-like flange portion 462e with one end hooked to the other end of the urging spring locked to the flange portion 461d of the main body portion 461.

  The claw member 463 mainly includes a long hole-like slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b which is a long plate-like body protruding from the front side. .

  The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into a long hole-like slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. Accordingly, the claw member 463 is formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466.

  The crank gear 464 is supported by a shaft support pin 461b of the main body portion 461, and a main body portion 464a whose gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a slide projecting eccentrically with the rotation shaft of the main body portion 464a. A pin 464b.

  The main body 464 a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462 by being engaged with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465.

  The slide pins 464b are moved about the respective pivot pins 461b as the main body 464a is rotated. As a result, the slide pin 464b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) arranged close to the center gear 462 and a second position arranged away from the center gear 462. By the movement of the slide pin 464b, the claw member 463 is moved along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26B).

  The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the meniscus member 460 between the main body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted therethrough. A long hole-like slide hole 466a is formed.

  The drive lever 467 has a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and an insertion hole 467b (see FIG. 13) drilled at a position matching the fastening hole 462d of the center gear 462. 13).

  The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion that is pushed by the slide rack 442. When the lever portion 467a is pushed by the slide rack 442, the center gear 462 is rotated.

  Returning to FIG. 10 from FIG. The driving device 470 is disposed so as to be raised to the front side at the center portion of the base member 410 and fastened and fixed to the base member 410, and a drive motor 472 fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. And a drive gear 473 inserted through the drive shaft of the drive motor 472.

  The fastening plate portion 471 includes a pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b that are formed in a circular arc shape along the outer shape of the motor case of the drive gear 472 and extend to the front side, and one restriction wall portion 471a ( The inner side in the assembled state is extended to a substantially intermediate position of the motor case, and the other regulating wall portion 471b (outer side in the assembled state) is extended longer than the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a. The pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b are used as a guide when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471.

  The drive gear 473 is arranged to face the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides, and meshes from both sides.

  Next, an overview of the movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 17A is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XVIIa-XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17A is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 after the drive device 470 is moved from FIG. 17A, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 taken along the line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. FIG. 19B is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19A. 16 and 17 illustrate a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the transmitted leg portions 422. At this time, the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 that is opposed to the drive gear 473 is engaged with the single drive gear 473. As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the transmitted leg portions 422 opposed to each other across the drive gear 473 are slid and moved in synchronization.

  That is, in the state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in front view, so that the upper slide member 420 is moved downward and the lower slide member 420 is moved downward. Are moved upward at a constant speed. At this time, the pair of drive motors 472 arranged on the left and right are controlled synchronously, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

  Further, the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied in directions opposite to the drive gear 473. For example, the right driving gear 473 is weighted in the direction of rotating the driving gear 473 clockwise from the upper slide member 420, and the driving gear 473 is counterclockwise rotated from the lower slide member 420. The weight is applied in the direction of rotation. Thus, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are equal to each other, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped by the balance of the weights of the pair of slide members 420 even when the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at arbitrary positions, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

  The pair of transmitted leg portions 422 of the slide member 420 are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 are left and right. Both are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front.

  As a result, even if one of the transmitted leg portions 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, when the distance from the meshed drive gear 473 increases) The other transmitted leg 422 connected to one transmitted leg 422 via the main body 421 is moved in the same direction as the one transmitted leg 422. That is, since it moves in the direction away from the drive gear 473 engaged, it can suppress applying a big load to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other to-be-transmitted leg part 422.

  Here, for example, one transmitted leg portion 422 of the slide member 420 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the other transmitted leg portion 422 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front. Then, one of the transmitted leg portions 422 is moved from the drive gear 473 in a direction in which the distance increases, so that the other transmitted leg portion 422 is pressed against the drive gear 473. As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other transmitted leg portion 422.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the drive gear 473. Therefore, the proper meshing relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg 422 is appropriate. Can be achieved. Moreover, the shape of a pair of slide member 420 can be made equivalent, and a member can be made shared.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c interfere in the front-rear direction (FIG. 19A, the vertical direction on the paper surface). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the notch 422d in front view. The positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473 will be described as a specific phase position. “The drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the notch 422d in front view”.

  Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position) that is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 422. . Thereby, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  Here, the pair of slide members 420 are disposed opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gear 422a of each transmitted leg portion 422. In this state, it is necessary to form a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are similarly disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are engaged with each other with arbitrary gear teeth. It ’s not good. That is, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 are fixed so that the gear teeth meshing with each other are fixed (representative gear teeth of the rack gear 422a that are brought into contact with the representative gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when engaged. Is formed).

  In order to form the proper meshing state, the notch 422d of the slide member 420 can be used. That is, the cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16) as described above. When the shaft and the center axis are arranged together, it is formed in a portion projected onto the front side wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16).

  Therefore, the notch portion 422d is disposed to face the pair of slide members 420 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed with each other in an appropriate meshing state.

  In a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 is blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 is the upper slide member and the lower slide member is the upper member). 420 is blocked from further movement downward). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved to the retracted position side, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (moving resistance increases).

  Therefore, in adjusting the position of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is randomly moved in the retract direction, the slide member 420 is the retracted position (specific phase) that is the end of the movable range. Position). Accordingly, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch 422d, and the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 in this state. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

  The arrangement of the driving device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, since the notch portions 422d are formed in the pair of slide members 420, the assembled driving device 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the drive device 470 can be improved.

  That is, when the notch portion 422d is not formed in the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front side wall portion 422c is formed in the entire region of the rack gear 422a), the driving device 470 is attached to the base member 410. Even if it tries to assemble | attach, the drive gear 473 will contact | abut to the front side wall part 422c, and the drive device 470 cannot be assembled | attached to the base member 410. FIG. Therefore, the driving device 470 has to be disposed on the opposite side of the front side wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom in arranging the driving device 470 is low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notch 422d is formed in the front side wall 422c, so that the drive gear 473 is moved in the front-rear direction through the notch 422d, so that the drive device 470 is moved to the slide member 420. It can be disposed on the front side (the side on which the front side wall portion 422c is disposed). Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

  Further, a front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in a layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c are moved back and forth by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position. They can be overlapped in a direction view (viewed in the vertical direction in FIG. 16). Accordingly, when the drive device 470 is replaced, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

  That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while keeping the drive gear 473 in contact with the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). . As a result, the drive motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshing state between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg 422. Therefore, before and after replacement of the drive motor 472, it is not necessary to adjust the meshing between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 again, and the maintainability can be improved.

  At this time, the drive gear 473 overlaps with the front side wall portion 422c of the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, a force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged opposite to each other with the rotation shaft interposed therebetween. Therefore, the drive motor 472 is restrained from tilting with respect to the drive gear 473.

  Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the restriction wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the restriction wall portions 471a and 471b. Inclination of the shaft center with respect to the drive gear 473 can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the drive gear 473 deform | transforms.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, one regulating wall portion 471 a is formed so as to retract from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 toward the fastening plate portion 471. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out with the extended end of one of the restriction walls 471a as the fulcrum S. That is, since the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are disposed adjacent to each other, the extending end of the one regulating wall portion 471a is used as a fulcrum S and the side surface of the driving motor 472 (FIG. 19). In (a), for the sake of easy understanding, the distance between the fulcrum S and the action point W when the force is applied to the drive motor 472 with the action point W being shown as an action point W in the drive motor 472 is minimized. It can be. As a result, the force required to pull out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed depending on the setting of the power point. FIG. 19A shows the relationship between the fulcrum S and the action point W and a virtual insulator.

  In addition, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other restriction wall 471b disposed to face the one restriction wall 471a. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 relative to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the other restriction wall 471b is formed to project forward (upward in FIG. 19A) from the extending end of the one restriction wall 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with the one restriction wall 471a as the fulcrum S, the drive motor 472 is moved from the other restriction wall 471b in the state W1 where the action point W is closest to the other restriction wall 471b. For this reason, it is possible to apply a force toward the direction of pushing back to the action point W. Therefore, the other restriction wall 471b can prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft. Accordingly, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out, the drive motor 472 can be reliably prevented from moving in a direction away from the one regulating wall portion 471a.

  Next, the two-layer gear 452 related to the rotation of the meniscal member 460 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20A is a front view of the two-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20B is a rear view of the two-layer gear 452.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disc portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20A, the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starter gear teeth 452b1 can be provided with durability that can withstand a collision (contact) with the reversing gear 453. In the present embodiment, only the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d are formed in a large size, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed in a small size, so that the durability is improved and the material cost is suppressed. Both can be achieved.

  The double-layer gear 452 includes a hollow bottom wall 452e as a wall surface that forms the bottom of the first hollow 452b3 and the second hollow 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f that connects the hollow bottom wall 452e and the ring-shaped rib. .

  Here, the second depression 452b4 needs to have a sufficient depth as a depression for receiving the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first depression 452b3 is engaged with the reversing gear 453. This is a recess into which the protruding receiving portion 453d enters. For this reason, the depth of the second depression 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the first depression 452b3 and the second depression 452b4 are formed with substantially the same depth. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material in the vicinity of the first dent 452b3 and the second dent 452b4 when the two-layer gear 452 is molded can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, a space is formed in a region surrounded by the wall portion formed by the bottom of the sliding wall 452d and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and the hollow bottom wall 452e. At this time, the sliding wall 452d and the hollow bottom wall 452e are formed with substantially the same thickness, so that the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding can be suppressed. Moreover, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

  Here, the hollow bottom wall 452e is not necessarily required to ensure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are formed in such a manner that they are connected by the hollow bottom wall portion 452e. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact when the starting gear teeth 452b1 abut on the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B).

  The push-back rib 452f is connected to the recess bottom wall 452e of the second recess 452b4. Here, the direction of the line of force F (see FIG. 23B) generated when the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starter gear teeth 452b1 is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. Accordingly, even when a space is formed in the region surrounded by the wall portion formed by the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 and the bottom portion of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, and the hollow bottom wall portion 452e, the push-back rib 452f is formed. As a result, the resistance to the force F can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the start gear teeth 452b1 from being deformed by an impact at the time of contact.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the gear teeth 452a are formed around the periphery of the double-layer gear 452. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21B), the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21A). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the combined operation unit 400, that is, the operations of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 that are moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 being transmitted will be described. To do. FIG. 21 to FIG. 26 illustrate the operation of the composite operation unit 400 in time series. 21 to 26, the back cover 430 is not shown for easy understanding.

  21A and 22A are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 21B and 22B are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. FIG. 21 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position. In FIG. 22, the pair of slide members are slid by a predetermined distance from the retracted position, and the engagement protrusion of the reversing gear 453 is illustrated. The state where the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first hollow portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is illustrated. 21B and 22B, in the double-layer gear 452, the divided gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. The

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position, the reverse gear 453 has the arcuate recess 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d sliding on the double-layer gear 452. The wall is circumscribed by the wall 452d. Thereby, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

  In this case, the mechanical fitting between the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism that maintains the posture of the reversing gear 453. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose other members such as an elastic spring in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453.

  Further, the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 are in contact with both sides of a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation shaft of the reverse gear 453. Is done. Therefore, the rotation of the reverse gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reverse gear 453, and the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the pair of slide members 420 are moved, the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414 a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the other transmission gear 451 and the two-layer gear 452 meshed with the transmission gear 451 by the gear teeth 452 are also rotated. On the other hand, since the reverse gear 453 is not meshed with the double-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

  While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. In the present embodiment, the arcuate concave portion 453c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is circumscribed on the surface of the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing the sliding friction from being concentrated in one place, Frictional force can be dispersed throughout the arcuate recess 453c. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a large force from being applied locally to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452. Moreover, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be improved by increasing the number of locations where the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 come into contact.

  FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in the rear view from FIG. 22 (b), and FIG. 23 (b) shows the state of FIG. The state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in the rear view is shown in the figure. In FIG. 23, the split gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 22 (b), before the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452, the end of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is the double-layer gear. The first recess 452b3 of 452 is disposed opposite to the first recess 452b3.

  At this time, since the end of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d disposed to face the first recess 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 is released, and at least 1 can be rotated in the direction of rotation (clockwise direction in FIG. 22B).

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 23A, so that the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452. Rotated before That is, the reverse gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453. At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d enters the first recess 452b3 of the double-layer gear 452.

  That is, the reversing gear 453 is slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23A). It contacts the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23B). Thereby, the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to contact is a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reversing gear 453. Rather, it is formed at a position (upward in FIG. 23B) returned to the opposite side of the rotational direction of the double-layer gear 452.

  As a result, the force applied to the reverse gear 453 when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start to contact each other is directed to the rotational direction of the reverse gear 453, and the rotational shaft of the reverse gear 453. It is divided into components that are suitable for Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact between the start gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453.

  That is, when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 start to come into contact with the reversing gear 453, they are not meshed with each other by a plurality of teeth from the beginning. Therefore, when the force applied in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 when contacting the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a higher speed than the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 452 ( Move). In that case, there is a possibility that the meshing of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 may fail.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). The rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotation resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotation shaft. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact of the two-layer gear 452 with the starter gear teeth 452b1.

  Further, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent tooth disengagement at the start of engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. .

  Here, since the play (backlash) formed becomes larger as the gear teeth become larger, the shift in the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears meshed from the middle can be tolerated more greatly as the teeth become larger. become. That is, when the gear teeth are downsized, there is a possibility that the teeth to be engaged will be shifted by one even if the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be engaged is slightly shifted.

  In this embodiment, the play of the double-layer gear 452 is greater than the play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 to which the drive force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 becomes larger. That is, the phase relationship shift of the two-layer gear 452 caused by the relationship with the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase relationship shift generated between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 and is acceptable. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference of the tooth | gear at the time of the meshing start of the double layer gear 452 and the inversion gear 453 can be prevented.

  When the two-layer gear 452 starts to come into contact with the reversing gear 453 in the rotation direction, the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 starts to come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. That is, the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that starts to mesh with the starter gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

  That is, the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d in which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed is not a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452, thereby reversing the gear. This is the part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, the size is not limited according to the size of the mating gear tooth to be engaged, like a gear tooth. In addition, it is desirable that the portion of the double-layer gear 452 that is in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d and the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is large and strong, and the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is used as that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

  When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and accordingly, the double-layer gear 452 is rotated. That is, the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed, and at least the transmitted leg 422 meshed with the driving gear 473 is interposed between the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. To do. Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 is transmitted to the driving device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving device 470 from being damaged by an impact at the time of contact.

  24A and 25A are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 24B and 25B are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 24 shows a state where the pair of meniscus members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 22A, and FIG. 25 shows the pair of meniscus members 460 from the state of FIG. A state immediately after the rotation by 180 degrees is illustrated. In FIG. 24B and FIG. 25B, the double-layer gear 452 is shown with the divided gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c shown by imaginary lines. The

  As shown in FIG. 24B, in a state where the meniscal member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are engaged.

  In the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 that abut on the reversing gear 453 at the start of abutting with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the two-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 are engaged with each other by the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash occurs at the time of continuing the engagement rather than at the start of the engagement. Can be reduced. Thereby, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 colliding at the start of the engagement and the improvement of the smoothness of the rotation of the reversing gear 453.

  Further, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are meshed in the circumferential direction. This error (play) is smaller than the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451. As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 has finished rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reverse gear are released. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is brought into contact with the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the locking projection 453e (see FIG. 12) of the reversing gear 453 and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) are fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. The attitude is also maintained.

  Next, the operation of the claw member 463 of the meniscal member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A and 26B are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 400. FIG.

  In FIG. 26, the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted, and the limited rack gear 414b is visible and the portion is enlarged. FIG. 26A shows a state immediately before the start gear tooth 441a of the deformed gear 441 contacts the start gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26B shows the state in which the slide rack 442 moves. The state of reaching the end is illustrated.

  The meshing between the deformed gear teeth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective when the deformed gear 441 is not in contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 is in contact with the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the start gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the start gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, a good mesh is achieved. On the other hand, for example, when the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the start gear teeth 441a and the start gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are brought into contact with each other, a mesh failure occurs in the middle of the engagement. The rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, the slide movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, so that the slide member 420 malfunctions.

  In the present embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained laterally outward by the biasing force of the biasing spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives a force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443. Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the appropriate posture described above.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the deformed gear 441 is engaged with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, whereby the transmission gear 443 is rotated and the slide rack 442 is moved. The slide rack 442 contacts the drive lever 467 during the movement, and the drive lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the meniscus member 460, the center gear 462 rotates when the drive lever 467 rotates. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in a protruding direction. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420.

  Next, the combined operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the notched portion 422d of the transmitted leg 422 is disposed to face the front side of the drive gear 473 in a state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position. In the combined operation unit 2400, the notch portion 2422 d of the transmitted leg portion 2422 is opposed to the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  27 and 28 are front views of the pair of slide members 2420. FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 28 illustrates the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start of the second gear group 450 when the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position. A state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) starts to come into contact is illustrated. Further, the illustration of the driving device 470 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side in FIG. 27) covers the front side in the tooth width direction of the rack gear 422a. The front side wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at positions where the start gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the start gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) of the reverse gear 453 start to abut. In the state, the notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side of the drive gear 473 (front side in FIG. 27). The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being separated from the outer shape of the notch portion 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 2422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 2422, so that the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410. Therefore, maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the specific phase position is set in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23A) of the second gear group 450 start to contact each other. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when the slide member 2420 is moved.

  That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24A) is always meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. Therefore, if the rotation resistance of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as the movement resistance of the slide member 2420. Here, since the transmission gear 451 is meshed with the two-layer gear 452, resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451. Then, since the resistance of rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. Thereby, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increasing.

  Here, at the specific phase position, the front side wall portion 2422c does not overlap with the drive gear 473, so that the effect of suppressing the wobbling at the time of rotation of the drive gear 473 by abutting the front side wall portion 2422c with the drive gear 473 is weakened.

  In the present embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed while the pair of slide members 2420 are moving, that is, while the drive gear 473 is rotating. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 reaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotation direction (axial vertical direction). Therefore, the wobble of the drive gear 473 that tends to occur at the specific phase position can be mitigated by the momentum of the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction.

  The base member 2410 includes a triangular protrusion 2415 that protrudes toward the center side (center side in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to the specific phase position by using the triangular protrusion 2415.

  Here, in the maintenance of the gaming machine 13, when the drive motor 472 is removed together with the drive gear 473, the slide member 2420 needs to be arranged at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side so as to hide the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually recognize the state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473 from the front side. is there. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange the slide member 2420 at the specific phase position.

  On the other hand, since the triangular protrusion 2415 is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized from the front side, it is possible to easily perform the alignment of the slide member 2410 by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 for maintenance. In the present embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at a specific phase position, the triangular protrusion 2415 and the triangular pattern formed on the end of the slide member 2420 form a series of patterns. Thereby, it can be made easy for the maintenance worker to remove the drive gear 473 and perform maintenance.

  Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large in the rotational axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. The two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment are formed in a large size in the axial direction while the starter gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed in the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction. That is, the tooth width is formed large. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 29A is a front view of the two-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29B is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29C is a side view of the two-layer gear 3452. .

  As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 is disposed adjacent to the sliding wall 452d and has a start gear tooth 3452b1 formed with a large tooth width, and a tooth base side of the start gear tooth 3452b1. A circumferential rib 3452e extending from a circumferential side surface along a concentric circle of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1, the starting gear; A radial rib 3452f that mainly extends from the radial side surface of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body portion of the double-layer gear 3452 is mainly provided.

  The starting gear teeth 3442b1 have substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, but have a larger tooth width than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved, and the starter gear teeth 3452b1 can be prevented from being damaged at the start of meshing with the reversing gear 3453.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is formed to be the widest in the axial direction of the double-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the start gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extended base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the start gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the double-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starter gear teeth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

  Further, the circumferential rib 3452e extends to the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 (up to two adjacent to the starter gear teeth 3452b1 in this embodiment). Accordingly, it is possible to generate a force that pulls the tooth base of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the start gear tooth 3452b1 by using the circumferential rib 3452e.

  That is, when the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and the reverse gear 3453 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 mesh with each other, deformation (deformation toward the direction away from the starter gear teeth 3352b1) that occurs in the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 is caused by the circumferential rib 3452e. Can be suppressed.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only to the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starter gear teeth 3452b1 because the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 located away from the starter gear teeth 3452b1 are reversed after the rotation is in a steady state. By meshing with the gear 3453.

  That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starter gear teeth 3352b1) distant from the starter gear tooth 3352b1 is meshed with the reverse gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. The reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. For this reason, the force received by the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 from the reversing gear 3453 is small, and the reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

  Since the radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the start gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the double-layer gear 3452, the start gear tooth The rigidity in the radial direction of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reversing gear 3453 meshed with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction, and the back end (the upper end in FIG. 29 (b)) of the starting gear tooth 3442b1 is forced toward the rotating shaft. Even if it is received, it is possible to prevent the starter gear tooth 3452b1 from falling down. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the starter gear teeth 3452b1.

  30A is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30B is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30C is a side view of the reversing gear 3453.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circle of the reversing gear 3453 from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the side surface on the base side of the starting gear tooth 3453b1. And a circumferential rib 3453f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453.

  The start gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth width and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, while the tooth width is larger than that of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the start gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

  The circumferential rib 3453f is formed to be the widest in the axial direction at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extended base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 30B, it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from being bent in the rotational direction.

  Further, the circumferential rib 3453f extends toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starter gear tooth 3453b1. As a result, the rigidity of the starter gear teeth 3453b1 with respect to the direction in which force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starter gear teeth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging projection receiving portion 453d) is improved. Therefore, the durability of the starter gear teeth 3453b1 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 are formed large in the rotational axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased is described. The double-layer gear 4452 has the start gear teeth 4442b1 formed in the same shape as the other gear teeth in the direction of the rotation axis, while having a large tooth width, and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 sandwiched between the start gear teeth 4452b1. The tooth width is formed in such a manner that the tooth width is further shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4442b1 increases. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the two-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31B is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31C is XXXIc-XXXXIc of FIG. 31B. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a two-layer gear 4452 in line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the double-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starter gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d, intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 formed between the starter gear teeth 4452b1, and a starter gear. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 4452e that covers the front side surfaces of the teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the tooth width of the divided gear tooth 4452b composed of the start gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the maximum in the start gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is started. As the distance from the gear teeth 4452b1 increases, the gear teeth 4452b1 are shortened in a stepped manner with reference to the starter gear teeth 4452b1.

  The plate-like portion 4452e is formed so as to project from the tooth bottom side of the divided gear teeth 4452b to a position equivalent to the tooth tip circle in a front view, and is covered on the front side surface of the divided gear teeth 4452b. The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a mode in which a smooth curve is drawn in a bottom view in accordance with the formation position of the front side surface of the divided gear teeth 4452b (see FIG. 31B).

  Here, a case is considered where the front side surface of the split gear teeth 4452b is formed on the same plane, and the plate-like portion 4452e is also formed on the plane. In this case, the disk portion 452c and the plate-like portion 4552e are used to increase the permissible amount of displacement of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 4452 at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452. Is increased, the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453 cannot be determined. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 during rotation, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, so that the reversing gear 4453 becomes the outer periphery of the plate-shaped portion 4453e. Contact with the surface may result in poor meshing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the misalignment in the axial direction (upward in FIG. 31 (b)) that may occur before the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the double-layer gear 4452 is detected as the meshing start position. It is possible to tolerate as much as possible in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 4452b1.

  Further, the plate-like portion 4452e is formed in such a manner as to draw a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-like portion 4552e is separated from the starting gear teeth 4452b1 in a bottom view (see FIG. 31B). For this reason, the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-like portion 4552e, so that the position of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction can be largely corrected as the meshing proceeds (moving downward in FIG. 31 (b)). Is possible). Therefore, the positional deviation in the axial direction at the time of meshing between the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

  32A is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32B is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. 32C is a view in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32A. 14 is a partial side view of a reversing gear 4453. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 includes a pair of starter gear teeth 4453b1 disposed adjacent to the pair of arcuate recesses 453c, and an intermediate formed between the starter gear teeth 4453b1. Gear teeth 4453b2.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, the reversing gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the tooth width of the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is maximized, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4453b1 increases. . The degree of shortening (inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of the gear teeth in FIG. 32B) is the degree of shortening of the tooth width of the split gear teeth 4452b of the double-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31B). (Gradient of the line connecting the upper ends of the two).

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 are end faces in the width direction except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging projection receiving portions 453d. (FIG. 32 (b) upper end surface) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engagement protrusion receiving portion side. As a result, the displacement can be corrected more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of relative displacement in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452.

  That is, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 are meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are on the engagement protrusion receiving portion side (the tooth width is the shortest side, FIG. 32C). Start meshing from the right). Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the dimension in the tooth width direction of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 is constant on the tooth width longest side (left side in FIG. 32 (c)), A large space (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be secured. Therefore, a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the meshing between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 proceeds, the longest tooth width side (the left side in FIG. 32 (c)) of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 It enters into the back side of plate-like part 4452e (the lower part of Drawing 31 (b)). Thereby, for example, compared with the case where the dimension in the tooth width direction of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 is constant on the tooth width shortest side (the right side in FIG. 32 (c)), the meshing is released (the teeth of each other are The distance (play) between the immediately preceding plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be reduced.

  Therefore, when each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 meshes with the two-layer gear 4452, between the start of meshing for each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 until the meshing is released, between the plate-shaped portion 4453e and each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2. The interval (play) can be reduced. This makes it possible to correct the misalignment between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 more rapidly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the plate-like portion 4452e (see FIG. 31B) is formed in the opposite direction to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32C). Further, it is possible to improve the effect of making the correction of the misalignment more abrupt while maintaining a large allowable amount of misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 described above.

  Note that the end face in the width direction (upper end face in FIG. 32 (b)) of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging projection receiving parts 453d is formed by a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reversing gear 4453. The

  Next, the second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed of only a single resin material has been described. However, the two-layer gear 5452 in the fifth embodiment has a magnetic material embedded in the starter gear teeth 5452b1. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the two-layer gear 5452. As shown in FIG. 33, in the double-layer gear 5452, an embedding hole 5452g is formed in the starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

  The embedded hole 5452g is formed in a bottomed hole shape having a circular cross section, and the embedded member 5452h is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter that is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedded hole 5452g. As a result, the embedded member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedded hole 5452g.

  The embedded member 5452h is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two parts along a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black side of the embedded member 5452h is formed with the N pole, and the opposite side is formed with the S pole.

  FIG. 34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 34 shows a state immediately before the starting gear teeth 5542b1 of the double-layer gear 5252 abuts on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. In addition, the disk portion 452c and gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the reversing gear 5453, an embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. Thereby, the embedded member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedded hole 5453f.

  The embedded member 5453g is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two parts in a plane along the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that divides the magnetic pole into two is formed along the radial direction and passes through the axis, and the starter gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 are embedded with the opposite poles facing each other. That is, the starter gear tooth 5453b1 is formed with an N pole on the side (upper side in FIG. 34) facing the starter gear tooth 5453b1 when engaged, and the starter gear tooth 5453b1 is on the side (lower side in FIG. 34) facing the starter gear tooth 5252b1. S pole is formed on the side). Thereby, in the meshing of the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453, a magnetic force that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 is generated.

  That is, as the double-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. 34, the distance between the embedding members 5452h and 5453g is shortened, so that the magnetic force generated between them increases, and the start gear teeth 5453b1 Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 and the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the start gear teeth 5452b1 are in contact with the reversing gear 5453 in the stationary state, the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of contact can be reduced.

  FIG. 35 is a partial front view of second gear group 5450. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. In addition, the disk portion 452c and gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5453 in the rotation direction. As a result, the load applied to the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d not only when the contact between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 is started but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 are rotated by meshing. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d can be improved.

  Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described. However, the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment omits the starting gear teeth 452b1 and is different from the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. The body is provided with a deformed gear tooth member 6452g. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear 6452. FIG. 36 shows a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disc portion 452c. In the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material such as iron, so that it is a portion other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g of the two-layer gear 6452 and a portion integrally formed from a resin material. Thus, the rigidity of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is increased. Further, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is formed of a metal material, and the driving force necessary to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the double-layer gear 6452 includes a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452g, a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is inserted, and a hole 6452c1 formed in the disc portion 452c. A gear tooth side notch 6452b5 that is a notch formed between the first recess 452b3 and the second recess 452b4 and into which the gear tooth main body 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and a sliding wall 452d. The sliding part notch 6452d1 between which the sliding receiving part 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched and the flanges formed in the L-shaped saddle shape at both ends of the sliding wall part 452d The mold receiving part 6452d2 is mainly provided.

  The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 having a shape obtained by extending the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment toward the tooth bottom side, and a back surface from an end opposite to the tooth tip of the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1. A cylindrical insertion pin 6452g2 projecting on the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 6452g4 that connects the receiving portion 6452g3.

  The gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is formed such that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the dimension of the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Thus, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

  The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed in a state where the outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed opposite the recessed bottom wall portion 452e in an assembled state (see FIG. 37) with a slight gap.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted through the insertion hole 6452c1, and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4 with a slight gap, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is in contact with the saddle-shaped receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the rotation amount of rotation about the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed by the gear tooth main body 6452g1 coming into contact with the reversing gear 453.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the double-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453. In FIG. 37, a state in which the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 is illustrated, and the disk portion 452c is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the load applied by the deformed gear tooth member 6452g from the reversing gear 453 can be received by the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453.

  That is, even if the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed from a metal material, the portion that supports the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed from a resin material. In addition, the two-layer gear 6452 is not sufficiently rigid because the radial thickness is formed to be substantially constant in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1) due to a load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453 come into contact with each other, a pressing force is applied from the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (such as the hollow bottom wall 452e) receiving the damage may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g starts to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the coupling portion 6452g4 and the hollow bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as an axis). When the rotation starts, the slide receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reverse gear 453. The arc-shaped recess 453c is a portion having a sufficient radial thickness and a large rigidity.

  As a result, the load applied by the deformed gear tooth member 6452g from the reversing gear 453 can be received by the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, and is a portion of the double-layer gear 6452 and other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. The load applied to the portion (the bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Further, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can be supported using the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates is limited to one way. However, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to rotate the meniscus member 460. The slide member 420 can be formed in at least two positions. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38A to FIG. 38C are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452. FIG. 38A shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. 38B shows a first rotation in which the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is lower than the boundary speed Vb. A state in which the speed is V1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38C, a state in which the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb is illustrated.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. The same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the boundary speed Vb means the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 when the protruding gear member 7452e is switched from the immersive state to the overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d that is a groove having a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotation shaft, and a width that is slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. And a projecting gear member 7452e whose tip is formed in a gear tooth shape, and a biasing spring 7452f that couples the projecting gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

  The guide groove 7452d is formed at three locations by arranging the outer periphery of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and a protruding gear member 7452e and a biasing spring 7452f are provided in each guide groove 7452d. Further, intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the double-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

  In the protruding gear member 7452e, the protruding gear members 7452e1 to 7451e3 are formed with the same mass, and the urging springs 7452f are formed with the same spring constant.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when the two-layer gear 7452 is in a stopped state, the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed closer to the rotating shaft than the surface where the bottoms of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. At this time, the incorrect spring 7452f has a natural length.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Force to do. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is positioned closer to the rotating shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (immersion state).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotational speed V1, the double-layer gear 7453 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). In other words, the two-layer gear 7452 rotates idly with respect to the reverse gear 7453.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Force to do. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is overhanging radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected.

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 abuts on the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39), thereby The layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reverse gear 7453.

  That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) depending on whether the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. You can choose. Therefore, the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40) is obtained by changing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 during the rotation (by changing the moving speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) during the movement). A plurality of variations of the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the is rotated can be prepared.

  Next, variations in the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 begins to rotate will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. First, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, the case where the main drive gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 immediately after the movement member 420 starts to move from the retracted position (first speed pattern) will be described.

  39 (a) to 39 (e) are rear views of the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series, and FIG. 40 (a) and FIG. 40 (b), FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 41 (b) are front views of the composite operation unit 7400 that illustrates the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscal member 460 in time series. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown in FIG. 39, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown in FIGS. 40 and 41.

  39 (a) and FIG. 40 (a), FIG. 39 (b) and FIG. 40 (b), FIG. 39 (c) and FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 39 (d) and FIG. 41 (b). Are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which correspond to each other. Also, in FIG. 39, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is shown by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 39, the arc-shaped recess 453c is circumscribed by a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452. It is formed in the mode.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40A), and the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. The first protruding gear member 7452e1 is brought into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B). Thereby, the reverse gear 7453 starts to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture (see FIG. 40B).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7453 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, whereby the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 is performed. Is continued (see FIG. 39 (c) and FIG. 41 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the two-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again re-layered. (See FIG. 39D), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41B).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39E). Thereafter, the projecting gear member 7452e is moved inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

  Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 39D to the state shown in FIG. 39E, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d. There is a risk that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 will mesh again.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (the upper end in FIG. 39 (e)) of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d.

  When the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a force directed to the inner side in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1. Thereby, before the 3rd protrusion member 7452e3 and the 1st protrusion member 7452e1 mesh | engage with the inversion gear 745, the 3rd protrusion member 7452e3 and the 1st protrusion member 7452e1 can be made into an immersion state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 from meshing again.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated second during the rotation. A case (second speed pattern) in which rotation is performed at the speed V2 (the rotation speed V is changed) will be described.

  42 (a) to 42 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series, and FIG. 43 (a) and FIG. 43 (b), FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 44 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 that illustrates the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscal member 460 in time series. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown in FIG. 42, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

  42 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 42 (b) and 43 (a), 42 (c) and 43 (b), 42 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIG. 42 (e) and FIG. 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which correspond to each other. In FIG. 42, the rotation direction of the double-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the arc-shaped recess 453c is a circle formed by connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452. Formed in a circumscribed manner.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)). Form.

  Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, and therefore the meshing between the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 is It is not started (see FIG. 42B). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 until the second-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. Is done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42C), and the reversing gear 7453 is rotated by the second protruding gear member 7452e2 coming into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d. At the same time, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture (see FIG. 43B).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7453 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, whereby the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 is performed. (See FIG. 42D and FIG. 44A).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the two-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again re-layered. (See FIG. 42E), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44B).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

  Since the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are proportional, it is easy to change the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 by changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 472. Can be done.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed at least in two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. be able to. That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the first rotation speed V1 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 during the rotation. When changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscal member 460 rotates can be moved to the center side (vertical center side) (FIG. 40B and FIG. 43 (b)). Thereby, the variation of production can be increased.

  Next, representative examples of the first speed pattern and the second speed pattern described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a graph showing changes in the speed of the two-layer gear 7452. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the slide of the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451 that is rotated during movement is shown.

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 45, the first position P1 means a position (see FIG. 39B) where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453, and the second position P2 is , The second protruding gear member 7452e2 is the position where the first reverse gear 7453 is opposed to the first position (FIG. 42C). The solid line indicates the first speed pattern described above, and the broken line indicates the second speed pattern described above. Indicated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first speed pattern, the posture of the half moon member 460 starts to change immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, by changing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 during the sliding movement of the sliding member 420, the position of the sliding member 420 when the posture of the meniscus member 460 starts to change can be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460 can be increased.

  Next, the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 is changed when the half-moon member 460 is rotated by changing the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 in the middle of the rotation has been described. The combined operation unit 8400 is formed such that the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates can be changed while the rotation speed of the double-layer gear 8452 is maintained at a constant speed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452. FIG. 46A shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, and FIG. 46B shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4. Is done. The stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as that in FIG.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. The same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the separation rotation speed V3 means a rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms an immersive state while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state, and the joint rotation speed V4 means the first rotation speed V4. It means a rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7451e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 together form an overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the protruding gear members 7452e are moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8252 with different overhang amounts. (At least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a larger movement amount than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

  In the present embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotation shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are different from each other. That is, the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1 that connects the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the first that connects the second projecting gear member 7452e2 and the rotation shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. It is made larger than the spring constant of the 2 biasing springs 8452f2. Note that the spring constant of the third biasing spring 8452f3 is larger than the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Then, the second projecting gear member 7452e2 projects outward in the radial direction from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (extended state).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the double-layer gear 8252 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 in the first protruding gear member 7452e1, but the second protruding gear. The member 7452e2 meshes with the reverse gear 7453.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, a force is generated to move the protruding gear member 7452e outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where the force and the urging force by the urging spring 8452f are balanced. In the projecting state, at least the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 are projecting radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (projected state).

  Therefore, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the first projecting gear member 7252e1 of the projecting gear member 7451e of the two-layer gear 8452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453, whereby the two-layer gear 7452 is obtained. Begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453.

  The operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the common rotation speed V4 are the same as the operations illustrated in FIGS. Description is omitted.

  47 (a) to 47 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series. In the description of FIG. 47, FIGS. 40, 43, and 44 are referred to as appropriate, and in FIG. 47, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown for easy understanding.

  Note that FIG. 47 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 47 (b) and 43 (a), 47 (c) and 43 (b), FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. ), And FIGS. 47 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, which are in correspondence with each other. In FIG. 47, the rotation directions of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 are illustrated by arrows, and the arc-shaped recess 453c is connected to the teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to be circumscribed by a circle.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), so that the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is in the immersed state. And the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state.

  Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 47 (b)). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The double-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separation rotational speed V3, the second projecting gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the meniscal member 460 is in the posture. It starts to change (see FIG. 43 (b)).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 continues and the posture change of the half-moon member 460 Is continued (see FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. 44 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are engaged with each other, the two-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again formed by the two-layer gear 8452. (See FIG. 47E), the rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44B).

  Thereafter, the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed at least in two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, the speed change during the slide movement of the slide member 420 is not required.

  That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the joint rotation speed V4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the separation rotation speed V3 (FIG. 43). 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates can be moved to the center side (vertical center side) (see FIG. 40B and FIG. 43B). Thereby, the variation of production can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the separation rotational speed V3 and the joint rotational speed V4 described above will be described as a graph. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451. 48, the horizontal axis represents the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis represents the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7451 rotated during the sliding movement is shown.

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means a position (see FIG. 39B) where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453, and the second position P2 is The second projecting gear member 7452e2 is a position where the second projecting gear member 7452e2 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (refer to FIG. 42C).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the posture of the half moon member 460 starts immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, if two types of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during the movement is set. The position of can be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460 can be increased.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the claw member 463 of the meniscal member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locking pin is disposed in a rotational locus in which the driving lever 467 is rotated by the rotation of the meniscal member 460, and the meniscal member 460, the driving lever, and the like are blocked by the locking pin. A mode in which a difference in rotation angle is generated during the movement of the claw member 463 may be employed. In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be interlocked.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the notch 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be cut out in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch 422d can be improved and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the shape of the drive gear 473 connected to the tooth tips is substantially circular has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive gear 473 may be divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the gear teeth may be different for each of the divided portions. In this case, by attaching the drive gear 473 with the gear teeth having a short tooth portion directed toward the transmitted leg 422, the size required for the notch 422d of the transmitted leg 422 in order to pass the drive gear 473. The thickness can be reduced. On the other hand, the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg 422 can be ensured at the portion where the gear teeth have long teeth. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is attached / detached through the notch portions 422d formed in the pair of the transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the notched portion 422d is not formed in the transmitted leg portion 422, and the transmitted leg portion 422 may be formed to be movable in a direction away from each other (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction). In this case, the drive gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 are arranged close to each other, while the drive gear 473 is removable when the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 are arranged at a distance. can do.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the embedded member 5452h formed of a magnetic material is embedded in the embedded hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which the periphery of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 is covered with a magnetic material may be used. Accordingly, since the magnetic material can be disposed outside the starter gear teeth 5542b1, the interval between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be reduced, and the engagement between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 is started. Magnetic force can be made stronger.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reversing gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the embedding member 5453g may be embedded. In this case, the embedding members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedding member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedding member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 are repelled, thereby reversing the two-layer gear 5452. The impact at the time of contact of the gear 5453 can be reduced. That is, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated away from the starting gear teeth 5452b1 by the repulsive magnetic force before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the starter gear teeth 5452b1.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal to each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding gear members 7452e may be formed with different masses, and the spring constant of the biasing spring 7452f that biases the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed larger. Thereby, the difference in how the protruding gear member 7452e protrudes due to the size of the mass can be mitigated by the magnitude of the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reversing gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the double-layer gears 7451 and 8452. In this case, the reversing gear 7453 can be separated from the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 to form a state in which the reversing gear 7453 is not in contact with each other. It can be. Therefore, even when the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not necessary, the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may be capable of forming a first state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are not engaged and a second state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are engaged. In this case, in the first state, the driving force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452, while in the second state, the driving force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452. Therefore, even when the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not necessary, the timing at which the reversing gear 7453 starts to operate can be changed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal and the spring constants of the biasing springs 8252f are different from each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f may be the same, and the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e may be different. As a result, it is possible to adjust the amount of protrusion of each projecting gear member 7452e more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is pivotally supported at one point on the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of pins protrude from the end of a shaft support member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions into which a plurality of pins are fitted to the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 are formed. In addition, the shaft support member and the drive gear 473 may be engaged at a plurality of points. In this case, since the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pin being hooked on the drive gear 473 in the rotation direction, the fit between the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins is formed loosely. can do.

  As a result, the force required to separate the drive motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front side wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed or excessive stress is applied to the drive motor 472. It can be prevented from being added.

<First control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 121. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above embodiments, and illustration and description thereof are omitted. This control example is different from the above-described embodiments in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of a big win, and is different in that the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of a big win. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present control example, the configuration is such that the ball restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of the big win. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the big hit type, Whether or not the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one big hit. Thereby, the variation of a game will increase and the interest of a player can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described. FIG. 49A is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49B is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650. Further, FIG. 52 is a front view and a side sectional view of the specific winning device 650. 52 shows a state where the front cover body 651 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. The front cover body 651 and the back cover body 655 are fastened by screws from the back side of the base member 652, respectively. The front cover body 651 is on the front side of the base member 652, and the back cover body 655 is on the back side of the base member 652. It is fit to become. Thereby, an area where the game ball can flow down is formed inside the specific winning device 650. The base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by the router. Thereby, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13.

  Although details will be described later, the specific winning device 650 includes a plurality of sensors that detect that the game ball has flowed down, and based on the detection results of these sensors, Is configured to change.

  Details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view in which the specific winning device 650 is disassembled into a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view in which the specific winning device 650 is disassembled in the same manner as FIG. FIG. 52A is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, and FIG. 52B is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52A, and FIG. These are sectional drawings in the LIIc-LIIc line | wire of Fig.52 (a).

  The front cover body 651 includes a front cover and an outer wall portion erected from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light transmissive material in a box shape in which one side (the back side in FIG. 50) is opened. In addition, an opening having a width that allows a game ball to flow down is provided in the upper right portion and the left central portion of the outer wall portion. Thereby, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted together, the opening on the right upper side becomes the entrance 651a through which the game ball can flow into the specific winning device 650, and the opening on the left center is The game ball inside the specific winning device 650 becomes an outlet 652c that can flow down to the outside. In addition, a guide wall is formed from the opening on the right side to the center, and a game ball that has entered the entrance 651a is guided to a first specific winning opening 650a described later. An inlet sensor 900a is disposed at the inlet portion 651a, and an outlet sensor 900c is disposed at the outlet portion 652c, so that a game ball that has passed through each can be detected.

  The base member 652 has an upper portion provided with a second winning opening, a lower right portion having a first specific winning opening 650a, and a lower left portion having a second specific winning opening 650b protruding from the front and rear sides. ing. A first entry sensor 652a and a second entry sensor 652b are respectively disposed above the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, and the entry to each specific winning opening is detected. Is done. An entrance restriction plate 654 slidable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided above the first entrance sensor 652a and the second entrance sensor 652b. By sliding the ball entry restricting plate, the game ball can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter the ball in the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b.

  A bypass flow path 653 is provided in the vicinity of the upper portion of the ball restricting plate 654 and between the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b. The game ball that has entered the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down to the upper side of the first specific winning port 650a and before the detour channel 653. Here, when the entrance restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a, while the entry restriction plate 654 is closed. When it is slid forward, the game ball flows down to the detour channel 653. A bypass sensor 900b is provided at the upstream inlet 653a of the bypass channel 653 so that a passing game ball can be detected.

  The game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 flows down to the upper side of the second specific winning port 650b and before the outlet 652c. Here, when the entrance restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b, while the entry restriction plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down from the exit portion 652c to the outside of the specific winning device 650.

  Here, both the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b are paid out based on winning. In other words, even a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 650 at the timing when the ball restricting plate 654 is closed and has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a has entered after the bypass passage 653 has passed. If it is time to open the ball restricting plate 654, the player enters the second specific winning port 650b and pays out the winning ball based on the winning. Therefore, the payout of the winning ball can be easily performed based on the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650.

  The bypass flow path 653 is formed on the front side and the back side of the base member 652 so that the game balls meander and flow down. Thereby, compared with the case where the game ball is formed to flow down without meandering, the length of the path through which the detour channel flows down can be increased, so that the time for the game ball to flow down the detour channel can be lengthened. Therefore, even when the timing at which the entrance restriction plate 654 opens is late, it is possible for the game ball that has passed through the detour channel 653 to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  Although details will be described later, by determining the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 654 according to the time that the game ball passes through the detour path 653, the game ball that has passed through the detour flow path 653 is allowed to enter the second specific prize opening 650b. An opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball and an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to enter the ball can be determined. In addition, if the path length of the detour path 653 can be adjusted, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball that has passed through the detour path 653 can easily enter the second specific winning port 650b. Note that the passing time of the detour path 653 is not limited to the path length, and may be adjusted by changing the friction coefficient of the road surface on which the game ball flows down (for example, using a material that does not slip easily).

  A protrusion 652d is formed on the upper part of the second winning opening 640, and an electric accessory 640a is disposed on the left and right. As a result, a game ball can enter the second winning port 640 only when the electric accessory 640a is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make it possible to enter the second prize opening 640 even when the electric accessory 640a is not opened without forming the protrusion 652d.

  The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge passage through which the game balls that have entered the second winning port 640, the first specific winning port 650a, and the second specific winning port 650b described above flow down, and the electric accessory 640a. And a variable solenoid 670 for changing the ball entry restricting plate 654 are provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 53B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol may be displayed with a symbol and the like attached together with a number.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “Large A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, which is an odd number, are added are aligned. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in this control example, there is an SW effect or background change effect that suggests (notices) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place. In this case, the display area where the variable display is performed may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee stick in this control example) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the opening / closing pattern of the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the entrance timing of the game ball will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic view schematically showing the entrance timing in the opening / closing operation of the entrance restriction plate 654. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open / closed state of the ball entry restriction plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing at which the launched game ball enters the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650, The lower row shows the timing at which a game ball that has flowed down to the detour channel without entering the first specific winning port 650a finishes flowing down the detour channel.

  The timing at which the entry restriction plate 654 is open is the timing at which the launched game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a (first entry timing). On the other hand, the timing at which the entry restriction version 654 is closed is the timing at which the launched game ball does not enter the first specific prize opening 650a, and the game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 has the second specific prize opening 650b. There is a timing of entering the ball (second entry timing) and a timing (outlet passage timing) of flowing out from the exit 652c without entering the second specific winning port 650b.

  The second entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the entry restriction plate 654 is open at the timing when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour path 653. In FIG. 54, the second entry timing is reached after the first entry timing elapses, and the game ball launched at this timing does not enter the first specific winning opening 650a, and passes through the bypass flow path 653. It will flow down. Thereafter, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, the ball entry restriction plate 654 is opened, so that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second entrance timing has elapsed, when the game ball finishes flowing down the bypass flow path 653, the entrance restriction plate 654 is not at the opening timing (that is, closed). Does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c.

  In this way, whether or not a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a wins the second specific winning opening 650b can be determined by the opening / closing timing of the winning restriction plate 654.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an opening / closing pattern of the winning restriction plate 654 in this control example will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening / closing pattern A in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a can easily win the second specific winning opening 650b. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening / closing pattern B in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning port 650a is unlikely to win the second specific winning port 650b.

  As will be described in detail later, this opening / closing pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In this control example, the open / close pattern is selected based on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the open / close pattern may be selected regardless of the jackpot type. Thereby, even in the same jackpot type, the game value that can be acquired by the player is changed by the opening / closing pattern, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The upper, middle, and lower stages of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) show the same timing as that of FIG. 54, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the opening / closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55 (a), one out of two game balls fired at regular intervals enters when the winning restriction plate 654 is open, and the other one wins. When the restriction plate 654 is closed, it is opened and closed so as to enter the ball. Here, as shown in the figure, the detoured game ball enters the second specific winning port 650b because the winning restriction plate 654 is in the open state when it has flowed down the detour channel 653.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55 (b), one out of two game balls fired at regular intervals enters the specific winning device 650 at the timing when the winning restriction plate 654 is opened. The same is true. However, compared to the opening / closing pattern A, the timing at which the ball entry restriction plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first ball of the detoured game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653 is as shown in the figure. Since the ball restricting plate 654 is in the closed state, the ball does not enter the second specific winning port 650b. Therefore, compared to the opening / closing pattern A, the opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the specific winning opening.

  It should be noted that the opening / closing timing of the ball entry restriction plate 654 may be appropriately set without being limited to the above-described opening / closing pattern. For example, all the game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 650a may be set to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, or all enter the second specific winning opening 650b. You may set so that it may not do (namely, all pass the exit part 652c). In addition, the opening / closing timing of the ball restricting plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape and total length of the detour channel (required time required for the game ball to pass).

  Furthermore, a plurality of detour paths having different times for the game balls to pass may be provided, and game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 650a may be distributed to those detour paths. For example, a detour route that allows a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning port 650a to enter the second specific winning port 650b and a detour route that is difficult to enter may be provided. Thereby, even if the opening / closing pattern is the same, since the ease of entering the ball can be changed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in order to restrict the entry to the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, the single entry restricting plate 654 is used. An entrance restriction plate for restricting entry of the ball may be provided individually. Thereby, the variation which regulates the entrance into each specific winning opening can be increased, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the ball entry to the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b, which are part of the specific winning port, is restricted by the ball restricting plate 654 in the specific winning device 650. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b, the second winning port 640 may be provided, or the general winning port 63 may be provided. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 and an effect display during the jackpot game based on the detection results will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing detection timings of various sensors and contents of effect display based on the detection results. 57 to 59 are schematic views illustrating the contents of each effect display.

  When the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650 after the big hit game is started, the ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first ball entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). Thereby, the effect based on the first game ball (first effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57A). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown in the lowermost row.

  Next, when the entrance of the second ball and the third ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a while the appearance effect is displayed (when the second ball entrance sensor is detected in FIG. 56, the third ball entrance sensor is detected). An effect based on the second and third game balls (second ball effect and third ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance number effect is displayed based on the respective detection results. With the appearance number effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), a cat pattern indicating the number of cat appearances is displayed in the lower right part. The number of appearances in the cat indicates the number of suspensions of the effect. When the effect based on the first game ball is completed, the number of appearances in the cat is reduced by 1 and the effect based on the second game ball is executed. Will be.

  When the detour sensor 900b detects that the first game ball has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a and has passed through the detour entrance 653a of the detour channel 653 (at the time of detour sensor detection in FIG. 56) ) The effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57B). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens as shown in the lowermost row. With this special effect screen, an effect based on the first game ball (runaway effect) can be displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect based on the second game ball (appearance effect) can be displayed on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57 (b)).

  After that, when the second game ball has entered the first specific prize opening 650a, the appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen is detected as a capture effect when detected by the first ball sensor 652a. (See FIG. 58 (a)). When this capture effect ends, an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

  Next, when the first game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653 and enters the second specific winning port 650b, the first game on the left side of the screen is detected by the second ball entry sensor 652b. The escape effect based on the sphere is changed to a recapture effect (see FIG. 58B). When this recapture effect ends, there is no effect to be displayed on the left side of the screen, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom, and an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed. Will be.

  On the other hand, when the first game ball finishes flowing down the bypass flow path 653 and does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c, the exit sensor 900c detects 1 on the left side of the screen. The runaway effect based on the game ball is changed to a capture failure effect (see FIG. 59A). When this capture failure effect ends, the effect to be displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in FIG. 58 (b) described above, so the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59B, a case where a capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described. FIG. 59B is an effect display that is displayed when the first game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a in the case where the above-described FIG. 57A is displayed. As described above, when there is a game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 and a game ball between the inlet 651a and the detour channel 653, an effect based on each game ball is displayed on the special effect screen. Visible at the same time. On the other hand, when there is a game ball in only one of them, an effect based on the corresponding game ball is displayed on the normal effect screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the display content of the accessory-linked effect will be described. 60 and 61 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical accessory 340. FIG.

  The accessory-linked effect is an effect that is executed during variable display. When this accessory-linked effect is executed, the fluctuation display being executed is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. In addition, the first spherical combination 330 and the second spherical combination 340 are turned on, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) in which PUSH characters are circled is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60A). . The PUSH picture displayed on the upper left moves to the lower right, and the PUSH picture displayed on the upper right moves to the lower left (FIG. 60 (b)).

  Then, the two PUSH symbols are moved so as to overlap each other at the center of the screen (see FIG. 61A), and at the timing when the two PUSH symbols are completely overlapped, the first spherical feature 330 and the second spherical symbol are displayed. The object 340 is turned off, and a gauge indicating the button press remaining time is displayed at the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61 (b)). Here, the first spherical combination 330 and the second spherical combination include a first spherical cover body (330a, 330b) and a second spherical cover body (340a, 340b), respectively. At the timing when the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are turned off, the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are moved to a position that covers the front portion of the spherical accessory. These spherical cover bodies are movable by a first accessory motor 330c and a second accessory motor 340c (not shown).

  Next, background interlocking effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the background interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  In this control example, a display that suggests the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen as part of the background display. Specifically, background levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, and “level 4” are displayed in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81. The background level of “level 1” is a display that suggests that the expectation level for jackpot is the lowest, and the background level of “level 4” is a display that indicates the expectation level for jackpot is the highest. This background level is changed during variation display or at the start of variation, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Detailed description will be given later.

  Here, a case where the background level is changed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. When the background level is “level 1”, the symbols in the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the characters “continuation level 2” are displayed in the center (see FIG. 62A). Thereafter, the variable display is started again, and the background level is changed to “level 2” (see FIG. 62B). Here, the case where the background level is changed from “level 1” to “level 2” has been described, but there are also cases where “level 1” is changed to “level 3” or “level 4” during the display of 1 variation. is there.

  Next, a case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 62B described above, after the background level is changed to “level 2”, the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 63A). Thereafter, the next variable display is started, and the characters “Level up!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and the background level is changed to “Level 3”.

  As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the 1 fluctuation display as described in FIG. 62. As described in FIG. 63, the changed background level is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation display. Can be used continuously. As a result, even in the display of fluctuation after one fluctuation display in which a display with a high expectation level for a big hit was performed, the expectation level for a big hit can be kept high, so that the player's interest Can be improved.

  Although explanation is omitted in this control example, usually, in the gaming machine, when changing the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations, voice and the like are executed. In such a configuration, notice display modes showing various different expectation levels are displayed, so the player does not know which expectation level should be determined to determine the expectation level for the jackpot, and about the notice display indicating the expectation level There is a problem that you will not be interested, or you will not be able to understand the content of the notice and get bored early in the game. However, in this control example, the background level is displayed as the overall expectation level on the background screen during the special symbol variation display, so that the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, each time a pseudo-stop where the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, the background level is changed, so it can be seen that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the notice of suspected stop. Can play games easily.

  In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is not limited to this, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. You may comprise as follows. Furthermore, not only the overall expectation level is displayed at the background level, but, for example, the expectation level is displayed by changing the color of the third pattern, or a character indicating the overall expectation level is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the clothes pattern, color, etc. may be changed) so as to display the overall expectation.

  Further, in this control example, the background level is not only displayed for the variation, but also displayed when the variation is stopped and the next variation is started. With this configuration, the degree of expectation of the number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be varied. Specifically, when the change display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is executed once, and the change mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make a player play a game while always being aware of the background level.

  In this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when a pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display by a level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed without changing the variation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The display area is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two parts, and the third graphic is independently displayed on each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and the third display is variably displayed in each case). With this configuration, the background level display indicates the degree of expectation according to the contents of the special symbol variation mode (whether or not the temporary stop is varied) and the variation pattern selection mode. Can be switched.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be increased or decreased, or the frequency of decreasing or the amount of decrease may be varied depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. Conversely, the pseudo stop may be more easily executed as the background level becomes lower. Furthermore, a background level may be set in advance in the variation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, which is the same as each control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device (not shown), and third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting at is performed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on a second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform display setting and the like.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 86). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203j set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball corresponding to winning in the first left winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). An area 203a is provided, and in each of these areas, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are matched with the timing of entering the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 86).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at a high probability (a special symbol) that has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9” in the special symbol lottery. , “0-9” is determined to be a big hit. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball has won the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability. Stored. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  In this control example, the jackpot random number stored in the first per random number table for low probability and the jackpot random number stored in the first per random number table for high probability In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the random value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Also, different jackpot types are selected even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same for the jackpot based on the first winning hole 64 and the jackpot based on the second winning hole 640. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case of winning a jackpot based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640, it is easy to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, so that the second winning opening 640 can be selected. It is possible to make the player expect more jackpots based on entering the ball. Here, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening that makes it easy to enter a ball in a short game state to be described later. Therefore, when it shifts to a short-time gaming state, it can be in a more advantageous state for the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. The range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 86) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67 (a)) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for removal, As a variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). The variation pattern table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation pattern contents corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 are included in the variation pattern table 222a. More selected.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interruption process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” much shorter than that when the normal symbol has a low probability, and is further attached to the second prize opening 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released only “one second × two times” when it hits the normal symbol. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 65A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 66 (a)) is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined as described above. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66B) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value for the jackpot A, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value for the jackpot B.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67 (a)) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67 (d)) is defined at least. Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern table or the like in the short-time gaming state is also set.

  With reference to FIG. 67 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 67B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 86), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 84) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , A time reduction / intermediate counter 203f and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the first winning slot 64 or Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the second winning port 640 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is configured to increase the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter for counting. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol M) is less than 4. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S703 in FIG. 83: No).

  The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203e is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The short / medium counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f is set to 100 when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R) at the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in this control example, when the probability variation gaming state is not set after the big hit game, the state is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device will be described. As described above, the input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 constituted by the address bus and the data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, other devices 228, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, an inlet A center 900a, a bypass sensor 900b, an exit sensor 900c, and the like are connected to each other (see FIG. 4).

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the rear image of this control example includes an image that displays a display (level display) that indicates the degree of expectation that is a big hit.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an accessory-linked effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, an SW scenario storage area 222e, In addition, various data and programs necessary for game control are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The accessory-linked effect table 222b is a table that defines the operation pattern of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above-described accessory-linked effect. It is. By setting the operation of the spherical combination and the display effect based on this table, it is possible to execute the combination-linked effect that links the operation of the spherical combination and the display effect. The detailed contents of the accessory-linked effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The open / close pattern storage area 222c defines the relationship between the open / close pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the case of jackpot A, the opening / closing pattern A is selected, and in the case of jackpot B, the opening / closing pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that the jackpot A is in a probable variation state. In addition, as described above, the opening / closing pattern A is more advantageous to the player than the opening / closing pattern B in that a game ball can easily enter the second specific prize opening 650b. Therefore, since the opening / closing pattern A is selected with the jackpot A, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player executes the game with the expectation that the jackpot A will be larger, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The opening / closing pattern B may be selected when the jackpot is A, and the opening / closing pattern A may be selected when the jackpot is B. Further, the selection of the opening / closing pattern may not be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on, for example, a value of an effect counter 223j described later. As a result, even if it is the same jackpot type, the player will be interested in both the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern because it changes whether or not it is advantageous to the player depending on the selected opening / closing pattern. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, the opening / closing pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type and the effect counter described above, or the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern may be further increased. For example, the jackpot type C and the opening / closing pattern C may be increased. .

  The background lottery table 222d defines the background level to be shifted based on the determination result, the current background level, and the value of an effect counter 223j described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The SW scenario storage area 222e is an area that stores an SW scenario that defines a period during which SW depression is valid in the above-mentioned accessory-linked effect. Based on this SW scenario, by controlling the lighting operation of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the frame button 22, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113, and the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked and produced.

  Here, the frame button 22 is lit during the SW valid period based on the SW scenario. When the frame button 22 is turned on, the player can recognize that the SW can be pressed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a big hit valid flag 223e. , First entry flag 223f, second entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, effect counter 223j, opening / closing pattern storage area 223k, round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls on the variable display is added by entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or the main controller 110 changes the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 90). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (Refer to S2102 in FIG. 97). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect is valid (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off 5 seconds after the jackpot game ends. Yes (see S1819 in FIG. 94). When the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on, the jackpot effect based on the detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 in the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 98) (see FIGS. 57 to 59). Will be executed.

  The first incoming flag 223f is turned on when the first incoming command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and processing based on reception of the first incoming command is performed in the jackpot effect processing. It is turned off when it is executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a by the first entry sensor 650a. When the first ball entry flag 223f is turned on, a display capture command is displayed from the sound lamp controller 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the first ball sensor 650a of the main controller 110. Can be sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the capture command for display, the display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the capture effect (see FIG. 58A) on the third symbol display device.

  The second pitch flag 223g is turned on when a second pitch command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and a process based on the reception of the second pitch command is executed in the jackpot effect processing. In the case (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b by the second entry sensor 650b. When the second incoming flag 223g is turned on, a display recapture command is displayed from the sound lamp controller 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the second incoming sensor 650b of the main controller 110. 114 can be transmitted. When the display control device 114 receives the display recapture command, the display control device 114 executes a process of displaying a recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) on the third symbol display device.

  The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the ending effect is executed in the jackpot effect, and is incremented by 1 every time the jackpot command process is executed after the ending effect is executed. Yes (see S1816 in FIG. 94). Further, in the jackpot command processing, when the remaining counter becomes a value of 5 seconds or more, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

  The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening and closing timing of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 that is opened and closed by the main control device 110, and when the jackpot valid flag 223e is on, that is, the jackpot When a game is being executed, 1 is added each time the big hit effect process is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). Further, when the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referred to together with information on the opening / closing pattern storage area in the entrance passage process (FIG. 99), and is used to determine which timing the game ball has entered the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for various types of lotteries such as an accessory-linked effect and a background lottery, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 399. The effect counter 223j is updated by one by the process of S1315 every time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The open / close pattern storage area 223k stores information of the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the opening / closing pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passage process, and is used to determine which timing is when the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, the opening / closing pattern storage area is updated while clearing when the opening command is received, which is the timing at which the jackpot is started, but the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off. Alternatively, it may be cleared.

  The in-round flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit game is being rounded (the ball entering restriction board 654 of the specific winning device 650 is being opened). The in-round flag 223m is set to ON when a round start command is received from the main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when a round end command is received from the main controller 110 ( S1810 in FIG. 94).

  The exit timing counter 223n counts the number of game balls in which the timing of entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game round is the exit passage timing. This exit timing counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the passage timing is the exit timing in the entrance passage processing that is executed when the entry to the specific winning device 650 is detected (FIG. 5). 99 S2305). Further, in the entrance passage process, when the jackpot game is finished and the above jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

  This exit timing counter is referred to in the entrance passage process, and when the exit timing counter becomes a predetermined number or more during the big hit game round of the opening / closing pattern A that is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650b (that is, the first timing) (2) When there are more than a predetermined number of game balls passing through the exit 652c without entering the specific winning opening 650b, a display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2307 in FIG. 99). . Upon receiving the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes an effect display for changing the player's firing timing. Thereby, in spite of the opening / closing pattern A that makes it easy to enter the second specific prize opening 650b, a player who is launching a game ball at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific prize opening 650b, Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to suppress disadvantages for the player.

  When the continuous background flag 223p receives a winning command based on the big winning start winning from the main controller 110, the continuous background flag 223p has a background level that suggests the above-mentioned jackpot expectation degree until the variable display based on the starting winning is started. This is a flag for continuously changing (increasing) the level. The continuous background flag 223p is set to ON when the effect counter is “0 to 49” when it is determined that the jackpot command is received in the winning command receiving process (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to ON, background change data is set for each holding ball (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and if it is on, the background change process is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). The continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, if the result is a big hit, it is configured to perform an effect that continuously increases the expectation of the background. It may be configured to execute. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of outreach or outreach, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation for jackpot even when the change starts.

  The background flag 223q stores a set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) or the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). The background flag 223q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and a process according to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

  The power-off processing flag 223x indicates that when the main controller 110 detects power-off, a power-off command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y The power is turned off and the power-off process is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). When the power-off process ends, the power-off process flag 223x is set to off (S1320 in FIG. 89). The power-off process in progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up process (see S1202 in FIG. 88), and when it is on, the power is cut off during execution of the power-off process (that is, the RAM is destroyed). Therefore, the processing when the RAM is destroyed is executed without checking the RAM destruction.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set and executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). In the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 88), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set off (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69A, details of the accessory-linked effect table 222b will be described. FIG. 69A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory-linked effect table 222b.

  This accessory-linked effect table 222b defines an effect selected by the variation pattern type and the value of the effect counter. Specifically, when the variation pattern type is “normal reach”, the SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, and the SW effect A2 if the effect counter is “200 to 349”. Is selected, and SW effect A3 is selected if the effect counter is “350 to 399”. When the variation pattern type is “super reach”, if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, the SW effect B1 is selected, and if the effect counter is “200 to 349”, the SW effect B2 is selected. If the effect counter is “350 to 399”, the SW effect B3 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern type is “special reach”, the SW effect C1 is selected if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, and the SW effect C2 is selected if the effect counter is “200 to 349”. If the effect counter is “350 to 399”, the SW effect C3 is selected.

  Here, each variation pattern type has a different variation time set as described above. In this control example, the selected SW effect is changed according to the variation pattern type. As a result, an SW effect having an appropriate effect time can be selected according to the variation pattern.

  Next, the details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

  The background lottery table 222d defines the background level of the transfer destination on the basis of the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is specified so that the determination result is different depending on whether the result is a win or fail.

  Specifically, first, a case where the determination result is a win will be described. If the determination result is a win and the current background level is “level 1”, if the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”. If “200”, the background level of the migration destination is “level 4”, and if “201 to 399”, the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 2”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-19”, the background level of the destination is “level 1”, and if it is “20-159”. If the background level of the transfer destination is “level 3”, the background level of the transfer destination is “level 4” if it is “200”, and the background level is not changed if it is “201 to 399”. Further, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 29”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2” and “30 to 139”. For example, the background level of the transfer destination is “level 4”, and if it is “140 to 399”, the background level is not changed. In addition, when the current background level is “level 4”, if the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 39”, the background level of the destination is “level 3”, and if it is “40 to 399”. It is specified that the background level is not changed.

  Next, a case where the result of the determination is wrong will be described. In a case where the result of the determination is wrong and the current background level is “level 1”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”. 150 to 399 ”is specified so that the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 2”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 49”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 1”, and if it is “50 to 99”. If the background level of the transfer destination is “level 3” and “100 to 399”, it is defined that the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 79”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2” and “80 to 99”. For example, the background level of the migration destination is “level 4”, and if it is “100 to 399”, the background level is not changed. When the current background level is “level 4”, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299”, the background level of the destination is “level 3”, and if it is “300-399”. It is specified that the background level is not changed.

  As described above, when the determination result is correct, the background level is specified to be easily raised and difficult to fall. When the result is incorrect, the background level is specified to be difficult to rise and easily fall. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the background level indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit from being frequently increased in spite of the fact that the determination result is wrong.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source last address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the third pattern when the power is turned on. In addition to an area 235d, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b is provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 72 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the display variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 72 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on 72. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 73 (a) is a “street stage”. FIG. 73 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to “Empty stage”, respectively.

  Of the backs A and B, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are both images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 73A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 53) having the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearance effect flag 223m, an appearance counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapture counter 223s, and other storage areas 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the ball restricting plate 654 of the special winning device 650 that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big bonus for the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol is released as a normal symbol and the ball becomes the first winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “city stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 75 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 75).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4905 in FIG. 120B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 102) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2709 of (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102B), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 120B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 76) described below describing the image drawing instruction content for the is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 76) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 102 (b) ) (See S2703)), pointer update processing (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 76), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 76, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 102 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. The appearance effect flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described appearance effect (see FIGS. 57A and 57B) is displayed during the jackpot game. The appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON in the appearance effect process when a display appearance command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S3607 in FIG. 109), and the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process. In FIG. 112, it is set to OFF.

  The appearance counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described appearance effects and the number of appearance effects held (see FIGS. 57A and 57B). This appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 when a display appearance command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and is subtracted by 1 in the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process (FIG. 112). Is done.

  The in-flight counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described escape effect and the number of suspensions of the escape effect (see FIGS. 57 (b), 58 (a), and (b)). This escape counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display escape command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and a failure effect process (FIG. 111) or a recapture effect process (FIG. 113). 1 is subtracted.

  The capture counter 233r counts the number of times the above-described capture effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) has been executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 650a. It is a counter. This capture counter 223r is incremented by 1 when a capture command for display is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  The recapture counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times that the above-described recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) is executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650b. The recapture counter 233s is incremented by 1 when a display recapture command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 87. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the process of S101, when a first entry sensor 652a detects a ball entering the first specific winning port 650a in the specific winning device 650, a first winning command is set, When a second ball entry sensor 652b detects a ball entering the second specific winning opening 650b, a second ball entry command is set. The first incoming command and the second incoming command set here are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 86). In S1001), it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process (S104) performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

  Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S216. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S217, it is determined that the jackpot is started in the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 86) (S1101: Yes). Thereby, an opening command is set by the process of S1103, and the opening effect which alert | reports the start of jackpot is performed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot game is in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game ends (S1104: Yes). Thereafter, when it is time to end the jackpot game, it is determined in the processing of S1111 that it is the start timing of the ending effect, an ending command is set, and the probability variation flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114) Then, the hour / medium counter is set (S1115).

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203f (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

  When the process of S213, S214, or S215 is completed, a stop command is set (S216), and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the later-described main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice command It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the change display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  When the value of the probability changing flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big jackpots (jackpots A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit It is determined that it is B (16R hour junior college hit) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are defined. Various types of “shared super reach” and “shared special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 86). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, the start winning information process (S105) will be described first, and then the prefetch process (S407) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 77), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is determined. Obtain (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, even if there is no winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the number of special symbol reserved balls If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), The value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, a prefetch process in S407, which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, details of the prefetching process (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S407). This pre-reading process (S407) is executed in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 80), and the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is executed from the values indicated by various random number counters acquired based on the starting win. Process.

  In the prefetch process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501). If it is determined in the process of S501 that there is no new winning (S501: No), it is not necessary to execute the prefetch process, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is the probability changing gaming state. (S502).

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of starting the change is a certain change (S502: Yes), The lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table (see FIG. 66A) for high probability.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of change is not a certain change (S502: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the start winning process (see FIG. 80) described above. And the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table (see FIG. 66A) for low probability.

  Since the lottery result acquisition method in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S505), and this processing is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result for the holding ball before the start of variation by receiving this winning information command. Thereby, the background interlocking effect etc. which are mentioned later can be performed suitably. The winning information command set here may include information such as a variation pattern in addition to the lottery result. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the variation time and the variation effect based on the reserved ball can be determined before the variation starts.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 77), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because the player hits a ball to make the special winning device 650 win a prize during a special symbol jackpot (that is, during a special gaming state). However, when the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released, the ball that is to be awarded to the specific winning device 650 enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the opening of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and to make it easy for the specific winning device 650 to win. In addition, since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning port 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning port 640 during the special symbol jackpot, There are many balls in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning port 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second and the number of releases is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 77) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) or the start winning process (see FIG. 80) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the winning restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened every round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the winning restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 has elapsed, or the first specific winning opening 650a. Alternatively, it is determined whether a specified number of balls have won the second specific winning opening 650b. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 79), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 79). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 82) or the processing of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 84 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the entrance restriction plate 654 of the device 650.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) S208 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. If the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned off (S1102), an opening command is set (S1103), and this processing is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the ball restriction board 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the ball restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened, or the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b are balled. When a predetermined number (for example, a total of 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1108, when the closing condition of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the ball restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends. A command is set (S1110), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the processing of S1111, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a big hit A (S1113). In the process of S1113, when it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is determined (S1113: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that the big hit B (16R hour / short big hit) is made (S1113: No), the hour / middle counter 203f is set to 100 (S1115), and this process is terminated.

  The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the process of S1111 (S1111: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1319 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 89). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 89, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), it executes a power-off process in S1319. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1319 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1319 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1319, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1319, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1319 is executed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1319 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1319 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1204 to S1206. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 and S1210, which are work area clear processes of the RAM 223, are skipped, the process proceeds to S1211, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1211), and the interrupt is permitted. Is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing S1302 to S1311. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the variable display setting process of S1313, the big hit effect process of S1314, and the process of updating the counter value of S1315 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), then the accessory operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 is completed, an accessory operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the accessory action process, the action of the spherical accessory (330, 340) or the like is performed based on the accessory movable data set in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 96), the variable display setting process (FIG. 97), or the like. It is a process for controlling. Here, since the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW effect, the SW effect and the spherical accessory (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. ) Operation can be linked.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed in the process of S1313 (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a jackpot effect process is performed (S1314). Details of the jackpot effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is completed, the effect counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-described accessory-linked effect and background level lottery, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

  When the processing of S1315 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1318), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1319). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1320), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1317), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern setting processing is performed (S1402), then background change lottery processing is performed (S1403), and the processing returns to the main processing. Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 and details of the background change lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The fluctuation display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or when a special symbol lottery has been performed. Therefore, every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). If a winning command is received (S1409: Yes), a winning command process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command process, various types of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching in the main controller 110 are extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the winning information in the RAM 223. Store in area 223a. Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b, and the value of the effect counter 223j, Decide whether to perform a series of performances. Details of the winning command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1409, if a winning command has not been received (S1409: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). If a jackpot related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot-related command is not received in the processing of S1411 (S1411), it is then determined whether the first incoming command or the second incoming command is received (S1413). If the first winning command or the second winning command is received (S1413: Yes), the big win winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the first incoming command or the second incoming command is not received in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1415), and the main process is performed. Return. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see S1402). This variation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. A variation pattern is selected based on the received command, and a necessary effect command (SW effect command) is selected. , A notice effect command) is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the received variation pattern command ( S1502). Next, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern of SW effect (S1503). In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed to execute the SW effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: No), it is not necessary to execute the SW effect, so the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the process of S1504, based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j, the SW effect is selected from the accessory-linked effect table (S1504). Next, a display SW effect command indicating the SW effect selected by the process of S1504 is set (S1505), and the SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504. The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

  Here, the SW scenario is a period in which the frame button 22 is set to be effective in accordance with the change period of the special symbol, a preview display content, a display content displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like. It is what has been. This SW scenario is sequentially updated by the process of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the updated and set scenario is a scenario in which the validity period of the frame button 22 is set, it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. In the SW scenario, the movable data of the spherical actors 330 and 340 are also set, and the timing for moving the accessory etc. is set to coincide with the start timing of the SW effective time.

  In the process of S1507, a notice effect is selected (S1507), a display notice effect command for indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1508), and this process ends. When the SW effect is selected, the notice effect may not be selected and the notice effect may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the notice effect are not executed at the same time, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player. In addition, when the SW effect and the notice effect are executed at the same time, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by each may be the same or approximate. As a result, for example, while an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed in the SW effect, an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed in the notice effect, thereby suppressing a game machine that is difficult to understand for the player. can do.

  Next, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

  In this background change lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601: Yes), the background change data has already been set for the holding ball, so the background change lottery is not performed and the process proceeds to S1602. . In the process of S1602, it is determined whether or not the current background level is “level 4” (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is “level 4” (S1602: Yes), it is not necessary to change the background level, and thus this process ends. When it is determined that the current background level is not the background of “level 4” (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), the background change data is not set for the reserved ball and the background change lottery is performed. The process proceeds to S1603. In the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the hit pseudo variation is a single variation pattern (1603). If it is determined that the hit pseudo variation is not a single variation pattern (S1603: No), S1606 Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit pseudo variation is a variation pattern of one time (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

  In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1605. If it is determined in step S1604 that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: No), the process proceeds to step S1606.

  When the process of S1602 or S1604 is completed, a background obtained by adding one level is set, and the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and the background lottery table 222d is used for the background lottery based on the determination result and the value of the effect counter 223j. Is executed (S1607). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the background (S1608). If there is no change in the background (S1608: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if there is a change in the background (S1608: Yes), Transition to processing.

  In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is set to ON (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and this process ends. By setting this display background change command, the background set in the display control device 114 is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a winning command process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S1410). The winning command process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90), and continuously when the winning command is received. It is determined whether or not an effect for changing the background is started.

  In this winning command process, first, winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223p is on (S1702). When it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is on (1702: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether there is any other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that the other winning information has been won (S1703: Yes), the winning process is executed before the start winning based on the winning is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background cannot be executed. Exit. If it is determined that the other winning information is not found (S1703: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning determination is a winning (S1704). If it is determined that the determination is not successful (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the determination is correct (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

  In the process of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49” (S1706). If it is not within the range (1706: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In the process of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49” (S1706: Yes), background change data is set for each of the reserved balls (S1707), and then the continuous background flag 223p. Is set to ON (S1708), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot command processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1412). This jackpot command process (S1412) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90), and when a jackpot related command is received, It is a process for determining the display mode of an ending effect.

  In this control example, when the main controller 110 determines that “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” ends. In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, the opening effect is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and every time a new round is started, the number of rounds this time is notified to the player. When the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) is finished, finally, an ending effect is performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special gaming state. In this control example, when this ending effect is performed, a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, or that is being executed A short time display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is performed.

  In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). If it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), information about the open / close pattern in the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the open / close pattern storage area 223k (S1802). ), An opening command for display is set (S1803), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether a round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that a round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), a display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command for the first round (S1807). If it is determined that the current round is the first round (S1807: Yes), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the current time is not the first round (S1807: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1804 that a round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether a round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that a round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the in-round flag 223m is set to off (S1810), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1809 that a round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223h (S1813), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in S1811 that an ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is equal to or greater than a value indicating 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by 1 every time the jackpot command process executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. .

  In the process of S1815, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is smaller than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it is a case where 5 seconds have not elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter 1 is added to the value of 223h (S1816), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1815, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), since 5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, the measurement counter 223i Then, the value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to OFF (S1819), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90). Or it is a process performed when a 2nd incoming ball command is received.

  In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901). If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S1901: No), the winning in the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b is performed even though the jackpot game is not being played. Since there is a ball, error notification is performed (S1906), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a first incoming command has been received (S1902). If it is determined in the process of S1902 that the first pitching command has been received (S1902: Yes), the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 650a, so an effect based on the pitching is provided. In order to execute, the first entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first incoming command has not been received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

  When the processing of S1902 or S1903 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a second incoming command has been received (S1904). If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the second pitching command has been received (S1904: Yes), the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650b. In order to execute, the 2nd entrance flag 223f is set to ON (S1905), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that the second incoming ball command has not been received (S1904: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process, first, it is determined whether or not a SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223o (S2001). If it is determined that there is no SW scenario setting (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW scenario is set (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and the accessory movable data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current period is the SW effective period (S2004). If it is determined that the current period is not the SW effective period (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S2004: No), it is determined whether or not the SW is pressed (S2005). If it is determined that the SW has been pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating SW pressing is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to S2007.

  In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the updated SW scenario is SW scenario end data (S2007). If it is determined that it is not SW scenario end data (S2007: No), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that it is SW scenario end data (S2007: Yes), an effect based on the SW scenario is displayed. Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S2107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then selected in the process of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91). The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the selected variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. The accessory movable data set by the processing of S2106 is referred to by the accessory action processing (S1311 in FIG. 89), and based on the set accessory movable data, the action and the frame of the spherical accessory (330, 340). The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

  In the processing of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2107). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2107: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 90), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and the display is made based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification to the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2111). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112). If it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112: No), this processing is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2112 that the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112), the background flag 223q obtained by adding the background level corresponding to the number of times of pseudo variation is set to ON (S2113). This process ends.

  Here, when the pseudo fluctuation is performed, the display data set in the display control device 114 is set in advance so that one background level is raised. As a result, it is not necessary to perform processing for monitoring the temporary stop timing in the pseudo fluctuation and increasing (variing) the background level, thereby reducing the processing load.

  Although explanation is omitted in this control example, usually, in the gaming machine, when changing the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations, voice and the like are executed. In such a configuration, notice display modes showing various different expectation levels are displayed, so the player does not know which expectation level should be determined to determine the expectation level for the jackpot, and about the notice display indicating the expectation level There is a problem that you will not be interested, or you will not be able to understand the content of the notice and get bored early in the game. However, in this control example, the background level is displayed as the overall expectation level on the background screen during the special symbol variation display, so that the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, each time a pseudo-stop where the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, the background level is changed, so it can be seen that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the notice of suspected stop. Can play games easily.

  In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is not limited to this, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. You may comprise as follows. Furthermore, not only the overall expectation level is displayed at the background level, but, for example, the expectation level is displayed by changing the color of the third pattern, or a character indicating the overall expectation level is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the clothes pattern, color, etc. may be changed) so as to display the overall expectation.

  Further, in this control example, the background level is not only displayed for the variation, but also displayed when the variation is stopped and the next variation is started. With this configuration, the degree of expectation of the number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be varied. Specifically, when the change display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is executed once, and the change mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make a player play a game while always being aware of the background level.

  In this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when a pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display by a level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed without changing the variation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The display area is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two parts, and the third graphic is independently displayed on each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and the third display is variably displayed in each case). With this configuration, the background level display indicates the degree of expectation according to the contents of the special symbol variation mode (whether or not the temporary stop is varied) and the variation pattern selection mode. Can be switched.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be increased or decreased, or the frequency of decreasing or the amount of decrease may be varied depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. Conversely, the pseudo stop may be more easily executed as the background level becomes lower. Furthermore, a background level may be set in advance in the variation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot / medium effect process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing (S1314). This jackpot effect processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the big hit effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit valid flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2201). If it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S2201: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit valid flag 223e is on (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202), and it is determined whether the inlet sensor 900a is on. (S2203). If it is determined that the inlet sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the processing of S2204 and S2205 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2206. On the other hand, in the process of S2203, when it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is on (S2203: Yes), the entrance passage process is executed (S2204), the display appearance command is set (S2205), and the process of S2206 is performed. Migrate to Details of the entrance passage processing (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2206, it is determined whether or not the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the bypass sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), a display escape command is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, when it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2210.

  In the process of S2210, it is determined whether or not the first entry flag 223f is on (S2210). When it is determined that the first entry flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processing of S2211 and S2212 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2210 that the first incoming flag 223f is on (S2210: Yes), the first incoming flag 223f is set to off (S2211), and a display capture command is set. (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the second incoming flag 223g is on (S2213). When it is determined that the second entrance flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 and S2215 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2213 that the second incoming flag 223g is on (S2213: Yes), the second incoming flag 223g is set to off (S2214), and a display recapture command is issued. The setting is made (S2215), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the entrance passage process (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this entrance passage processing (S2204). This entrance passage process (S2204) is executed in a jackpot / medium effect process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the entrance passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is off (S2301: No), This process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the in-round flag 223m is on (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is A (S2302).

  In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passage timing is determined based on the information in the open / close pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passage timing is not the exit passage timing (S2304: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10. It is determined whether or not (S2306).

  In the processing of S2306, when it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10 (S2306: Yes), a display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308). This process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 122. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2502, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 100). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the boot program is finished and this boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2401), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2502 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. The processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2502.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2403, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2405). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 120A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4802 in FIG. 120A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the display is simplified. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 76) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 102B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2703), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and also when receiving a continuous notice command or a back change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is notified of the continuous notice. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705). 76 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed, and then in S2704 Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, details of the above-described command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2803).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2902. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the processing returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3001), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3002).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3003), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the task process described above (see S2704 in FIG. 102 (b)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3003. At the same time, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3002.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2806 that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a display jackpot related command (S2808: Yes), the jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 105, the details of the jackpot display process (S2809) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process. This jackpot display process is to execute a process corresponding to a display jackpot related command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not a display opening command has been received (S3101). If it is determined in the process of S3101 that a display opening command has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3103.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3102) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106A is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S3102). This opening command process (S3102) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3101 or S3102 is finished, it is determined whether or not a display round number command has been received (S3103). In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the display round number command is received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the display round number command is not received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3105.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 106B, the round number command processing will be described (S3104). FIG. 106B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3302).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3103 or S3104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among unprocessed commands (S3105). If there is a display ending command in the process of S3105 (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, in the process of S3105, when it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S3401 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3403. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3105 or S3106 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is a ball-entry-related command among unprocessed commands (S3107). If it is determined in the process of S3107 that there is a command related to the ball entry (S3107: Yes), the ball effect production process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no entry-related command (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the entrance effect processing (S3108) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the entering ball effect process (S3108). This entrance effect processing is to execute processing corresponding to the entrance related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this entry effect process (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is determined that the display appearance command has been received (S3501: Yes), the appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. Details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, when it is determined that the display appearance command has not been received, the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

  When the processing of S3501 or S3502 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display escape command has been received (S3503). In the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display escape command is received (S3503: Yes), the escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505. Details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display escape command has not been received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3505.

  When the processing of S3504 or S3505 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display failure command has been received (S3505). If it is determined in step S3505 that a display failure command has been received (S3505: Yes), a failure effect process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. For details of the failure effect process (S3506). This will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3507.

  When the processing of S3505 or S3506 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display capture command has been received (S3507). In the process of S3507, when it is determined that the display capture command is received (S3507: Yes), the capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. Details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, when it is determined that the display capture command has not been received (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. The process proceeds to S3509.

  When the processing of S3507 or S3508 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a display recapture command has been received (S3509). If it is determined in step S3509 that a display recapture command has been received (S3509: Yes), a recapture effect process is executed (S3510), and the process ends. Details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3509, when it is determined that the display recapture command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the appearance effect process (3102). This appearance effect process (S3502) executes a process corresponding to the display appearance command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a game ball enters the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game. It is a process for performing the effect in the case of having performed.

  In the appearance effect process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3601). If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag is on (S3601), since the appearance effect has already been executed (see FIG. 57A), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 ( In step S3602, a display data table corresponding to the value of the on-going counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). When the process of S3603 is completed, the process proceeds to S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) within the cat appearance number displayed during the jackpot game is displayed by one.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), it is then determined whether the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), since neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, it corresponds to the normal appearance effect. A display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

  The normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605 is an effect in which the effect during the big hit game is displayed on one screen as described above, and when either the appearance effect or the runaway effect is displayed. It is what is displayed. In the present control example, two types of effects, an appearance effect and a runaway effect, are configured to be displayed simultaneously by dividing the screen of the third symbol display device 81 into two effects as effects during the jackpot game. However, when only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect needs to be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605. Therefore, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3604 that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is displayed. Is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). Thereby, it is possible to switch from the state where only the escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen to the state where the appearance effect and the escape effect are displayed simultaneously.

  When the process of S4705 or S4706 is finished, the appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  When the processing of S4703 or S4708 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3609). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611). . Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the escape effect process (S3504). This escape effect process executes a process corresponding to the display escape command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game flows down to the bypass channel 653. It is a process for performing the effect in the case of having performed.

  In the escape effect process (S3504), first, the appearance counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the appearance counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 (S3702). If it is determined in the process of S3702 that the appearance counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), the appearance effect to be displayed disappears, and therefore the appearance effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S3703), and the process of S3704 Migrate to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the on-going counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3704.

  When the process of S3702 or S3703 is finished, it is determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704). In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the running counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704: Yes), the running counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3705), and the value of the running counter 233p after the addition is handled. The displayed display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3711. Through the processing of S3705 and S3706, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is displayed by one increase within the number of running during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the escape counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3707), and the appearance effect flag 233m is on. It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the process of S3708, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3708: No), since there is no appearance effect to be displayed, a display data table corresponding to the normal escape effect is determined and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3708, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3708: Yes), since there is an appearance effect to be displayed, a display data table corresponding to the special escape effect is determined, The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  The above-mentioned normal escape effect is an effect of displaying the escape effect on one screen on the third symbol display device 81, and the special escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on two screens. (See FIG. 57B).

  When the processing of S3706, S3709, or S3710 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the failure effect process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the failure effect process (S3506). This failure effect process executes a process corresponding to the display failure command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning port 650a. This is a process for performing an effect when the player does not enter any of the second specific winning opening 650b and passes through the exit 652c.

  In the failure effect process (S3506), first, the escape counter 223p is decremented by 1 (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802). In the process of S3802, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3802 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, and it is a case where the effect display is performed on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, the display data table buffer 233dn is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

  When the processing of S3803 or S3804 is finished, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3805). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the capture effect process (S3508). This capture effect process executes a process corresponding to the capture command for display received from the audio lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning port 650a. This is a process for performing an effect when entering the ball.

  In the capture effect process (S3506), first, the capture counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S3901), and the on-going counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance counter 233n subtracted by the process of S3902 is 0 (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that the appearance counter 233n is 0, the appearance effect to be displayed disappears, so the appearance effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905. On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the on-going counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), since there is an appearance effect to be displayed, the process of S3904 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3905.

  When the processing of S3903 or S3904 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), there is no escape effect being displayed, and a normal capture counter is displayed to execute the capture effect on one screen. A display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905 that the in-flight counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is a displayed escape effect and the capture counter is set to execute the capture effect on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the special capture effect shown is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  When the processing of S3906 or S3907 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3908). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the recapture effect process (S3510). The recapture effect process 113 executes a process corresponding to the display recapture command received from the sound lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the second specific. This is a process for executing the process in the case where the player enters the winning hole 650b.

  In the recapture effect process (S3510), first, the escape counter 233p is decremented by 1 (S4001), and the recapture counter 233s is incremented by 1 (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: No), the recapture counter is used to execute the recapture effect on one screen without the appearance effect being displayed. A display data table corresponding to the normal recapture effect indicating is displayed and set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect that is displayed, and in order to execute the recapture effect on two screens, A display data table corresponding to the special recapture effect indicating the capture counter is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  When the processing of S4004 or S4005 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4006). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2808 that there is no display jackpot related command (S2808: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display timing notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), the timing notification process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the timing notification process (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the timing notification process (S2811). This timing notification process (S2811) executes a process corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113. This timing notification command is transmitted when the gaming balls that have entered the specific winning device 650 do not enter the second specific winning port 650b as described above and there are many gaming balls that pass through the exit 652c. is there.

  In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). Thereafter, based on the timing notification display data table, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the timing of game ball firing by the player is set. A specific example is an effect that prompts the user to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time. In order to press the screen and the frame button 22 simultaneously by this effect, the player needs to release his hand from the launch handle. Therefore, it is possible to change the launch timing of the game ball. With this effect, it is possible to relieve the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 from being launched at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous state for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2810 that there is no display timing notification command (S2810: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). If there is a display background change command (S2812: Yes), the background change command process is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 115A, details of the back surface change command process (S2815) will be described. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the back surface change command processing. This back surface change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back surface change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4803) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back face change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back change command is turned on, and other back image type Is set to OFF (S4202), the back surface change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4201 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task image is determined based on the back image discrimination flag set in S4202. The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more back change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. If there are two or more back change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to the effects of noise, etc., and another command will be mistakenly interpreted as a back change command. There is also a risk that In the process of S4202, if it is determined that two or more back change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back change command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear surface change command received later may be turned on. Also, any one back change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2812 that there is no back surface change command (S2812: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a notice effect command among unprocessed commands (S2814). If there is (S2814: Yes), the notice effect command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the details of the notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command process (S2815) executes a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command process (S2815), first, it is determined whether or not a display SW effect command has been received (S4401). If it is determined in the process of _S4401 that the display SW effect command has been received (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received display SW effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402). ), The process proceeds to S4403. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the display SW effect command has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4403. By executing the processing of S4402, the SW effect (FIG. 60, FIG. 61) in the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the process of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. Thereby, the lighting and opening / closing operation of the spherical accessory (330, 340) whose operation is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked.

  When the processing of S4401 or S4402 is completed, it is then determined whether a display notice effect command for display has been received (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display notice effect command for display has been received (S4403: Yes), the notice effect display data table indicated by the received notice effect for display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404). ), The process proceeds to S4405. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display notice effect command for display is not received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. The notice effect displayed by the process of S4404 is a notice effect that does not require operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which a character appears.

  When the processing of S4403 or S4404 is finished, it is then determined whether or not a display pressing command has been received (S4405). If it is determined in step S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), a notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2814 that there is no notice effect command (S2814: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2816). (S2816: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2817), and the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the error command process (S2817) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4301). Of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4302). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4302, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2816 (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2818), and the process returns to S2801.

  In the process of S2801, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes) ), The processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2818 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S2801 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2901. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117 to FIG. 119, details of the above-described display setting process (S2703) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S4502 to S4504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4502), S4503 to S4504. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4503). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4504).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4601).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4504) or in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

  In S4505, pointer update processing is executed (S4505). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4701). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4701, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4702). As a result, if it is End information (S4702: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4703), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4703: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4705), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4706), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4702: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S4506 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4508: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4509).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4511). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4514), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S4515), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2704), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S4515 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S4509 (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516). If the demo display flag is off (S4516: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S4517), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4518). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4520), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4521), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4516, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4516: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 72B and 72C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 and FIG. 120, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4802), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4801, that is, if it is off (S4801: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4802), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4901), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4901: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4902). In the process of S4902, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4902 that the transfer process has not ended (S4902: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to S4903. Also, as a result of the process of S4901, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903.

  In the process of S4903, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4903). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S4903: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S4903 (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4803), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the display setting process (S2703) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S5001). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5002). If it is transfer data information (S5002: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S5003), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S5004), and the process proceeds to step S5005.

  In the process of S5002, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5002: No), the processes of S5003 and S5004 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5005. In the processing of S5005, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5006).

  In the process of S5006, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5006 that the transfer process has not ended (S5006: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to S5007. Also, as a result of the process of S5005, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S5005: No), the process proceeds to S5007.

  In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007). If the transfer start flag is on (S5007: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5008), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5003 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S5013). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S5010), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5011). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

  In the processing of S5013, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The determination in the process of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S5013 (S5013: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5013 (S5013: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S5014). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5014, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. If it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used for the jackpot effect or the like can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear surface change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the above-described drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the process of S5101, the type of storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5102, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5103). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the spherical effect (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are linked. In the above, the case of performing the accessory-linked effect to be performed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, a case where an effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern will be described. Specifically, as a SW effect, a comment-based effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and a frame Based on whether or not the button 22 is pressed, there is provided a repetitive striking system effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-based effect and the continuous hit-based effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially different in the sound lamp control device 113. Further, in place of the frame button input monitoring / production process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 is executed, and the announcement effect executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The difference is that a part of the command process (S2815) is changed, and other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the display contents of the SW effect displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 123A and 123B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the SW effect of the comment-type effect.

  In the second control example, when the comment effect SW effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (4 times in this control example) in the SW effect is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. Thereafter, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the design of the PUSH button is changed to comment display (see FIG. 123 (a)). The comment display displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit between the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

  Here, when a comment display suggesting that the expectation level that is a big hit is high, the comment display that is displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to a high expectation level that is a big hit. The For example, after the comment display with the background of the fish school is displayed based on the first press of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the second and third press of the frame button 22 is also the school of fish. (See FIG. 123 (b)). Thereby, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit does not fall, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the repetitive strike effect in the second control example will be described. 124 (a) and 124 (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display content of the SW effect of the continuous hitting effect.

  In the second control example, when the SW effect of the repetitive striking effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the SW effect of the comment effect described above. The PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the design of the PUSH button is erased, and instead, a part or all of a specific design (a whale design in this control example) is displayed (FIG. 124 ( a)).

  The whale pattern described above moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, 1/4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen based on the first press, and 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed based on the second press. 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and all the whale patterns are displayed based on the fourth press (see FIG. 124B). In this way, in the SW effect of the repetitive hitting effect, it is suggested that if all the whale patterns are displayed, it will be a big hit, otherwise it will not be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a touch effect that is executed when a SW sensor detects a SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when an effect with a high expectation that is a big hit by pressing the frame button 22 is executed in the above-described comment-type effect and consecutive hit-type effect.

  First, in the above-described comment-type effect or continuous hit-type effect, the PUSH button pattern corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125 (a)). After that, when there is detection by the touch sensor, on the basis of pressing of the frame button 22, the design of the PUSH button on which an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  For example, in a comment-type effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed four times, if a school of fish is displayed as a background for comment notice when the second frame button 22 is pressed, the second push button from the top Are enlarged and displayed (FIG. 125 (b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect at each number of presses is determined by prefetching and acquiring at the start of the SW effect. Thus, before the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to notify that an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit (that is, an effect with a low probability of being displayed) is displayed. The user can be prompted to press the button 22.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the second control example.

  First, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an accessory-linked effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, an SW scenario storage area 222e, An SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and various data and programs necessary for game control are stored. Since the variation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect of the comment-type effect and the continuous hit-type effect described above. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 and the hit super-reach comment background table 222f2 are not included. The hour comment background table 222f3, the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4, the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5, the comment table 222f6, and the continuous hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 are provided. A detailed description of each table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), a fixed flag 223r and a SW press counter 223s are provided in addition to the areas of the first control example described above.

  The fixed flag 223r is set to ON in the case where a comment-related effect fixing condition is satisfied in the SW effect selecting process described later (see FIG. 131). When the fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. Thereby, it can prevent switching from a comment type | system | group production to a continuous hit type | system | group production.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fixed flag 223r may be turned on when it is desired to prevent the effects from being switched in the repetitive striking effect.

  The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The SW press counter 223s is incremented by 1 every time the SW effect selection process is executed, which is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effect, and the SW press count becomes the upper limit value. In this case, the SW scenario is reset.

  Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. First, with reference to FIG. 127A, the contents of the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 will be described. FIG. 127A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit background reach comment background table 222f1. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 defines the comment background of the comment-type effect to be selected when the result of the determination is successful and the normal reach is executed. This comment background is defined to be selected by the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect counter.

  Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is “blue background” displayed in blue, “yellow background” displayed in yellow, “red background” displayed in red, and fish school pattern There is a “fish school background” displayed. As for the big hit expectation, the “yellow background” has higher expectations than the “blue background”, and the “red background” has higher expectations than the “yellow background”. Compared to the “red background”, the “fish school background” has higher expectations.

  In the hit background reach comment background table 222f1, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “0-299”, “blue background” is selected, and “300-396” "Yellow background" is selected, "397-398" is selected "Red background", and "399" is "Fish school background". When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second time, when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “blue background” is selected, and when it is “250 to 349”, “yellow background”. Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “350-397”, and “fish school background” is selected in the case of “398-399”. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is third, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, “blue background” is selected, and “150 to 299” is “yellow background”. In the case of “300 to 396”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “397 to 399”, “fish background” is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j is selected as “yellow background” when “0-249” is selected, and “red background” is selected when “250-349”. In the case of “350 to 399”, “fish background” is selected, and “blue background” is not selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127 (b), the comment background table 222f2 for the hit super-reach will be described. FIG. 127B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit super-reach comment background table 222f2. The hit-reach comment background table 222f2 is defined such that a comment background with a high expectation level, which is a big hit, is selected as compared to the above-described hit normal reach comment background table 222f1.

  The comment table background 222f2 at the time of super-reach selects “blue background” when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1”, and “150 to In the case of “349”, “yellow background” is selected, in the case of “350 to 397”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “398 to 399”, “fish school background” is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 149”, “blue background” is selected, and “150 to 299” is “yellow background”. In the case of “300 to 396”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “397 to 399”, “fish background” is selected. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “yellow background” is selected, and when “250 to 349”, the “red background” is selected. Is selected, “Fish background” is selected, and “Blue background” is not selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects “red background” when “0 to 249”, and “fish background” when “250 to 399”. The “blue background” and “yellow background” are not selected.

  As described above, the comment background table 222f2 for hit super-reach is defined so that a comment background with a high expectation level that is a big hit can be selected more easily than the comment background table 222f1 for hit normal reach. Thereby, in the comment system production of Super Reach, it is possible to make it easier to display the one with a high expectation level that is a big hit compared to the normal reach. In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (4 times) in the super reach and the normal reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the normal reach may be reduced. . As a result, even if the background display is selected using the same table for Super Reach and Normal Reach, Super Reach has a configuration that tends to be a highly anticipated production that is a big hit compared to Normal Reach, while reducing the area of ROM 222 Can be saved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 (a), the contents of the off-comment comment background table 222f3 will be described. FIG. 128A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of detachment. This out-of-comment comment background table 222f3 is defined such that a comment background with a low expectation level, which is a big hit, is selected as compared to the above-described hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 and the hit super reach comment background table 222f2. .

  This off-comment comment table background 222f3 selects “blue background” when the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 349” when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1” and “350 to 396”. "Yellow background" is selected, "397 to 398" is selected "Red background", and "399" is "Fish background". When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-299”, “blue background” is selected, and “300-396” is “yellow background”. In the case of “397 to 398”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “399”, “fish background” is selected. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is third, the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 249”, “blue background” is selected, and “250 to 349” is “yellow background” Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “350 to 398”, and “fish school background” is selected in the case of “399”. When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j selects “blue background” when “0-149”, and “yellow background” when “150-349”. In the case of “350 to 397”, the “red background” is selected, and in the case of “398 to 399”, the “fish school background” is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 (b), the contents of the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4 will be described. FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4. This off-time fixed comment background table 222f4 is used to select a comment-type effect when the fixed condition of the comment-type effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). Further, the off-fixed comment background table 222f4 defines a comment background to be selected based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, when the previous comment background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 7”, “red background” is selected. In the case of “8-9”, “fish school background” is selected. When the type of the comment background is “fish background”, the “fish background” is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is “0-9” (that is, in all cases). . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment system effect is established, the expectation level that is a big hit suggested by the comment background does not fall, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5. The hit fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the fixed condition for comment-related effects is satisfied, as in the above-described fixed comment background table 222f4 for off-time. The hit-fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the success / failure determination result is winning, unlike the lost-fixed comment background table 222f4 that is used when the determination result is incorrect.

  Specifically, when the previous comment background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-3”, “red background” is selected, and “ In the case of “4-9”, “fish school background” is selected. When the type of the comment background is “fish background”, the “fish background” is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is “0-9” (that is, in all cases). . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment system effect is established, the expectation level that is a big hit suggested by the comment background does not fall, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table 222f6. The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice displayed in the above comment-related effects.

  The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is “blue background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “good luck” is selected as the content of the comment notice, If it is “4-6”, “Still” is selected as the content of the comment trailer, “Ike” is selected as the content of the comment trailer if “7-8”, and if it is “9”, the comment is displayed “A little more” is selected as the content of the notice. When the background type is “yellow background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-3”, “chance?” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “4- "6" is selected as the content of the comment notice, "7?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, "What is this" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "9" “Maybe?” Is selected as the comment notice content. Further, when the background type is “red background” and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “chance!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “4 to “6” is selected as the content of the comment notice, “7-8” is selected as the content of the comment notice, “Yes!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “9” is the comment. “Sore!” Is selected as the notice content. When the background type is “fish school background” and the first digit of the value of the production counter 223j is “0 to 3”, “Large chance !!” is selected as the comment notice content, and “ If it is 4-6, “Yoshi!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is “7-8”, “Wow !!!!” is selected as the content of the comment notice, and “9” In some cases, “Super Hot!” Is selected as the content of the comment notice.

  In this way, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the background type, the expectation that is a big hit suggested by the content of the comment notice and the comment background can be matched, and the game is easy to understand for the player. Can be a machine. Also, the comment background and the content of the comment preview are selected based on the effect counter 223j. However, when selecting the content of the comment preview, the comment background is selected based on the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j. ing. Accordingly, the contents of the comment background and the comment notice can be selected at random, and variations displayed in the comment-type effect can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. In this control example, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the comment notice is selected regardless of the type of the comment background. May be. Alternatively, the comment background type may be selected based on the comment notice content after the comment notice content is selected first.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 (b), the contents of the consecutive hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 will be described. FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous hitting effect lottery table 222f7. This continuous hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific picture is displayed based on the determination result, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, when the determination result is successful and the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the whale pattern that is a specific pattern is 1 / 4 is displayed (see FIG. 124A), and if it is “200 to 399”, it is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0-149”, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “150-399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed three times, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 119”, 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “120 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 99”, it is notified that all the whale patterns are displayed and the jackpot is achieved (FIG. 124 (b)). If it is “100 to 399”, the previous display is maintained. Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223j is “100 to 399”, and when all the whale patterns are not displayed, it is a big hit after that. Informed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong and the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 199”, the whale pattern that is a specific pattern is displayed in 1/4. (Refer to FIG. 124 (a)), “200 to 399” is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed twice, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 99”, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “100 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, in the case where the frame button 22 is pressed three times, if the value of the effect counter 223j is “0 to 49”, 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and if it is “50 to 399”, the previous time. Will remain displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is fourth, the previous display is maintained regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, and the jackpot notification is not displayed.

  As described above, in the comment-type production, the player recognizes the content and the jackpot expectation by reading the content of the comment. On the other hand, in the continuous-type production, the player uses a specific pattern (book). In the control example, it is only necessary to pay attention to whether or not all the whale pictures) are displayed. Therefore, the comment-based effect must have a longer effect period than the repeated-striking effect. In the present control example, when the SW effective time is shortened by the process of S6104 described later, a repetitive hitting effect that can be recognized by the player even in a short time effect is displayed. Thereby, it can be set as the game machine easy for a player to understand.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1350). ) Is executed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350). This frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and the SW production is selected.

  In this frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is an SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). If it is determined that there is an SW scenario in the process of S6001 (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether or not it is the SW valid period based on the updated SW scenario (S6002). S6003). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), this is the case because the SW effect is not being executed, and thus this process ends.

  In the process of S6003, when it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S6004), and the process proceeds to S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the current period is not the SW valid period (S6003: No), the present process is finished as it is because it is not the timing to execute the effect based on the SW depression.

  In the processing of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. Therefore, the SW effect selection process (S6006) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6005 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor is on (S6007).

  In the process of S6007, when it is determined that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), a display touch sensor command is set to display the touch effect in the SW effect described above (see FIG. 125) ( S6008), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6007, when it is determined that the touch sensor is off (S6007: No), this process is ended as it is. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. ) Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display touch sensor command, the display control device 114 displays the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process (S6006). This SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the display of the SW effect.

  In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, 1 is added to the SW press counter 223s (S6101), and it is determined whether or not the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102). If it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102: Yes), the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so the effect is determined from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). Is selected, and the process proceeds to S6110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is off (S6102: No), the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less based on the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o. It is determined whether or not there is (S6104).

  In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), the remaining effect period is short, and therefore, the repeated-hit effect that can display the effect period shorter than the comment effect. In order to execute, the SW effect is selected based on the effect counter 223j and the SW depressing counter 223s from the continuous hitting effect selection table 222f7. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), the remaining effect period is sufficient, so that the effect counter 223j is obtained from the comment-based effect selection table (222f1, 222f2, 222f3, 222f6). The SW effect is selected based on the SW pressing counter 223s. Here, the comment-based effect selection method is as follows. First, a comment background is selected from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) corresponding to the determination result and the variation pattern type, and then the selected comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j are selected. Accordingly, the content of the comment notice is selected from the comment table.

  When the processing of S6106 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a fixed condition is satisfied (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is “red background” or “fish school background”, it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. Due to this, despite the fact that a high performance is displayed as the expectation level that is a big hit, after that, an effect that the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed is extremely low, thereby impairing the player's willingness to play Can be suppressed. In this control example, the fixed condition is set so that the expectation level of the comment background is not impaired. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the comment notice is a story (from the first to the fourth time). The fixed condition may be satisfied when the content of the advance notice is displayed and the content is understood). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by switching to the direct-playing effect in the middle despite the content of the comment notice with a story characteristic being displayed.

  In the process of S6108, when it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6110.

  In the process of S6110, a display press effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and the SW press count is set to the upper limit value (in this control example) based on the SW press counter 223s. 4 times) is determined (S6111).

  If it is determined in the process of S6111 that the number of times the SW has been pressed is the upper limit value (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6111 that the number of times the SW is pressed is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), step S6112 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that a part of the process of the notice effect command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and is the same in other points. It is. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Details of the notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command process (S2815) is for executing a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command process (S2815), the processes from S4401 to S4405 are executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in step S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), a notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( In step S4406, the display data table in which the number of presses has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and this process ends.

  By the processing of S4450, a pressing effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124) corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be executed. Further, by the processing of S4406, it is possible to switch between the continuous hit effect and the comment effect based on the press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern has been described. Specifically, as a SW effect, a comment-based effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and a frame Based on whether or not the button 22 is pressed, there is provided a repetitive striking system effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-based effect and the continuous hit-based effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of striking the frame button 22 repeatedly, control is performed such that the selection probability of the effect is switched depending on the number of times of pressing and the remaining time of the SW effective time. Is different. Only differences from the second control example will be described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 134, an example of a display mode in a continuous striking effect using the frame button 22 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation pattern for executing the SW notice effect, the SW notice effect set in the change pattern is set, and the third symbol fluctuation is set. During the display, an effect of informing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 133A is executed. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed to win a lottery (lottery of whether or not to display the effect), a display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a display mode displayed at the start of the SW notice effect. When the variation pattern in which the SW announcement effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the predetermined timing is set in advance during the variation display of the third symbol, the SW announcement effect for depressing the frame button 22 is displayed. A display mode (FIG. 133 (a)) for notifying the player of the start is displayed. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), the third symbol that has been variably displayed at high speed is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display form of the SW notice effect is displayed in the other display areas. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), an indicator is displayed, and when the indicator (meter) presses the frame button 22, the indicator is changed (the indicator memory color is changed by pressing). The memory of this indicator is changed in order from the right memory in accordance with the pressing of the frame button 22, and when the color is changed up to the MAX memory, the player is notified that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. (See FIG. 134 (a)).

  In addition, in the display mode of the SW notice effect, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed, and a character “continuous hit!” Is displayed thereon, so that the game method of hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly is notified. Has been. A remaining amount meter M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed (the remaining period of the SW effective period) is displayed below the symbol imitating the frame button 22. The remaining amount meter M is configured such that the internal color can be changed from right to left as the SW effective time decreases. At the start of the SW notice effect, the entire interior of the remaining amount meter M is displayed in red, but it is changed to white (red display is reduced) in order from the right side (see FIG. 133 (b)). When all the inside is changed to white, the player is informed that the SW valid time has ended. In addition, at the start of the SW notice effect, a game description of the SW notice effect (character display of “Make the meter MAX!” And “When it becomes MAX !!” applies). Thereafter, the SW effective time starts, but until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not changed, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

  FIG. 134 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the effect lottery is won by pressing the frame button 22. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the lottery for the effect is won, the color of the indicator up to the memory of MAX is changed (changed from white to red), and the “hatsu! Characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the SW valid time has passed and the remaining time has passed, if the production lottery cannot be won, the word “Sorry!” Is displayed and the jackpot expectation is expected. The effect to notify the degree is not displayed. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, whether or not it is a win is drawn every time. The lottery probability is set higher when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern that is variably displayed is a win than when it is out of place. It can be expected that a variation pattern that is a big hit is being executed.

  In this control example, the variation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is limited to a variation pattern that is a winning pattern or a variation pattern of a super-reach out of reach. Therefore, if the player can recognize that he / she always reaches when the SW announcement effect is executed, and if the player can press the frame button 22 to display the characters “Super Hot !!” Can be expected to be a variation pattern.

  In this control example, the jackpot expectation is displayed during the variation of the third symbol. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the lottery result may be directly notified. It is not limited to jackpots, and points are given on production, and on that point, items on production are given, or two-dimensional barcodes are displayed and captured on a mobile phone, etc. You may comprise so that privilege, such as, can be acquired.

  Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the second control example. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222g is added to the ROM 222 in the second control example. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the second control example, the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 136A to 136F, the lottery table 222g in the third control example will be described. The lottery table 222g includes a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to g3 are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j determined to be the winning of the effect varies depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. In each lottery table, the number of effect counters 223j that are determined to be winning when the lottery result of the changing special symbol (the third symbol) is winning is set.

  In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, when the remaining time of the SW valid time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is longer than 5 seconds, and the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more in 5 seconds or less It is a lottery table selected in the case of doing. The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 20 to 39 times. The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table that is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 40 times or more.

  The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables that are selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 10 when the remaining SW effective time is 5 seconds or less. The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is set to half. Therefore, it is configured so that a player who has a small number of times of pressing the frame button 22 can easily set the effect.

  In this control example, the lottery table having different selection probabilities is switched depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to (c), the SW valid time Depending on the remaining time, lottery tables having different lottery probabilities may be switched. Further, the above-described configuration for switching the lottery table depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time may be configured together. In this case, the greater the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set. When the remaining time is further reduced, the lottery probability is set higher. Thereby, if it is a player who presses down the frame button 22, the possibility that it can win a production | present can be made higher by continuing pressing down the frame button 22 during SW effective period.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). The RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the first control example described above in that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adaptation flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The interval counter 223t is a frame executed periodically (every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133). In the button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 138), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. This interval counter 223t is referred to in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3, and if it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit value (750 in this control example, corresponding to 3 seconds), the indicator level 1 is subtracted from 223u. Thus, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133), the indicator level display is reduced by one. The effect of displaying the indicator level suggests that the expectation level that is a big hit is high as the indicator level increases to the maximum value. Therefore, the player can be prompted to continuously press the frame button 22 so that the indicator level does not decrease, and the player's willingness to press the frame button 22 can be improved.

  The indicator level 223u is for storing the amount of indicator to be displayed in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight areas in the left-right direction, and is lit in order from the left area. In the present control example, it is determined how much the above-described eight regions are lit based on the value of the indicator level 223u. For example. If the value of the indicator level 223u is “1”, only the leftmost area is lit, if it is “4”, the fourth area from the left is lit, and if it is “8”, all the areas are lit. The area is lit.

  The indicator level 223u is set in a frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (FIG. 138), a SW effect selection process 2 (FIG. 140) or a SW effect selection process 3 (FIG. 141) which will be described later.

  The adapted flag 223v is a flag used to determine whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This adaptation flag 223v is used when the SW button adaptation processing (FIG. 139) is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. If it is less than 10) in the example, it is set to ON. In this case, a switching flag 223w, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the table for selecting the SW effect has been switched.

  The switching flag 223w is a flag used to determine whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This switch flag 223w indicates that the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times (this control example) in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139) that is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. If it is less than 10 times, it is set to ON. When the switching flag 223w is turned on, the process of selecting the SW effect changes from the SW effect selection process 2 using the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selection process 3 using the fourth to sixth lottery tables. Will be switched. Thereby, it is possible to display an effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit even for a player who has a small number of presses in the SW effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. Note that the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the second control example, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 138, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360), the same processes as those in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1350) in the second control example are executed from S6001 to S6004. After the process of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). This SW valid period is set in the SW scenario, and is subtracted when the SW scenario is updated. When it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), SW pressing adaptation processing is executed (S6051). Details of the SW pressing adaptation processing (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6050 that the remaining SW valid period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). If it is determined in step S6052 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing is performed. finish. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S6052 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6052: No), the interval counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S6055), and it is determined whether the interval counter 223t is the upper limit ( S6056). If it is determined in the processing of S6056 that the interval counter is the upper limit value, the indicator level 223u is decremented by 1 (S6057), a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058), and the interval counter is set. 223t is reset (S6059), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6056 that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processing from step S6057 to step S6059 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139, the details of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1360) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1360).

  In the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether the adaptation completed flag 223v is on. This adaptation flag 223v is executed by a process (S7002 to S7004) for determining the player's pressing state based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW valid period (the remaining period is 10 seconds to 5 seconds). This is a flag indicating whether or not If it is determined that the adapted flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adapted flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). When it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the processing of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). Thereafter, the process of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of times of pressing is small because the number of times of pressing the first half of the player's frame button 22 is small.

  In S7005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switch flag 223w is on (S7006). When it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing ends. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7006 that the switching flag 223w is on (S7006: Yes), SW effect selection process 3 is executed (S7007), and this process ends. Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). This SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is a process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and the SW press adaptation process (S6051) as described above.

  In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, the value of the SW press counter 223s is incremented by 1 and updated (S7101). It is determined whether the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). If it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). If it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7103 that the value of the SW press counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the setting is switched to the second lottery table 222g2 (S7104). Thereafter, the process of S7108 is executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S7102 that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). If it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, in the process of S7105, when it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to S7108.

  In the process of S7106, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the setting is switched to the third lottery table 223g3 (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the process of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

  In the processing of S7108, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination regarding the display of fluctuation during execution is a win (S7108). If it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is correct (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110). Then, the notification sound and the lamp data are set (S7111), the SW valid time is reset (S7112), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is not successful (S7108: No), it is determined whether the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). If it is determined in the processing of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113: Yes), the indicator level 223u is incremented by 1 (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), the process ends.

  Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1302), it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display command, the display control device 114 executes the SW effect according to the indicator level 223u of the command received by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is greater than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007). This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select the SW effect when the switch flag 223w is on in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139) described above.

  In the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007), the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) and the first lottery table are replaced with the fourth lottery table, the fifth lottery table is replaced with the second lottery table, Since the sixth lottery table is used in place of the three lottery table, and the other points are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this control example, in the repeated hitting effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is displayed based on the number of consecutive hits is performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by simple processing, the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is displayed by repeatedly hitting the notice effect performed during the special symbol fluctuation time has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol is a big hit. In addition, whether or not the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot is not notified, and whether or not the probability change is given by hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly during the jackpot game or the normal game, etc. (whether it is a probability change game state) May be configured to be used in an effect to notify the player by lottery. In such a case as well, a period during which the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit is set, and a lottery table for switching whether or not the effect is to be notified based on the number of consecutive hits, the remaining time of the effective time, and the like is set. By configuring, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing at which the effect is notified can be made random. In addition, for a player with a small number of consecutive hits of the frame button 22 or a slow hitting speed, an effect tailored to the player can be performed by switching and setting a table with a high selection probability.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration in which the game ball is periodically guided to the second specific winning port 650b when the game ball is guided to the inlet portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in a configuration in which game balls are randomly guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, it is easy to enter the second specific winning port 650b and the second specific winning port 650b. The configuration set for the case where the control is made difficult to enter the ball will be described. Only differences from the first control example will be described, and description of points that are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 when the game ball is guided to the entrance 651a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example, and the entering of the guided game ball FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing each non-intrusive pattern. FIG. 142 (a) is a timing chart showing how to enter a ball from 1 round to 2 rounds when jackpot C (16 round jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the big hit C, the opening restriction plate 654 is opened for 1 second in the first round, and the opening operation is carried out for 1.6 seconds in the second round. Thereafter, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing operation of the entrance restriction plate 654), the third round is executed. From the third round onwards, until 30 seconds of release or 10 game balls are detected by the first entry sensor 652a or the second entry sensor 652b (into the first specified winning opening 650a or the second specified winning opening 650b). It is executed until 10 balls have entered.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and ten balls may be entered into the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. In that case, after 10 balls have entered the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, a means for restricting the entrance to the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650 may be provided.

  The interval time between the first round and the second round (the closing time of the entrance restriction plate 654) is 1 second. A game ball that has flowed down to the first specific winning port 650a during that time cannot flow into the first specific winning port 650a, and flows down to the detour channel 653. Since the detour time required to flow down the detour channel 653 and reach the second specific winning port 650b is 1.6 seconds, even if the game ball arrives immediately after closing one round, When the second specific winning opening 650b is reached during the closing time, the ball entering restriction plate 654 is open. Therefore, the game ball headed to the second specific winning port 650b can enter the second specific winning port 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is a game ball that has reached the first specific winning opening 650a just before the start of the second round and has flowed down to the detour channel 653. However, it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, all the game balls guided to the first specific winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) are configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round.

  Referring to FIG. 142 (b), it is a timing chart showing a state of entering the second specific winning opening 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. Small hits consist of two rounds of games. The opening period of the first and second rounds is set to 1 second, and the interval period between the first and second rounds is set to 0.6 seconds. Thus, the first and second rounds of the jackpot C and the first and second rounds of the small hit are only slightly different in the opening period and the interval period, and this difference is very short. Because of the difference, it is difficult for the player to determine the difference. Therefore, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, since it is difficult to distinguish the difference between the small hit and the big hit C, the player can hit the big hit C which is the small hit when the hit game is started. It is difficult to determine whether it is.

  The small hit interval period is 0.6 seconds, and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, so the added time is 1.6 seconds, and the detour period is also 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the detoured game ball cannot enter the second specific prize opening 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the two rounds of the small hit game, although it is possible to enter the first specific winning opening 650a, it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  In the fourth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is used to produce whether or not the winning game is jackpot C in the interval period (10 seconds) after the end of two rounds of jackpot C and jackpot. Is called. In this effect, an effect that is more advantageous to the player is displayed as the number of game balls that have entered the second specific prize opening 650b between the first and second rounds increases. Specifically, if an enemy is displayed and the hero wins against the enemy, it is notified that the jackpot is C. In this case, the main character's life gauge is set according to the number of balls entered into the second specific prize opening 650b. Therefore, it is difficult to lose even if it is attacked by an enemy. In this way, in this control example, since it is configured so that the player is given the right to know early whether the jackpot C is during a round of 1-2 rounds, a large amount of game balls Even during a period of an open pattern that cannot be obtained, the player can launch a game ball to play a game.

  Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 143, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process in the fourth control example determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit with respect to the first control example described above (S250), and if the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), only the point of setting the small hit start (S251) is different and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the jackpot control process 2 (S1050), in the first control example, only the jackpot control is controlled, but the jackpot control is also added. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1150 and S1151, and also in the processing of S1151 to determine whether it is a big hit or small hit. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the jackpot command processing (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing 2 (S1420). In the jackpot command process 2 (S1420), the process of S1810 is changed to an inter-round process (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command process (S1420) in the first control example. This inter-round processing (S1850) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing between rounds (S1850). In the inter-round processing (S1859), first, the round flag 223m is set to OFF (S8001). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot or jackpot C (S8002). If it is determined that the jackpot or jackpot C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round, the type of jackpot being executed (whether it is a jackpot C or a jackpot) and the number of balls entered into the second specific winning port 650b are indicated. A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives this display command, based on the jackpot type, a life gauge corresponding to whether the main character wins, the enemy wins, or the number of balls entered into the second specific winning hole 650b The display setting is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8002 that it is not a small hit or a big win C (S8002: No), and if it is determined in the process of S8003 that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this process is performed. finish.

  In the fourth control example, it is configured so that the game balls between rounds do not enter the second specific winning opening 650b in small hits, but the present invention is not limited to this. The eye opening period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. By comprising in this way, even if it is a small hit, the expectation that it is a big hit C can be maintained more.

  Further, in the above-described detour channel 654, for example, a material having a high friction coefficient is used on the road surface portion, or unevenness is provided on the road surface portion so that the flow coefficient of the game ball is lowered. May be. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass channel 654 increases, so that the game ball stays in the bypass channel 654 during the interval time even when the interval time becomes long. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

  Further, the bypass flow path described above may be configured such that the passage time is variable. For example, a plurality of bypass passages having different transit times may be provided so that game balls can be distributed to those bypass passages. A movable wall portion is provided in the bypass passage, and the movable wall portion is movable. By doing so, you may make it change the time which passes a detour flow path. In addition, a mechanism that makes the passing time of the game ball random in the bypass channel, for example, a croon may be provided. Thereby, since a variation can be given to the passage time of the detour channel, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the number of the specific winning openings provided in the above-described specific winning device 650 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, and may be a starting winning opening for starting a special symbol, or a predetermined winning ball based on the winning It may be a general winning opening for which is paid, or a combination of them.

  In the first to fourth control examples described above, the lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the winning at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Based on the entrance to the entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, for example, the first special symbol is drawn based on the entrance to the 1st entrance 64, and based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640. The lottery of the second special symbol may be performed. Thereby, since the variation of a game can be increased, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the sound lamp control device 113 that has received a command from the main control device 110 is configured to execute various effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects can be performed. It may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110. Thereby, since there is no need to send and receive commands, an inexpensive gaming machine that can reduce the design cost can be provided.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of a technical idea in which the drive gear 473 and the notch 422d overlap>
A gear tooth is engraved on a side surface supported by a base member and includes a first gear member and a second gear member engaged with each other. At least the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, and the second gear member Is provided with a plate-like portion covering the side surface of the gear tooth, and the plate-like portion is the gear tooth of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member, and the second gear tooth. A gaming machine formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth engaged with a gear member, wherein the plate-like portion is passed from a tooth tip side to a tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. The cutout portion is formed, and the cutout portion and the first gear member are disposed at predetermined positions, so that at least the first gear member and the plate-like portion rotate the first gear member. It is possible to form specific phase positions that are visible at intervals when viewed in the axial direction. Gaming machine A1, characterized in that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-like portion is formed on the side surface of the gear tooth of one of the pair of gear members engaged with each other. There is a gaming machine that prevents the other gear member, which is the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member, from moving in the axial direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217702). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the other gear member is extracted, it is necessary to extract one gear member in advance. For this reason, there is a problem that the maintainability is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the notch portion is formed in the plate-like portion, so that the plate-like portion and the first gear member are at least at the specific phase position as viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Visible at intervals. Therefore, since the first gear member can be pulled out through the notch portion of the plate-like portion at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be exchanged without removing the second gear member in advance. Therefore, the maintainability of the pair of gear members to be engaged can be improved.

  Since the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, the second gear member on which the plate-like portion is formed may be a rotating gear or a rack gear.

  In the gaming machine A1, the notch portion has a width formed along the direction in which the gear teeth of the second gear member are arranged on the tooth tip side of the second gear member. The distance between the points where the outer shape of the second gear member intersects the tooth tip circle of the first gear member is set equal to or slightly larger than the distance along the gear tooth continuous direction of the second gear member. A gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member can be shortened to the minimum. Thereby, the effect | action which controls that a 1st gear member moves to a rotating shaft direction can be ensured by a plate-shaped part.

  The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be an arc shape or a rectangular shape.

  Also, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear Compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of a large gear tooth by forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the member's tooth tips intersects. It can suppress that a part enlarges. Therefore, the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction can be ensured by the plate-like portion. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and formed with a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member. A gaming machine A3, which is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotational axis direction of one gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member, and a circle coaxial with the first gear member is formed. It is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotational axis direction of one gear member. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the size of the notch portion, to ensure the maximum formation area of the plate-like portion, and to improve the rigidity of the plate-like portion.

  Note that the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear Compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of a large gear tooth by forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the member's tooth tips intersects. It can suppress that a part enlarges. Therefore, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be ensured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved. In addition, in the divided | segmented part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in a proper meshing state in which the relationship between meshing gear teeth is fixed In the proper meshing state, the first gear member is moved along the notch formed in the second gear member and meshed with the second gear member. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first gear member and the second gear member are moved along the outer shape of the notch of the plate-like portion of the second gear member. When meshing with the gear member, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshing state.

  Therefore, in the case where the first gear member and the second gear member are engaged with each other in the proper meshing state, the first gear member and the second gear member are aligned at the notch portion of the plate-like portion. It can be carried out. Thereby, since the meshing adjustment of the first gear member and the second gear member can be facilitated, the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

  Note that the case where the relationship between the teeth in which the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other is fixed is an incomplete gear in which the rotating gear member to be engaged is engraved with teeth on a part of the side surface. There are cases where there is a case where a movable rack member that reciprocates with respect to the rotating gear member is engaged.

  When changing gears, for example, there is a problem of which tooth of the second gear member is engaged with each tooth of the first gear member. In this case, the proper engagement state is established in relation to the teeth meshing with each other. In order to mesh the teeth, it is only necessary to prevent the gear teeth meshing with each other from shifting by at least one tooth.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that a movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member is increased at least in the specific phase position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. For this reason, the maintenance worker can make the operation of engaging the pair of gear members (inserting the gear members at the proper meshing positions) easy, for example, by relying on the increase in movement resistance.

  That is, in a state where the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement, if the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is removed. Even if it is going to be brazed, the plate-like part is in the way and cannot be removed. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the notch portion of the plate-like portion can be formed at a position that matches the first gear member, and the first gear member is removed. Becomes easy.

  The movement resistance increases when, for example, a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member at the specific phase position is disposed, or at the specific phase position, Examples include a case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed so as to move to the moving end, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the moving end. In such a case, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap each other when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the movement end, the first gear member is viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap each other. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the moving end of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axial vertical direction). . Therefore, the wobble of the first gear member that tends to occur at the specific phase position can be mitigated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the first gear member.

  The gaming machines A1 to A6 each include a drive motor that generates a driving force, and the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a detachable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the plate-like part is formed on the machine.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in such a manner that it can be pulled out.

  Here, even if the first gear member is engaged with the second gear member from the side where the plate-like portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-like portion to prevent movement, so that the first gear member is prevented from moving. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, there is a possibility that the arrangement position of the drive motor is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the notch portion of the plate-like portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited by the relationship with the plate-like portion. The degree of freedom in arranging the motor can be improved.

  In addition, since the plate-like portion of the second gear member is formed in a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, when replacing the drive motor, the drive motor and the first gear member should be removed together. It is possible to select whether to remove only the drive motor.

  That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while keeping the first gear member in contact with the plate-like portion. By exchanging the drive motor in this way, the drive motor can be replaced while maintaining the meshed state of the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be replaced again. It is possible to eliminate the need for adjusting the meshing. Thereby, maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, as a case where the first gear member is pivotally supported in such a manner that it can be pulled out from the drive motor, the first gear member is externally fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, or the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor. A case where a plurality of pins project from the disposed adapter and the plurality of pins are inserted into the first gear member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first gear member includes a shaft portion whose one end portion is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and the other end portion opposite to the one end portion of the shaft portion. A rotating body portion coupled to the end portion, wherein the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed so as to be separable, and the shaft portion protrudes in an axial direction from an end surface of the other end portion. Provided with a plurality of projecting pins, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of projecting pins are respectively fitted, and the connection between the shaft portion and the rotating body portion is the plurality of the projecting pins. A gaming machine A8, wherein projecting pins are formed by being fitted into the plurality of fitting portions.

  Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-like portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. Thus, a force greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-like portion in contact with the first gear member. The static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, so that the plate-like portion may be deformed or excessive stress may be applied to the drive motor. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, a plurality of projecting pins are projected at the end of the shaft portion fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the rotating body portion is projected. A plurality of fitting portions into which the installation pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing static friction.

  Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it can prevent that the plate-shaped part of a 2nd gear member deform | transforms, or an excessive stress is added to a drive motor.

  In addition, as a fitting part, the hollow formed in a through-hole or a bottomed cylindrical shape is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the game machine is disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor, and extends in a direction opposite to the extending direction of the drive shaft of the drive motor along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor. A gaming machine A9, comprising a restriction unit.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7 or A8, when pulling out the driving motor from the first gear member, while pressing the driving motor against the restricting portion extending along the side surface of the driving motor Can be pulled out. Thereby, it can suppress that the axial center of a drive motor inclines with respect to a 1st gear member, and can suppress that a 1st gear member deform | transforms.

  In the gaming machine A9, the restriction portion is formed in a pair with the motor case of the drive motor interposed therebetween, and the extending end of one restriction portion of the pair of restriction portions is the motor case of the drive motor. The game machine A10 is characterized in that it is formed on the drive shaft side from an end surface opposite to the end surface on which the drive shaft is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the extended end of one of the regulating portions formed in a pair is formed closer to the drive shaft than the end surface of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one of the restricting portions can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extending end of the restricting portion and the side surface of the drive motor are disposed adjacent to each other, the extending end of the restricting portion is used as a fulcrum and the force is applied to the drive motor using the side surface of the drive motor as an operating point The distance to the action point can be made the shortest. Thereby, the force required for extraction can be suppressed.

  Further, when pulling out the drive motor using the extended end of one restricting portion as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the restricting portion on the opposite side of the one restricting portion. Thereby, when pulling out the drive motor, the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of restricting portions, the other restricting portion, which is the restricting portion on the opposite side of the one restricting portion, protrudes in the same manner as the extended end portion of the one restricting portion, or The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is formed so as to protrude from the extending end of the one restricting portion to the opposite side of the drive shaft of the drive motor.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the other restricting portion to which the drive motor is pressed when the drive motor is pulled out is at least more than the extending end of the one restricting portion. It is formed to project to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one restricting portion as a fulcrum, the action point is closest to the other restricting portion (that is, the action point is a plane perpendicular to the drive shaft of the drive motor). In the state of being arranged on a plane including the extended end of one restricting portion), the other restricting portion can prevent the drive motor from moving.

  Thereby, when pulling out the drive motor, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from the one restricting portion.

  The gaming machines A7 to A11 include a moving contact member that is disposed opposite to the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween, and the moving contact member of the first gear member is at the specific phase position. The plate-like portion of the second gear member is disposed at a distance from the first gear member in the axial direction view, and overlaps the first gear member in the axial direction view of the first gear member. The gaming machine A12, wherein in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap each other when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines A7 to A11, the first gear member is simultaneously applied to the plate-like portion of the second gear member and the moving contact member disposed to face the second gear member. Abutted. Thereby, the inclination of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<An example of the technical idea that the start gear teeth 452b1 for meshing are formed in a large size>
A main driving gear member formed as a rotating gear, and a driven gear member that starts meshing during rotation of the main driving gear member, and at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is contacted at the start of the meshing. A game comprising: a meshing tooth to be contacted; and an intermediate tooth meshing when the meshing tooth is engaged after the meshing tooth is engaged, and the meshing tooth is formed larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member (the side to which the rotation of the main driving gear member is transmitted) is started while the main driving gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor) is rotating. (For example, see JP 2013-244210 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the teeth that mesh at the start of meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are subject to collision at the beginning of meshing and are easily damaged. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are made larger, the gear teeth can be prevented from being damaged, but the backlash is increased and it becomes difficult to smoothly rotate the driven gear member. For this reason, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smooth rotation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member has durability of the meshing teeth that meshes at the start of the meshing. The meshing teeth can be prevented from being damaged. Further, since the backlash between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced in the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member can be smoothly performed when the intermediate teeth are engaged after the meshing teeth are engaged. can do. Thereby, the durability improvement of a meshing tooth and the improvement of the smoothness of rotation of a driven gear member can be made to make compatible.

  Note that the start of meshing means a state in which the meshing teeth formed on at least one of the main gear member and the driven gear member start to come into contact with the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

  Further, forming the meshing teeth in a large size means that at least one of the tooth width, the tooth thickness, or the toothpick is formed larger than the intermediate teeth.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a holding mechanism that holds the posture of the driven gear member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member is provided, so that the attitude of the driven gear member in a state where it is not meshed with the main driving gear member can be stabilized. Can do.

  Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism that holds the driven gear member in the axial direction and a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by mechanical alignment.

  In the gaming machine B2, the driven gear member includes a cutout portion that is cut out in a direction of retreating from the main drive gear member, and the cutout portion is in contact with the outer periphery of the main drive gear member at at least two points. The holding mechanism is formed by the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, a holding mechanism that holds the driven gear member can be formed by abutment of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member at two points. As a result, a separate member for maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be dispensed with.

  The cutout portion may be any shape as long as it does not interfere with the tooth tip circle of the main gear member, and the shape is not limited. However, at least the radius of curvature of the cutout portion is equal to that of the tooth tip circle of the main gear member. It is formed below the radius.

  In the gaming machine B3, the notch is formed as an arcuate recess that circumscribes the main driving gear member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the main driving gear member to improve the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. Can be made.

  That is, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the main drive gear member so that the frictional force at the time of contact is prevented from being concentrated on one place, and the frictional force is applied to the entire notch portion. Can be dispersed. Thereby, the location which holds a driven gear member with a main gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the attitude | position of a driven gear member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect in which a notch part is circumscribed by the main drive gear member is not specifically limited. That is, for example, a form circumscribing the tooth tip circle of the main driving gear member may be employed, or a form in which the gear tooth is omitted from the main driving gear member and circumscribing the omitted surface may be employed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member have their contact points drawn from the central axis of the main driving gear member to the surface connecting the roots of the driven gear member. A gaming machine B5 formed on at least both sides of a perpendicular.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the contact point between the main driving gear member and the notched portion of the driven gear member is on the surface where the root of the driven gear member is connected from the central axis of the main driving gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent the driven gear member from rotating (moving) in both directions when the notch is in contact with the main driving gear member.

  Examples of the driven gear member include a rotating gear member formed as a rotating gear and a rack gear formed as a gear that moves in parallel.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member includes an engagement projection receiving portion that is formed larger than the meshing teeth, and the notch portion is formed in the engagement projection receiving portion. The game machine B6 is characterized in that the meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member and the engaging projection receiving portion contact each other. .

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the engagement protrusion receiving portion is used as a substitute for the teeth that come into contact with the main driving gear member, so that the durability of the driven gear member is increased. Can be improved.

  The engagement protrusion receiving portion in which the notch portion is formed is not originally a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the main driving gear member, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member so that the posture of the driven gear member is This is the part of the role of maintenance. Therefore, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be engaged like the gear teeth. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engagement protrusion receiving portion formed more robustly than the gear teeth at the portion where the main gear member and the driven gear member are brought into contact with each other at the start of engagement. Can be made.

  In the gaming machine B6, the main gear member includes a hollow portion that is a recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the main gear member is brought into contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion. The gaming machine B7, wherein the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving part enters the recess part before.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the driven gear member abut on the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member. And the driven gear member can be suppressed from impact at the start of meshing.

  Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member at two points, even if the main driving gear member rotates, the driven gear member maintains its posture. On the other hand, when the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come close to the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recess formed adjacent to the meshing teeth faces the engaging projection receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is not in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member and the engaging protruding receiving portion, and the engaging protruding receiving portion enters the recess. As a result, the driven gear member starts to rotate before the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. The impact at the time of doing can be suppressed.

<An example of a technical idea in which the protruding gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452>
A driving source for generating a driving force, a main driving gear member rotated by the driving force of the driving source, a first moving member moved in conjunction with the rotation of the main driving gear member, and rotation of the main driving gear member A driven gear member that starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member, a second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. An adjusting device for starting, and the first moving member is moved within a moving range from a moving base end to a moving end, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member by the adjusting device. A plurality of positions of the first moving member at the time can be formed, the gaming machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, JP 2009-125092 A). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that there are few variations in production because the mode of the second moving member at a specific position during the movement of the first moving member is limited to one way.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the adjustment device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member when the moving member starts moving can be formed. Therefore, a plurality of variations of effects of the first moving member and the second moving member can be formed.

  When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member, the driven gear member and the driven gear member may be moved by meshing the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved by friction generated between the gear member and the main gear member and the driven gear member are formed of a magnetic material, and a magnetic force generated between the main gear member and the driven gear member. The mode etc. in which a driven gear member is moved are illustrated.

  The adjustment device may be formed in such a manner that at least one gear tooth of the main driving gear member or the driven gear member is formed so as to extend in a direction away from the rotation shaft, or between the shafts of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. The aspect etc. which are formed so that a distance can be changed are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is based on meshing, and the adjusting device is disposed on the main driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the main driving gear member. A projecting member that is allowed to protrude from the rotational direction of the main driving gear member to a position where it can abut on the driven gear member; An immersion state disposed at an impossible position can be formed, and the projecting member contacts the driven gear member when the projecting member rotates while the projecting member forms the projecting state. The game machine C2 is configured to start meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the manner in which the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are linked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjusting device is in an overhanging state or in an immersive state. Can be made.

  Here, the start and release of the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can also be performed by changing the inter-axis distance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. Required. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main driving gear member and the driven gear member may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main driving gear member includes a protruding member formed to be movable in the radial direction, and the main driving gear member and the driven gear when the protruding member protrudes (when the protruding state is formed). Engagement with the member is started. Therefore, it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, so that the parallelism of the rotation shaft is maintained. Therefore, accuracy is not required for the mechanism for moving the protruding member, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

  In addition, as a method of forming the protruding member in the extended state, a method in which the protruding member is extended by centrifugal force generated when the main driving gear member is rotated, or a solenoid is disposed inside the protruding member, and the solenoid is driven. Examples include a method of projecting the protruding member. One or more protruding members may be provided.

  In the gaming machine C2, the projecting member receives the urging force generated toward the rotation shaft side of the main driving gear member, thereby forming the immersion state at least in a stationary state of the main driving gear member, and rotating the main driving gear member. The gaming machine C3 is formed so as to be switchable between the immersive state and the overhanging state by switching the rotation speed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, by changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member, the protruding state where the protruding member contacts the driven gear member, and the protruding member with respect to the driven gear member Can be switched to the immersive state.

  As a result, the control of the operating speed of the driving source and the state of the protruding member can be linked, so that the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be made, for example, as compared with the case where the protruding member is extended by a solenoid. Control can be simplified.

  Examples of the member that generates the urging force include elastic springs such as a coil spring and a torsion spring, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient stretchability.

  A plurality of projecting members may be arranged on the main driving gear member with different phases. In this case, by adjusting the weight of each projecting member and the urging force acting on each projecting member, the amount by which each projecting member protrudes can be adjusted.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member includes a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed out of phase with the first projecting member, the first projecting member and the second projecting member, Are substantially equal in amount overhanging by the rotation of the main gear member, the main gear member includes a first rotation speed at which the first projecting member and the second projecting member form the immersion state, and the first projecting member. The first projecting member and the second projecting member can form a second rotational speed that forms the overhanging state, and the rotational speed of the main driving gear member can be set between the first rotational speed and the second rotational speed. The game machine C4 can be switched during the rotation of the main driving gear member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the phase at which the first protruding member starts to contact the driven gear member by changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, The main drive gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two types of phases, that is, the phase in which the two protruding members start to come into contact with the driven gear member.

  That is, the main gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the first projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Engagement with the driven gear member can be started with one projecting member. On the other hand, the main drive gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main drive gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the second projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Thus, the engagement with the driven gear member can be started by the second projecting member.

  In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing at which the rotational speed of the main gear member is increased, the timing for projecting and immersing the protruding member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even when the movement speed at the start of movement of the first moving member is the same, the timing for moving the second moving member can be changed by the timing for increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is difficult to predict the subsequent effects simply by confirming the speed at the start of the movement of the first moving member, and the attention of the operations of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved. . Therefore, the effect of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved.

  In the case where the first projecting member and the second projecting member project with substantially the same projecting amount, the masses of the first projecting member and the second projecting member are made equal and applied to each other. When the forces are equal, or because the mass of the first and second projecting members is different, the radially outward force generated by the rotation of the main driving gear member is different. The case where the urging | biasing force applied to a member is changed is illustrated. For example, when the urging force is generated by an elastic spring, the spring constants of the elastic spring that applies the urging force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that applies the urging force to the second protruding member are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member is formed with a first projecting member and a phase difference from the first projecting member, and the first projecting member becomes the driven gear member during the rotation of the main driving gear member. A second projecting member that is proximate to the driven gear member after approaching, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are formed with different projecting amounts projecting by the rotation of the main driving gear member. The main driving gear member includes a separation rotational speed in which the first projecting member of the projecting member forms an immersive state and the second projecting member forms the projecting state, and the first projecting member, A gaming machine C5, wherein both of the second projecting members can form a joint rotation speed at which the projecting state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the state in which the first projecting member abuts the driven gear member without changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, A state in which the protruding member abuts on the driven gear member can be formed.

  That is, the main driving gear member is rotated at a constant speed at the separation rotational speed, so that the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the second projecting member. On the other hand, when the main driving gear member is rotated at the common rotation speed, the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the first projecting member.

  That is, in order to change the position of the first moving member when the second moving member starts to move, it is not necessary to change the rotational speed of the driving source during the rotation of the main driving gear member. Can be

<Characteristic D group> (Notify by directing that you have won a prize by detouring)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, privilege grant means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the game sphere entering the entry means, and a game sphere to the entry means Variable means that can be changed to an open position where the ball can enter and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means from the restriction position to the release position based on the establishment of a specific condition A specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation to be varied until a predetermined condition is satisfied is set a plurality of times;
When the specific game is being executed by the specific game execution means, the entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A gaming machine D1 having the following characteristics.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by awarding game balls to the open prize opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, when the opening / closing operation is repeatedly performed on such a gaming machine, the gaming ball that has reached the variable winning device when the closing operation is performed cannot enter, and the launched gaming ball is wasted. There is a problem that the player's interest is reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player by suppressing the waste of a game ball launched by the player. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine D1, even a game ball that has flowed down to the restricting position of the variable means is easily entered into the entrance means at the next open position by the entrance assisting means. There is an effect that the number of non-ball game balls can be suppressed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the restricting position of the variable means to a position where the entry can be made in the entry means. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the restricting position of the variable means to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the entrance means can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the entry assisting means lowers the flow down speed so as to reach a speed at which the entry into the entry means is allowed until the variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a flow velocity reduction means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the flow-down speed is reduced so that the game ball flows down the range in which the ball can be entered until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the entry assisting means has the flow velocity reduction means for causing the entry, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the specific game is being executed, first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is at the restriction position; When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assist means, the second detection means capable of detecting the game ball, and the game ball by the first detection means And an effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when a game ball is detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting means, the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, when a game ball is detected by the second detection means, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect execution means. As a result, when a game ball enters the entrance means, the effect execution means executes whether or not a game ball that did not originally enter the entrance means is entered by the entrance assistant means. It can be determined by the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be recognized by the second effect that the player is advantageous.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the production execution unit includes a first production mode corresponding to the first production and a second production mode corresponding to the second production. A gaming machine D5 that is configured to be displayed at least on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, the display mode displays the presentation modes corresponding to the first presentation and the second presentation respectively, so that the meaning indicated by the presentation can be recognized more easily. effective.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the ball is a game ball that has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means even though the ball entry means is in the restricted position. The gaming machine D6 is characterized by being composed of productions.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, it is possible to recognize that the game ball that was on the restricted position by the second effect has entered the entrance means by the entrance assistant means. Effect of improving the interest of the elderly.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, when the specific game is being executed, the counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the second detecting means, and based on the count value by the counting means A gaming machine D7 having a notification means for notifying a notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means, so the number of game balls that are advantageous to the player There is an effect that can be discriminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, when a game ball is detected by the first detection unit, the game machine has a determination unit that determines whether the detected game ball has entered the ball entry unit, The effect executing means executes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect when the determining means determines that a game ball has not entered. A gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the third effect is that the gaming ball that could not enter the ball due to the restricted position could not finally enter the entering means. It is possible to recognize the game, and there is an effect that the game can be given sharpness.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D8, at least the specific game type determining means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means and the specific game type determined by the specific game type determining means are at least the A gaming machine D9, comprising: a specific game storage means storing a plurality of the specific games having different execution intervals of release operations.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D8, as the type of the specific game, a type with a different execution interval of the opening operation is set, so that it is easy to enter the ball by the pitching assistance means. There is an effect that it can be varied depending on the type of the specific game.

  In the gaming machine D10, the specific game stored in the specific game storage means is a first specific set with a large number of execution intervals at which the game assisting means can easily enter the game balls into the ball entry means. The game includes a game and a second specific game having a smaller execution interval that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means than the first specific game. A gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D10, there is an effect that the ease of entering by the entrance assisting means can be varied depending on the type of the specific game.

  In the gaming machine D11, the first specific game and the second specific game are set so that the number of opening operations is different.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D11, it is possible to make a difference in value between the first specific game and the second specific game, and to give the game more sharpness. .

<Feature E group> (Jump-up bonus winning control)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game sphere entering the entry means, and the entry means as game sphere Variable means that can be varied between an open position where the ball can enter and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and an opening that varies the variable means from the restriction position to the release position based on the establishment of a specific condition. Determined by a specific game executing means for executing a specific game having an action set multiple times, a specific game type determining means for determining the type of a specific game executed by the specific game executing means, and the specific game type determining means. The gaming machine E1 further includes a storage unit that stores at least a plurality of the specific games having different patterns of the opening operation as the specific game.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by winning a game ball in the open prize opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-700). On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry unit into which the game ball can enter. The entrance means is varied by an opening position where a game ball can enter, a restriction position for restricting entry of the game ball, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times is executed by the specific game executing means. The specific game type to be executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different patterns of opening actions are stored in the storage means. Thereby, it can suppress that a specific game becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A gaming machine E2 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when a specific game is being executed, the gaming ball on the restriction position of the variable means is entered by the following entry operation by the entry assisting means. Since it is easy to enter the ball, there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is changed to the open position, a game ball enters the entrance means by the entrance assistant means. A first specific game that includes many advantageous opening operation patterns that are one of the opening operation patterns that are likely to be played, and a second specific game that has fewer advantageous opening operation patterns than the first specific game. A gaming machine E3 that is at least set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous can be set. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the first specific game, after the advantageous opening operation pattern is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable means is changed to the opening position in a longer period than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening action is set at least once, and in the second specific game, a game ball is inserted into the entrance assisting means by the entrance assisting means of the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine E4 is configured by an opening operation of an unfavorable opening operation pattern that is difficult to perform.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E4, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, and an effect for executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means And a game machine E5 characterized by comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4, the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the entrance means is detected by the entrance assisting means, so that the player There is an effect that it can be easily notified that the state is advantageous.

  In the gaming machine E5, in the first specific game, after the predetermined number of times of the advantageous release operation pattern, until the next release operation is executed, the execution interval of other release operations is longer than that. A long long interval is set, and the second specific game is set with an end period of the specific game equal to or longer than the long interval after the predetermined number of disadvantage release action patterns. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game and the second specific game up to a predetermined number of opening operation patterns. There is an effect that it can be expected whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game.

  In the gaming machine E6, in the long interval and the end period, a ballistic effect executing means for executing an effect based on a detection result of the game ball by the detecting means during the first specific game or the second specific game; A gaming machine E7 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to identify whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game by the effect executed in the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Characteristic F group> (Switching SW pressing table)
Operation receiving means for receiving an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation can be received by the operation receiving means, and an operation when the operation is received by the operation receiving means An effect executing means, an effect selecting means for selecting the effect executed by the effect executing means, a storage means for storing a plurality of the effects selected by the effect selecting means, and the storage means, A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and has a probability variable means for varying the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means within the effective period. A featured gaming machine F1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, games that develop games while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) have become mainstream. What effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when a ball bulleted into the game area enters the start opening. In other words, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined which pattern and how the effect is performed for how many seconds and what the effect results. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. The effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, and as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because how many seconds it takes to display a series of effects is predetermined. In recent years, a number of player-participating pachinko machines have been developed. These request a button operation during a predetermined performance period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, the effect display is performed such that a part of the effect display is subjected to a change display of the symbol, the change display is stopped according to the button operation, and a so-called jackpot is generated according to the stop result ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2000-350846 A). However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by performing various other effects by operating the buttons. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of games.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation by the player is received by the operation receiving means. The period setting unit sets an effective period during which the operation can be received by the operation receiving unit. When the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. An effect executed by the effect executing means is selected by the effect selecting means. A plurality of effects selected by the effect selection means are stored in the storage means. The storage means stores a specific effect as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is varied by the probability variable means within the effective period. Thereby, when the player performs an operation, the probability that the specific effect is selected can be set to be different, so that the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the storage unit stores a plurality of production groups composed of the plurality of productions having different selection rates of the specific production, and the probability setting unit stores the probability setting unit stored in the storage unit. One of the plurality of effect groups is set, and the effect selecting means selects an effect from the effect group set by the probability setting means. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, by switching the effect group, the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by the probability setting means switching the effect group. Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily changed.

  The gaming machine F2 has counting means for counting the number of times operations are accepted by the operation accepting means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A gaming machine F3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F3, since the production group is switched depending on the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the game can give a fresh taste to the game.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means, so that the game preference is changed by the change of the effective period There is an effect that can be made different.

  In any of the gaming machines F2 to F4, when an operation is accepted by the operation accepting unit, the game machine has a history storage unit capable of storing an acceptance history, and the probability setting unit is stored in the history storage unit. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the production group is switched and set based on the received history.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines F2 to F4, the effect group can be switched according to the reception history, so that the probability can be varied according to the player's operation.

<Characteristic G group> (The SW effective period is notified by the accessory controlled by the voice lamp)
A game having first control means for executing game control, second control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation unit operable by the player In the machine, the first control means accepts the operation to the second control means based on the accepting means for accepting the operation of the operation unit by the player and the accepting operation by the accepting means. A reception transmitting means for transmitting a reception signal to indicate, a period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the player can be received by the reception means, and a valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means The operation of the operation unit is set to be valid based on the effective signal transmitting means that can transmit to the second control means and the validity period set by the period setting means. Based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the notification means for notifying the notification mode to be shown, the operation means operable at least in the first state and the second state different from the second state, An operation control unit that operates the operation unit from the first state to the second state, and the second control unit displays a display mode and a display unit that can display the display mode. Display control means, the display control means for displaying a predetermined effect on the display means based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means, the effective signal transmission means The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means based on the valid signal transmitted from the game machine G1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, games that develop games while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) have become mainstream. What effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when a ball bulleted into the game area enters the start opening. In other words, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined which pattern and how the effect is performed for how many seconds and what the effect results. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. The effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, and as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a button that can be operated by the player is provided in the gaming machine, and the player operates to display a notice effect such as a character on a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine in which an effective period in which a notice effect or the like is displayed when the operating means is operated is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like by the player (for example, Patent Literature 1: Special). No. 2000-350846). However, if the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not discriminate the input of the operation means or manage the effective period, the displayed effective period and the actual effective period are deviated. There was a problem of lowering interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of games.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the game control is controlled by the first control means. Based on the control signal from the first control means, the game control is executed by the second control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted by the accepting means. Based on the reception of the operation by the reception unit, the reception signal indicating that the operation has been received by the second control unit is transmitted by the reception transmission unit. The period setting unit sets an effective period during which the player's operation can be received by the receiving unit. An effective signal indicating the effective period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the effective signal transmitting means. Based on the fact that the effective period set by the period setting means has been reached, a notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit has been set to be effective is notified by the notification means. At least the first state and the second state different from the second state are actuated by the actuating means. Based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the operation means is operated from the first state to the second state by the operation control means. In the second control means, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. An effect mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The display control means displays the predetermined effect mode on the display means by the display control means based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmitting means, an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means. Thereby, even when there is a deviation between the notification mode for notifying the effective period operated by the second control unit and the effect mode indicating the effective period controlled by the second control unit, the operating unit operates in the second state. The effective period can be identified based on the timing of the determination. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize the effective period, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine G1 has main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling the game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the lottery means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means, Output means capable of outputting, to one control means, a start signal for starting dynamic display of the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means; The period setting means of the first control means sets the valid period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the effective period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means that controls the first control means, so that it is more accurate. There is an effect that an effective period can be set.

In gaming machine G2,
The gaming machine G3, wherein the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the valid signal is transmitted to the second control means by the valid transmission means. There is an effect that it is possible to determine the start of.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state different from the second state before the start of the effective period.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state before the start of the effective period, so that the player in advance that the effective period starts There is an effect that can be notified to.

  In the gaming machine G4, the actuating means is provided so that an actuating portion that is actuated on the front side that overlaps the display area of the display means is arranged, and the display control means of the second control means is the effective period The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that a specific effect mode is displayed on the display means within a period overlapping with a period in which the operating means is operated in the specific state before the start of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the operation means and the display means are arranged close to each other so that the notification of the effective period on the display means and the notification on the operation means can be easily recognized. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific symbol information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping with the operating part of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, the specific effect is composed of a specific symbol display that is variably displayed from the display area overlapping with the operating part. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that

<Characteristic H group> (Pseudo ream and background level are linked)
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, in a gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, the dynamic display execution means The dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the identification information displayed dynamically, and the lottery result by the lottery means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means A plurality of expectation notice display modes in which the production mode is variably set according to the expectation degree indicating that the result is a specific lottery result, and a general expectation forecast indicating the total expectation level in the plurality of expectation notice display modes Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those having a predictive display control means for displaying at least said display means and a display mode.

  Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a display screen is provided in a pachinko machine that is an example of a gaming machine, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of a start condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, when a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition and a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777 or the like). In many cases, a game is performed in which a special game state (for example, a game state called a win) is generated after the stop (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569). . In such a gaming machine, the expected degree of winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on the display screen. In the gaming machines exemplified above, when a plurality of notice displays indicating the degree of expectation are displayed, it is difficult to understand the overall degree of expectation. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by performing an easy-to-understand performance.

  According to the gaming machine H1, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a plurality of expectation notices that are set by varying the production mode according to the expectation indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result The display mode and the total expectation level notice display mode indicating the overall expectation level in the plurality of expected preview display modes are displayed on at least the display unit by the preview display control unit. As a result, since the overall expectation can be identified by the general expectation notice display mode, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the expected degree advance notice display mode displayed by the prior notice display control means displays a total that indicates an expected degree that is higher than the expected degree displayed in the overall expected degree advance notice display form. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that a variable notice display mode is set to be changed to an expectation notice display form.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to increase the expectation displayed in the general expectation notice display form by displaying the expectation notice display form. There is also an effect that the player can be interested in the expectation notice display mode.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. An expectation notice that determines the type of the expectation notice display form displayed by the notice display control means based on the dynamic display form decision means and the dynamic display form decided by the dynamic display form decision means A gaming machine H3 having display mode determining means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the type of the expected announcement display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode. It is possible to notify the player, and there is an effect that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by not being accompanied by the content and expectation of the dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, after temporarily stopping the identification information in a predetermined manner, pseudo stop means for executing an effect of starting dynamic display at least once, and the number of temporary stops executed by the pseudo stop means A number-of-times determining means that determines the dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and the lottery result by the lottery means, and the expectation notice display control means is the pseudo-stop The gaming machine H4, wherein the variable notice display mode is displayed on the display means based on the temporary stop being executed by the means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2 or the gaming machine H3, it is possible to give value to the temporary stop, and to allow the player to play a game with the expectation of the temporary stop. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the overall expectation advance notice display mode indicating a predetermined expectation is determined by the expectation level advance display mode determination unit. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the specific dynamic display mode set in such a manner is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or the gaming machine H4, the overall expectation notice display mode is set in association with the dynamic display mode, so that the total associated with the dynamic display mode The expectation can be notified to the player, and the discomfort given to the player can be reduced because the contents of the dynamic display mode and the overall expectation are not accompanied.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the notice display control means displays the comprehensive expectation notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time when the predetermined condition is established. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the overall expectation notice display mode showing the same expectation level is continuously displayed in the dynamic display of information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the overall expectation level is inherited across a plurality of dynamic displays, so that it is possible to have fun of stacking games. .

In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, a storage unit that stores a plurality of dynamic display mode groups configured in a plurality of different dynamic display modes as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit And setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining unit,
The overall expectation advance notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time is displayed as a display mode indicating the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H3 to H6, it is possible to notify the dynamic display mode group set by the general expectation level, so that various effects can be given to the player. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H7, when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display unit, the setting unit sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the general expectation announcement display mode displayed. A gaming machine H8 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H7, the production mode group that matches the overall expectation level is set, so that the overall expectation level and the production mode group can be related, and the player There is an effect that it is possible to make the notification easy to understand.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine Z1 to play. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines, and in this pachinko machine, a start condition is established when a game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the variation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is generated and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.
Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or a time until a predetermined number of winnings), and such opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 Repeated) times. A lot of prize balls can be paid out by awarding game balls to the open prize opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-700).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is advantageous to the player on the basis of a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege, a variable means that can be varied between an opening position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a regulation position that restricts the entry of the game ball, and the variable means are identified Based on the establishment of the condition, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the opening operation to be varied from the restriction position to the release position until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set a plurality of times, and the specific game execution means In a case where a specific game is being executed, there is a ball entry assisting unit that makes it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable unit to enter the ball entry unit in the subsequent opening operation.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the entry assisting means guides the gaming ball on the restricted position of the variable means to a position where the entry can be made into the entry means. It has a taxiway.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the entry assisting means enters the entry means until the variable means is changed to the open position. The flow rate lowering means lowers the flow rate so that the flow rate falls within a possible range.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, and when the specific game is being executed, the variable means is in the restricted position and enters the ball. A first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be detected, and the game ball detected by the first detection means can be detected when the entry assisting means enters the entrance means When the game ball is detected by the second detection means and the first detection means, the first effect is executed, and when the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the first effect and Has an effect execution means for executing a different second effect.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, even a game ball that has flowed down on the restricting position of the variable means can be easily entered into the entrance means at the next open position by the entrance assisting means. There is an effect that the number of game balls that do not enter the entrance means can be suppressed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the entry assisting unit can enter the gaming ball on the restriction position of the variable unit into the entering unit. Since the guide path for guiding to the position is provided, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the entrance means can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the range in which the variable means can enter the pitching means until it is changed to the open position. Since the entrance assisting means has a flow-down speed lowering means for reducing the flow-down speed so that the game ball can flow down, an effect that more game balls can enter the ball-entry means. There is.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting means, the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, when a game ball is detected by the second detection means, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect execution means.
As a result, when a game ball enters the entrance means, the effect execution means executes whether or not a game ball that did not originally enter the entrance means is entered by the entrance assistant means. It can be determined by the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be recognized by the second effect that the player is advantageous.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
650 Ball entry means 652a First detection means 652b Second detection means 653 Part of entry assist means 654 Variable means 114 Part of effect execution means S1004 Specific game execution means

Claims (4)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance means, a privilege grant means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player;
Variable means that can be varied between an open position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball;
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation for changing the variable means from the restriction position to the release position until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on establishment of the specific condition is set a plurality of times;
When the specific game is being executed by the specific game execution means, the entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the restriction position of the variable means to enter the entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the ball entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball at the restriction position of the variable means to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry means. Machine.   The ball entry assisting means includes a flow velocity reduction means for reducing the flow velocity so that the flow velocity falls within a range in which the ball can be entered until the variable means is changed to the open position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is one that has. First detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered due to the variable means being in the restricted position when the specific game is being executed;
A second detection means capable of detecting the game ball when the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the entrance means by the entrance assistant means;
A first effect is executed based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, and a second effect different from the first effect is executed when the game ball is detected by the second detection means. The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising: an effect execution unit that performs the operation.

Images